Professional Documents
Culture Documents
TECHNICAL MANUAL
FOR BUILDINGS
4
By Order of the Secretaries of the Army, the Navy, and the Air Force:
E. C. MEYER
Gener4 UnitedStates Army
Of fifi. -______________ -Chief
C_________
of Staff
ROBERTM. JOYCE
BrigadierGener4UnitedStates Army
The Adjutant General
W. M. ZOBEL
RearAdmiral CEC, US Navy Commander
Naval FacilitiesEngineeringCommand
DISTRIBUTION:
Army: To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-34B, requirements for TM 6-800
Series: Engineering and Design for Real Properties Facilities.
Air Force:, F
Navy: 11 copy each unless otherwise specified)
SNDL 1 FA10
I 23AI ICOMNAVFORAZORES onW I FAIS
1 24J1 4 PAlS (Au. Brawdy, Buxton, Lowes only)
S 27G 6 FAS2
2 S9B 4 FB6
1 89C1 7 FB7 (Alameda. Flbn. Lmoore, Oak Harbor,
2 39E Miraar, North Iland, Moffet Field only)
I 42AS 2 FBIO (Adak.Midwayonly)
4 45B I FE21
1 49 1 FB31 Iouamonly)
2 61A 2 FB34 (Kadea. Sasebo only)
S 51B1 4 FB36 (Big Sur. Coos Head, Ferndale. and Pacific
3 51B3 Beach only)
4 B2A VJCS. NSA. DLA. and DNA ony) 6 FB41
1 B5 (USCO only) 1 FB48
1 C34 (Holy 1 only) 1 FC3 Lndon only)
8 ESA 2 FC6
6 FA6 (Bermuda. Brunswick, Cecil Field, Key West, 1 FC7
Jacksonville. Virginia Bch onjy) I FC12
6 FA7 (Guantanamo, Keflavik, Brooklyn, Panama I FC14
Cnal Mayport Roosevelt Roads only) 1 FD2
1 FE2
:~~ w ' C'7: j -- -
FOREWORD
ITis updated manual with revised seismic design provisions governs the design and construction of Army,
Navy, and Air Force facilities and supersedes the April 1973 issue. Basic criteria are stated herein with aug-
mentations and clarifications of the criteria. Also, commentary and design examples are included to provide
comprehensive applications and guidelines for the seismic-resistant design of facilities. The organization of
the manual has been revised to present the topics in a more orderly manner. Ihe dynamic analysis approach
for seismic design is not covered but its use is not precluded in this manual.
The basic criteria cited are the "Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and Commentary" as published
by the Structural Engineers Association of California (SEAOC). The design concepts and applications for the
design of: (1)supports for electrical, mechanical end architectural elements and (2)structures other than build-
ings, have been revised. The applications of essential, high risk and other occupancy type structures are in-
cluded with the use of the importance factors vice high-loss potential and low-loss potential facilities in the
1973 issue.
ITe general direction for the revision of the manual was by a Department of Defense TriServices Seismic De-
sign Committee, i.e., representatives of the Office of the Chief of Engineers, Headquarters, US Army; Naval
Facilities Engineering Command, Headquarters, US Navy; and Directorate of Engineering and Services,
Headquarters, US Air Force. Detailed development of the manual was under the direction of the Office of the
Chief of Engineers, Washington, DC and the US Army Division Engineer, South Pacific, San Francisco,
California.
Coordination was maintained with the Naval Facilities Engineering Command at Headquarters, Washington,
DC, and Western Division, San Bruno, California; and US Air Force Civil Engineering Offices at Headquar-
ters, Washington, DC, and Western Regional Office, San Francisco, California.
I
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Si CONVERSION UNITS
In view of the present accepted practice for building technology in this country, common U.S. units of
measurements have been used throughout this publication. In recognition of the position of the United States
as a signatory to the General Conference on Weights and Measures, which gave official status to the
International System of Units (SI) in 1960, the table below is presented to facilitate conversion to SI Units.
Readers interested in malkin further use of the coherent system of SI units are referred to: NBS SP 330,1972
Edition, The International System of Units; and ASTM E380-76, Standard for Metric Practice. For conver-
sion of formulas used in reinforced concrete design, the reader Is referred to ACI 318-77, Appendix D.
Table of Conversion Factorsto SI Units
To ConvertFrom To Multiply By
!.
II
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3 Chap. 13
TECHNICAL MANUAL
NO. 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-S55 DEPARTMENTS OF THE ARMY, THE NAVY,
AIR FORCE MANUAL AND THE AIR FORCE
NO. 88-3, CHAI'rER 13 Wshington. DC. 15 Februwry 1982
Iv
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-35
AFM 883. Chap. 13
Paragraph Page
Piping in Buildings .................................................. ........ 10-7 10-9
Stacks ............................................................ 10-8
.......... 10-10
BridgeCranesandMonorails ................................................... 10-9 10-17
Elevators ................................................................... 10-10 10-17
Typical Details for Seuring Equpment .......................................... 10-11 10-22
CHAPTER 11. STRUCTURES OTHER THAN BUILDINGS
PurposeandScope . .......................................................... 11-1 11-1
General Requirment ........................................................ 11-2 11-1
Elevated Tanksand Other Inverted Pendulum Sbuo w. ........................... 11- 11-1
Vertka TanklhnGround). .. ................................................ 11-4 11-1
HorinontalTanks (On Ground).................................................. 11-5 11-10
Retaining W n .............................................................. 11-6 11-10
Bured Structures ............................................................ 11-7 11-10
References .................................................................. 11-8 11-10
CHAPER 1l UTILITY SYSTEMS
PurposeandScope ........................................................... 12-1 12-1
General Requirements .............. .......................................... 12-2 12-1
Earthquake Considerations for Utiliyyst ms. ................................... 12-3 12-1
General Planning Considerations ............................................... 12-4 12-1
Specific PlanningConsiderations ............................................... 12-5 12-2
Design Considesration ........................................................ 12-6 12-3
A-BultDawings ................. .......................................... 12-7 12-4
SeismicDetails . .............................................................. 1246 12-4
APPENDIX A. STRUCTURALSYSTEMS .................................................... A-1 A-I
APPENDIX B. D W HF AGMS ............................................................. B-1 B-1
APENDxC. SHEAR WALLS ............................................................ C-1 C-1
APPENDIX D. SPACE FRAMES ........................................................... D-i D- 1
APPENDIX E. REINFORCED MASONRY ............ ....................................... E-1 E-i
APPENDIX F. MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ELEENTS ............................... F-1 F-i
APPENDIX . STRUCTURES OTHER THANBUILDINGS .................................... G -1 G-i
INDEX .. .. Index-i Index-i
V
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
LIST OF TABLES
3-1. Z-Coeffcient.. 34
3-2. I-Coefficient .34
3-3. HorizontalForce Factor "K" for Buildings or Other Structures .3-11
3-4. Horizontal Force Factor "Cp" for Elements of Structure ............................ -12
3-5. Seismic Zone Tabulation, U.S .. . ...................................... 3-18
3-&. Seismic Zone Tabulation, Outide U.& ........... ................................ 3-21
3-7. Approved Building System ....................-.-.-.-.- .. - . .. 3-24
4-1. CRISIS ' ................................................................ 4-
4-2. S as a Function ofTIT ............... - . - - - - - - ... 4-6
4-3. CS as a Function of T and T. ................................................... 9
4-4.
4-5. Force Distribution
Foc itiuin4-11 ................................................... .........................................4-11
4-5. Allowable Shear and Tension on Bolt. in Concrete ; .............................. .. 4-18
5-1. Flexibility Limitation on Diaphragm ............................................. 5-5
5-2. Shear Values of Poured Gypsum Diaphragm .............. ........... 5-14
5-3. Shear on Anchor Bolts and Dowels-Reinforced Gypsum Concrete .................... -15
5-4. Maximuib Shear on Trussed Tees ..................................... 5-15
5-5. Flexibility and Allowable Shears ....................... 5-39
5-6. Recommended Shear in Pounds Per Foot for Horizontal
Plywood Diaphragms with Framing of Douglas Fir,
Larch, or Southern Pine for Wind or Seismic Loading ........................... 5 -41
8-la. Assumed Dimensions (Inches) for Effective Area of Concrete Block ................... 8-4
8-lb. Equivalent Thickness of Hollow Masonry for Computing Shear Parallel to Face .......... 84
8-2. Basic Working Stresses for Reinforced Masonry ................................... 8-7
8-3. Allowable Stresses for Reinforcing Bars .......................................... 8-8
8-4. Maximum Unsupported Wall Height or Length ............. ! ...................... 8-10
8-5. Minimum Wall Reinforcement .................................................. 8-11
8-6. Column or Pilaster Height Limitation ............................................ 8-12
8-7. Dimensions of Wall Piers (Inches) . .............................................. -13
8-8. Allowable Shear on Bolts and Dowels ........... ................................. 8-23
8-9. Averae Weight of Concrete Masonry Unit (2-Cell Unit,8 X 8BX IS')................ 8-30
8-10. Average Weight of Completed Wall ............................................. 8-30
10-1. Amplification Factor, AP, for Flexible or Flexibly Mounted Equipment .--.-. 10-4
10-2. Multiplication Factors for Figure 10-7, In Seismic Zones 1,2, and 3 or When
ZIApC, Not Equal to 1.5 .10-10
vI
TM 6-80-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Te Page
2-1. Schematic of Low-Ri Building Instantaneous Distortion During Ground Motion .2-2
2-2. Schematic Showing Shear-Type Distortion.2-2
2-8. Schematic Showing Bending-Type Distortion .2-2
2-4. BasIc Lateral Force sisting Systems .2-7
la) Frame Action by Moment-Resisting Bents
(b Shear Wals as Vertical Cantilevers
(cl Braced Frames of Steel
J-1. Seiic Zone Map-Contiguous States.- 14
8-2 Seismic Zone Map-Alasa- -15
3-. Seismic Zone Map-Hawaii .8-16
8-4. SeIsmic Zone Map-Californisa adNevad a.-- 17
4-1. SeismIc Forces ..................................- 4-2
4-6. Period Calculation ............................................................ 4-5
(a)
4-8 ...............................................................
C sT
C...aT4-8
4-4. Tributary Weights ataSt.r. ................................................... 4-10
4-1. f Forces ............................................................... 4-1
4-6. Transfer of Forces to Ground-......................... 4-14
4-7. Dual System-Deformations-.......................... 4-16
5-1. Floor Slab Diaphragm-............................. 5-2
5-2. Roof Deck Diaphragm . ........................................................ 6-2
5-3. Truss Diaphragm ............................................................ 6-2
5-4. Bracing an Industrial Building ..................... -.-- 6-2
6-6. Diaphragm FeIdbilitles Relative to Flexibities of the Walls ....... .................. 5-4
(a) Schematic Plan
N(hRigid Diaphragm
(c) Semi-Rigid Diaphragm
(d) Flexible Diaphragm
5-6. Torsional Momentson Diaphragns ............-................................. 5-4
(a) No Rotation on Diaphragm
(b) Rotation on Rigid Diaphragm
(ci Cantilever Diaphragm
6-7. Anchorage of Cast-in-Plac Concrete Slabs Not Monolithic with Supporting Framing .... 6-8
6-8. Attachment of Superimposed Diaphragm Slab to Precast Units ...... ................ 5-9
5-9. Precast Concrete Diaphragms-Requirements for Continuousy Bonded Precast Unt .... 6-10
5-9a. Concrete Diaphragms Using Precast Units-Detal Permitted In Seismic Zone 1Only ... 6-11
6-10. Corner of Monolithic Concrete Diaphragm ...................................... ;. 6-12
5-1L Concrete Diaphragms-Typical Connection Details ........ ........................ 5-1S
5-12. Poured Gypsum Diaphragms-Typical Details .................................... 6-16
5-1S. Poured Gypsum Diaphragms-Typical Details with Open-Web Joists ...... ........... 5-17
5-14. Poured Gypsum Diaphragms-Typical Details with Open-Web Joists ...... ........... 5-18
6-15. Steel Dek Diaphragms-Typical Details of Fastening ............................. 5-21
6-16. Steel Deck Diaphrgms-Typical Attachments for Type A Diaphragms ..... ............. 5-22
5-17. Steel Deck Diaphragms of Type A Diaphragms-Typical Details with Open-Web Joists . 6-23
6-18. Steel Deck Diaphragm Type A-Typical Details with Open-Web Joists ................- 6-24
6-19. Steel Deck Diaphragm Type A-Allowable Sheara and Flexibility Factors ..... ......... 6-25
5-20. Steel Deck Diaphragm Type A-Aowab Shea and FlexibilityFFacto- .............. 5-26
6-21. Steel Deck Diaphragm Type A-Sample Calculation No. ........................... 6-27
6-22. Steel Deck Diaphragm Type A-Sample Calculation No. 2 ......... .................. 5-28
5-2S. Steel Deck Diaphragm Type A-Sample Calculation No. ....... .................... 6-29
5-24. Steel Deck Diaphragm Type A-Sample Calculation No. 4 ....... .................... 6-0
5-25. Steel Deck Diaphragm Type A-Sample Calculation No. ....... .................... 6-S1
5-26. Steel Deck Diaphragms-Typical Atchmen$,s to Frame for Type B Diaphragms ....... 6-83
5-27. Steel Deck Diaphragns-Typical Attachentof Shear Transfer Elements for Type .... 5-34
5-28. Steel Deck Diaphragms-Typical Details T e B Diaphragms ...... ................. 5-S5
5-29. Steel Deck Diaphragms-Typical Attachnent of Deck with Concrete Fl ..... ......... 5-S6
5-S0. Steel Deck Diaphragms with Concrete F-Allowable Sheas and Flexibility Factors .... 5-37
5-81. Steel Deck Diaphragns-Sample Calculation .......... ........................... 5-S8
vil
- -
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap..13
Figure Title Page
5-32. Wood Diaphragm and Shear Wall Nailing .5-43
5-33. Wood Diaphragms-Typical Connection Details. 5-44
5-34. Wood Diaphragms-Typical Strut Connection Details .5-45
5-35. Wood Diaphragms-Typical Details of Connections to Steel Frame .5-4B
Vlil
TM 5-09-10
NAVFAC P-45
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Figure Title Page
8-. Veneered Wells and Cavity Wlls .. 8-16
(a) Anchored Veneer (Cavity Wall)
lb) Adhered Thin Veneer
8-9. Reinforced Masonry Wall .. 8-17
8-10. Reinforced Hollow Masonry .. 8-20
8-11. Reinforced Filled Cell Masonry .. 8-21
8-12. Control Joints .. -22
8-1S. Typical Fire WaL.. 8-24
8-14. Typical Wall Reinforcement Reinforced Masonry ..- 26
8-15. Intersection and Corner Details..................... . 8-27
la) Partitions Abutting Structural Walls
(b) Intersection of Structural Bond Beams
(c) Seismic Joint
(dl Corner Detail
8-16. Miscellaneous Details .. 8-28
8-17. Accessories ....... 8-29
lx
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 883, Chap. 13
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
1-1. Purpose and scope. a. Purpose. This man- 1-3. Preparation of project documents.
ual prescribes criteria and furnishes guidance for the a. Design Analysis. A design analysis conforming
design of buildings, some structures other than to agency standards will be provided with final
buildings, mechanical and electrical equipment sup- plans. This design analysis will include seismic de-
ports, and utility systems in areas subject to sign computations for the stresses in the lateral
damaging earthquakes. These criteria apply to all force resisting elements and their connections, and
elements responsible for design of military con- for the resulting lateral deflections and nterstory
struction located in seismic regions. In overseas drifts. (Note: In Zone 1, if wind loads control the de-
construction, where local materials of grades other sign, a complete seismic analysis is not required;
than those herein are used, the working stresses, however, the seismic detailing requirements will be
grades, and other requirements of this manual will provided as specified.) The first portion of the De-
be modified as applicable. sign Analysis, called the Basis of tesign, will con-
b. &ope. This manual is for guidance in the de- tain the following specific information:
sign of buildings and other structures that are gen- (1) A statement of the seismic zone for which
erally regular in shape, size, and concept. Buildings the structure will be designed.
and other structures that are highly Irregular will (2) A description of the structural system se
require analysis that rely on greater application of lected for resisting lateral forces and discussion of
engineering judgment and experience in seismic de- the reasons for its selection. If setbacks are in-
sign. Dynamic analysis requirements and altera- volved, the application of setback design provisions
tions or evaluations of existing structures are not will be established.
covered in this manual. (3) A statement regarding compliance with this
c. Design Criteria. Preparation of seismic design manual and the selected values of "K", "C", "",
will be In accordance with the criteria and design "l", and W'.
standards herein. Criteria and design standards (4) Any possible assumed future expansion for
covered in the agency manuals for ordinary or non- which provisions are made.
seismic design are applicable to seismic design ex- b. Drawings. Preparation of drawings will con
cept where overriding criteria are contained herein. form to agency standards for ordinary construction
The seismic design and detail requirements herein with the following additional specific requirements
are from the provisions of the "Recommended Lat- for seismic construction.
eral Force Requirements and Commentary," 1975 (1) Preliminary drawings will contain a state-
edition, of the Structural Engineers Association of ment that seismic design will be incorporated. The
California, 171 Second Street, San Francisco, CA Basis of Design submitted with these drawings will
94105, except as modified herein. give full information concerning the seismic loads
that will be used, and the assumptions that will be
1-2. Organization of manual. The general pro- made in carrying out the seismic design.
visions for seismic design are covered by chapters 2, (2) Construction drawings for seismic areas will
3, and 4. Chapter 2 provides an introduction to the include the following additional special information:
basic concepts of seismic design; chapter 3 contains (a) A statement of the Seismic Zone and the
the seismic design provisions; and chapter 4 pro- "K", "C", "S" "I", and "Z" values will be added to
vides a guide to the implementation of the seismic the tabulation of design loads.
design provisions. Chapters 5 through 8 are con- (b) A list of the portions of the structure for
cerned with seismic design in relation to structural which design was controlled by wind load will be
materials, elements, and components. Chapters 9 placed immediately below the statements concern-
and 10 cover seismic provisions for nonstructural ing seismic design.
components such as architectural, mechanical, and (c) Details of construction will be similar or
electrical elements. Chapter 11 covers structures equal to the typical seismic details shown in the var-
other than buildings, and chapter 12 gives some cus sections of this manual.
guidelines for designing for the effects of earth- -j (dJ Assumptions made for future extensions
quakes on utility systems. The appendices provide or additions.
examples of design calculations. (3) Site adaptation of standard drawings will in-
1-l
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
dude design revisions for the seismic area as re- seismic design provisionL However, in other car
quired. where the basic concept or configuration of s
c. Specifications. Project specifications wi be building does not provide an efficient system of lat-
prepared in accordance with agency standards and eral force resistance, the additional costs to provide
practices for ordinary construction except that ap. sepmic force resistance can be appreciable. In geo-
plicable seismic guide specifications or supplements graphical locations where the local construction in-
will be used as appropriate. dustry is not experienced with the special details of
d Cost Estimates The special provisions re selic resistant construction, the differential costs
quired for seismic design generally result in an In- for seismic desiga will generally be greater than for
crease in construction costs of 1 percent to per. those areas, such as California, where seismic design
cent. The amount of this increased cost depends on construction is in general use. For example, the
the overall concept and configuration of the building premium for seisic construction wil be higher for
system and the geographical location of the building reinforced masony, ductile reinforced concrete
site. In some cases, a small amount of additional re- frames, and ductile structural steel frames in areas
inforcing bars, anchors, stiffener plates, or weld ma where these types of construction are not common.
terlal may be all that is required to provide for the
1-2
------- --
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
CHAPTER 2
INTRODUCTION TO SEISMIC DESIGN
2-1. Purpose and scope. his chapter provides during a major earthquake. Unfortunately, there is
an Introduction to the basic concepts of designing no one description that fits all the ground motions
buildings to resist inertia forces and related effects that might occur at any particular site. The charac-
caused by earthquakes. General guidance is given teristics of the ground motion are dependent on the
for the selection and use of proper structural sys- magnitude of the earthquake (i.e., energy released),
tems. distance from the source of the earthquake (depth as
well as horizontal distance), distance from the sur-
2-2. Gonoral. An earthquake causes vibratory face faulting (this may or may not be the same as
ground motions at the base of a structure and the the horizontal distance from the source), the nature
structure actively responds to these motions. of the geological formations between the source of
Seismic design involves two distinct steps: deter- the earthquake and the building, and the nature of
mining (or estimating) the forces that will act on the the soil in the vicinity of the building site (e.g., hard
structure and designing the structure to resist these rock or alluvium). Although the fully accurate pre-
forces and to keep deflections within prescribed lim- diction of ground motion is not possible, the art of
its. Other hazards, related to site location, are dis- ground motion prediction has progressed in recent
cussed in paragraph 2-7. years such that design criteria have been estab-
a. Determinationof Forces There are two general lished in areas where historical earthquake records
approaches to determining seismic forces: an equiv- and geological information are available.
alent static force procedure and a dynamic analysis 2-4. Structural response. If the base of a
procedure. This manual Illustrates the equivalent structure is suddenly moved, as in the case of seis-
static force procedure. Dynamic analysis procedures mic ground motion, the upper part of the structure
are not within the scope of this manuaL but some will not respond instantaneously but will lag be-
discussion of structural dynamics is Included in this cause of inertial resistance and the flexibility of the
chapter in order to explain the rationale of the equiv- structure. This concept is illustrated in figures 2-1,
alent static force procedure that is used in this 2-2, and 2-3 by showing the motion in one plane.
manual. The stresses and distortions in the building are the
b. Design of the Structure.The development of an same as if the base of the structure were to remain
adequate earthquake-redstant design for a struc- stationary while time-varying horizontal forces are
ture Includes the following (1)selecting a workable applied to the upper part of the building. These
overall structural concept, (2) establishing member forces, called Inertia forces, are equal to the product
sizes, (3) performing a structural analysis of the of the mass of the structure times acceleration, or
members to verify that stress and displacement re- F - ma (mass is equal to weight divided by the
qulrements are satisfied, and (4) providing struc- acceleration of gravity). Because the ground motion
tural and nonstructural details so that the building at a point on the earth's surface is three dimensional
can perform as intended. The structural designer (one vertical and two horizontal components), the
must visualize the response of the structure to structures affected will deform in a three-dimen-
earthquake ground motions and provide a design sional manner. Generally, however, the inertia
that will accommodate the distortions and stresses forces generated by the horizontal components of
which will occur in the building. In certain cases, ground motion required the greater consideration
some elements cannot accommodate these stresses for seismic design since adequate resistance to
and distortions. Elements such as rigid stairs, rigid vertical seismic loads is usually provided by the
partitions, and irregular wings can be isolated in or- member capacities required for gravity load design.
der to reduce the detrimental effects to the lateral For ordinary structures within the scope of this
force-resisting system manual, the inertia forces are represented by
equivalent static forces. However, buildings can be
2-3. Ground motion. The response of a given idelizd by the use of simplified models that
building depends on the characteristics of the represent the dynamic characteristics of the
ground motion, therefore, It would be highly desir- structure. For special structures the idealized
able to have a quantitative description of the ground models are subjected to time-history, response-
motion that might occur at the site of the building spectrum, or other dynamic analyses, and the re-
2-1
TM 5-409-10
NAVFAC P-355 13
AFM 88-3, Chap.
Xnatantaneou
Low-Mire Buiding
Sohematic of Gound Motion
Figure 2-1. DistortionDuring
Most build-a
ings have
combination
of these
diw.
t
Schematio Shoing
4 I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~- Figure 2-3. Bending-*Pe
Die-
Shematio ShOting tortion
Figure 2-2. Sher-tI Dis-
tovtion
2-2
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
suits are used to determine the forces in the for its response to ground motion by representing
the structural properties in an idealized mathemati-
building. cal model as an assembly of masses Interconnected
are com-
2-5. Behavior of buildings. Buildings elements by springs and dampers. The tributary weight to
posed of vertical and horizontal structural each floor level is lumped into a single mass, and the
which resist lateral forces. The vertical elements force-deformation characteristics of the lateral
that are used to transfer lateral forces to the ground force-resisting walls or frames between floor levels
are: (1) shear walls, (2) braced frames, and (3) are transformed into equivalent story stiffnesses.
moment-resisting frames. Horizontal elements that Because of the complexity of the calculations for
are used to distribute lateral forces to vertical methods of dynamic analysis, the use of a computer
elements are: (1) diaphragms and (2) horizontal program is generally necessary; these complex
bracing. Horizontal forces produced by seismic methods of analysis are generally used for critical
motion are directly proportional to the masses of structures. However, most buildings are designed
building elements and are considered to act at the by the equivalent static force procedure prescribed
centroid of the mass of these elements. All of the in this manual.
inertia forces originating from the masses on and of c. Response of Elements Attached to the Build-
the structure must be transmitted to the lateral ing. Elements attached to the floors of the building
force-resisting elements, to the base of the structure (e.g., mechanical equipment, ornamentation, piping,
and into the ground. The path of these forces is nonstructural partitions) respond to floor motion in
discussed in chapter 4, paragraph 4-4d much the same manner that the building responds
a. Demands of EarthquakeMotion. The loads or to ground motion. However, the floor motion may
vary substantially from the ground motion. The
forces which a structure sustains during an earth-
quake result directly from the distortions induced in high frequency components of the ground motion
tend to be filtered out at the higher levels in the
the structure by the motion of the ground on which building while the components of ground motion
it rests. Base motion is characterized by displace- that correspond to the natural periods of vibrations
ments, velocities, and accelerations which are
erratic in direction, magnitude, duration, and se- of the building tend to be magnified. If the elements
are rigid and are rigidly attached to the structure,
quence. Earthquake loads are nertia forces related
to the mass, stiffness, and energy absorbing (e.g., the forces on the elements will be in the same pro-
portion to the mass as the forces on the structure.
damping and ductility) characteristics of the struc- But elements that are fexible and have periods of
ture. During the life of a structure located in a vibration close to any of the predominant modes of
seismically active zone, it is generally expected that the building vibration will experience forces In a
the structure will be subjected to many small earth- proportion substantially greater than the forces on
quakes, some moderate earthquakes, one or more the structure. For further discussion. refer to chap.
large earthquakes, and possibly a very severe earth-
quake. In general, it is uneconomical or impractical ter 10.
to design buildings to resist the forces resulting 2-6. Nature of seismic codes. Codes and
from the maximum credible earthquake within the of
criteria are established from the performance
elastic range of stress. If the earthquake motion is buildings in past earthquakes. A code represents the
severe, most structures will experience yielding in consensus of a committee. Consensus means ele-
some of their elements. The energy-absorption ca- ments of compromise and generalized statements to
pacity of the yielding structure will limit the cover uncertainties and limitations. Codes must of
damage so that buildings that are properly designed necessity be short and relatively simple; therefore,
and detailed can survive earthquake forces which they do not account for all aspects of the complex
are substantially greater than the design forces that phenomena of the response of actual structures to
are associated with allowable stresses in the elastic actual earthquakes. Seismic design codes provide a
range. Seismic design concepts must consider set of design static forces to represent the dynamic
building proportions and details for their ductility response of a structure subject to a complex earth-
(capacity to yield) and reserve energy-absorption ca- quake ground motion.
pacity for surviving the inelastic deformations that of a building code
would result from a maximum expected earthquake. ' a Purpose. The basic purpose
safety. The seismic provi-
Special attention must be given to connections that " to provide for public
on the fourth
hold the lateral force-resisting elements together. sions of this manual (chap 3) are based
edition of "Recommended Lateral Force and Com-
b. Response of Buildings. A building is analyzed
24
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
mentary" of the Seismology Committee of the (SEAOC. The introduction to the Commentary
Structural Engineers Association of California that publication is reprinted below-*
"rho SEAOC Recommendations are intended to provide criteria to fulfill life safety concepts.
It is emphasized that the recommended design levels are not directly comparable to recorded or
estimated peak ground accelerations from earthquakes. They are however, related to the effec-
tive peak accelerations to be expected In seismic events. More specifically with regard to earth-
quakes, structures designed in conformance with the provisions and principles set forth therein
should, in generaL be able to:
1. Resist minor earthquakes without damage;
2. Resist moderate earthquakes without structural damage, but with some nonstructural
damage;
3 Resist major earthquakes, of the intensity of severity of the strongest experienced In
California, without collapse, but with some structural as well as nonstructural damage.
In most structures it is expected that structural damage, even in a major earthquake, could be
limited to repairable damage. This, however, depends upon a number of factors, including the
type of construction selected for the structure.
"Conformance to the Recommendations does not constitute any kind of guarantee that signifi-
cant structural damage would not occur In the event of a maximum intensity earthquake While
damage in the basic materials now qualified may be negligible or significant, repairable or virtu-
ally irrepafrable, it is reasonable to expect that a well-planned structure will not collapse in a ma-
jor earthquake. The protection of life Is reasonably provided, but not with complete assurance.
"It Is to be understood that damage due to earth slides such as those that occurred in Anchor-
age, Alaska, or due to earth consolidation such as occurred in Niigata, Japan, would not be pre-
vented by conformance with these Recommendations. The SEAOC Recommendations have been
prepared to provide minimum required resistance to typical earthquake ground shaking, without
settlement, slides, subsidence, or faulting in the immediate vicinity of the structure.
"Where prescribed wind loading governs the stress or drift design, the resisting system must
still conform to the ductility, design and special requirements for seismic systems. This is re-
quired in order to resist in a ductile manner potential seismic loadings in excess of the prescribed
loads."
b. Equivalent Static Force. The assumed equiva- riod and stiffness of structures. The coefficient S
lent total lateral force, equal to the base shear, is accounts for the variability of site conditions. Al-
determined by the formula V = ZIKCSW (see chap though CS is a function of the fundamental period of
3 and 4 for seismic provisions). This approach at- vibration, it is intended to represent the combined
tempts to recognize the available recorded expe- effects of all vibrational modes of the building.
rience and to some degree the qualitative dynamic (5) W is the weight of the structure.
analysis of simplified structures. (6) The total force V is distributed vertically
(1 The seismicity factor Z relates to severity of along the height 'of a structure according to formu-
the ground motion at the site of the structure. las that approximate the fundamental mode of
(2) The factor I represents the importance of vibration, with adjustments to approximate the ef-
the structure and Is used to categorize the risk fects of other participating modes of vibration.
of damage to types of facilities. c. Design Provisions. The seismic design provi-
(3) The factor K relates to the ductility and en- sions furnish a method for establishing the forces.
ergy absorption qualities of certain types of struc- describe acceptable basic systems, set limits on de-
tural framing systems, which historically have formation, and specify the allowable stresses and/or
shown characteristic degrees of earthquake resist- strengths of the materials. The seismic design provi-
ance. sions are minimum requirements, and emphasis
(4) The product CS may be considered to be pro- must be placed on structural concepts and detailing
portional to a response spectrum; however, it is techniques as well as on stress calculations. The
applicable to base shear coefficients rather than provisions are not all-inclusive ones: they work best
spectral accelerations. The factor C accounts for the fr regular, symmetrical buildings. For unusual or
structural response as a function of the natural pe- lqrge buildings, alternatives to the static provision.
*From the publication "Recommended Lateral Force Require- 1976, Structural Engineers Association of California
ments and Commentary" by the the Seismology Committee, reproduced with permission.
Structural Engineers Association of California. Copyright
2-4
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
that rely on dynamic analyses and/or greater appli- waves and may amplify the effects to large
cation of engineering judgment and experience in proportions. Assuming that tsunami warning serv-
seismic design are required. ices can ensure the safety of human life, there is as
2-7. Location of site. Site planning must con- yet no hard-and-fast rule for establishing safety and
sider geological, foundation, and tsunami sea- economic standards. Where feasible, power plants,
wave) hazards as well as seismicity. Structures shall oil storage tanks, and other strategic facilities
not be sited over active geologic faults, in areas of should be located on high ground, out of reach of
instability subject to landslides, where soil liquefac- high water. The methodology for predicting wave
tion is likely to occur, or in areas subject to tsunami run-up is published in U.S. Army Engineers Water-
damage. way Experimental Station Technical Reports
H-74-3. H-75-17, and H-77-16.
a Seismic Zones. The probability of the severity,
frequency, and potential damage from ground 2-8. Selection of the structural system. It is
shaking varies in different geographic regions. Re- of the utmost importance to make sure that the de-
gions with similar hazard factors are identified as sign efforts get off to a good start. Thus, it is
seismic zones. The seismic zones prescribed by this essential that careful professional scrutiny be given
manual are given in chapter 3, Design Criteria. to the design at its inception as well as at all signifi-
b. Fault Zownes. Damage which is directly or indi- cant stages of design development. The proper
rectly caused by ground distortions or ruptures approach to be applied in the selection of a struc-
along a fault cannot be eliminated by design and tural system that will achieve a reliable earthquake-
construction practices; therefore, site planning must resistant building must be based on performance
avoid these particularly hazardous locations. criteria, alternative solutions, and corresponding
costs.
c Other Hazards. There are other hazards asso- a. Objective. The objective is to produce the
ciated with earthquakes that should be considered. structural system that is the most economical
These include subsidence and settlement due to con- without compromising function, quality, or reliabil-
solidation or compaction, landslides, and lique- ity. Final selection of materials and systems will be
faction. Uquefaction Is a common occurrence in made with due consideration given to the cost of
relatively loose cohesionless sands and silts with a construction, architectural requirements, fire and
high water table. The earthquake motions can other safety hazards, and maintenance and operat-
transform the soil into a liquefied state as a conse- ing costs over the life of the facility. It is essential
quence of the increase in pore pressure. This can that the most efficient systems, methods, and mate-
result in a loss of strength in bearing capacity of the rials be employed.
soil supporting a building, causing considerable
settling and tilting. Also, this loss of strength can b. Economic Aspects. Usually, the major struc-
occur in the subsurface layer, causing lateral tural-architectural components of a building that
movement of surficial soil masses of several feet, ac- have the greatest effect on the cost of construction
companied by ground cracks and differential are exterior walls, partitions, floor and roof decks,
and the structural framing system. In some in-
vertical displacements. These movements have sev- stances, the type of foundation may be a major
ered pipelines and damaged bridges and buildings. factor in a cost study. Skillful planning, simple
There are several ways to stabilize the ground such detailing, and arrangement of spaces to be compati-
as providing drainage wells, pressure grouting, or ble with repetitive modular construction all con-
removing the liquefiable zone, but often the tribute greatly to reducing total building costs. On
susceptible area is too extensive for an economical the other hand, the use of exotic or unconventional
solution. The exposure to these hazards varies with methods of construction may increase the costs and
the geography, geology, and soil conditions of the reduce the reliability of earthquake-resistance per-
site, and the type of structure to be constructed. The formance.
professional judgment of geologists, soils engineers, c. Planning Concepts. Participation of all disci-
and structural engineers shall be used to establish plines of the design team in the conceptual planning
reasonable standards of safety. and selection of basic construction materials will en-
d Tsunami Protection.Each region along the Pa- spre the optimal design at lowest construction cost
cific Coast must be separately and carefully in- A~d miniize the total design effort. Procedures in
vestigated for its tsunami-generation characteris- the approach to develop a concept will vary depend-
tics. Particular coastlines, inlets, and bays of the ing upon the type of facility and the individuals on
Pacific Ocean boundary are resonators of tsunami the design team.
2-6
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
2-9. Techniques f seismic design. For grav- available to resist lateral forces, thus causing
ity loads, it has been .a long-standing practice to abrupt change in rigidities at that level. This coin,
design for strength and deflections within the elas- tion is undesirable. It is advisable to carry all shear
tic limits of the members. However, to control walls down to the foundation. When irregular
design within elastic behavior for the maximum ex- features are unavoidable, special design considera-
pected horizontal seismic forces is impractical in tions are required to account for the unusual dy-
high-seismicity areas (refer to para 2-5a). Hence, de- namic characteristics (chap 4, para 4-4a(4)) and the
signers must resort to other techniques to achieve load transfer and stress concentrations that occur at
acceptable building performance (refer to chap 4, abrupt changes in structural resistance.
Design Procedures). A number of features contribut- d Lateral Force-Resisting Systems. There are
ing to seismic resistance are discussed below. several approved systems for the resistance of lat-
a. Layout. A great deal of a building's resistance eral forces (chap 3, table 3-3 and pars 3-6; and chap
to lateral forces is determined by its plan layout. 4, para 4-3c). All of the systems rely basically on a
The objective in this regard is symmetry about both complete, three-dimensional space frame; a coordi-
axes, not only of the building itself but of the ar- nated system of shear walls or braced frames with
rangement of wall openings, columns, shear walls, horizontal diaphragms; or a combination of the two
etc. It is most desirable to consider the effect of systems.
lateral forces on the structural system from the (1) In buildings where a space frame resists the
start of the layout since this may save considerable earthquake forces, the columns and beams act in
time and money without detracting significantly bending (fig 2-4a). During a large earthquake, story-
from the usefulness or appearance of the building. to-story deflection (story drift) may be a measure of
inches without causing failure of columns or beams.
b. Structural Symmetry. Experience has shown However, the drift may be sufficient to damage
that buildings which are unsymmetrical in plan elements that are rigidly tied to the structural sys-
have greater susceptibility to earthquake damage tem such as brittle partitions, stairways, plumbing,
than symmetrical structures. The effect of asym- exterior walls, and other elements that extend be-
metry will induce torsional oscillations of the tween floors (para 2-9). Therefore, buildings
structure and stress concentrations at re-entrant have substantial interior and exterior nonstruct` v
corners. Asymmetry in plan can be eliminated or damage, possibly approaching 50 percent of the
improved by separating L-, T-, and U-shaped build- total building value, and still be considered as struc-
ings into distinct units by use of seismic joints at turally safe. While there are excellent theoretical
junctions of the individual wings. Asymmetry and economic reasons for resisting seismic forces by
caused by the eccentric location of lateral force- frame action, for particular buildings this system
resisting structural elements, e.g., a building that may be a poor economic risk unless special damage
has a flexible front because of large openings and an control measures are taken (para 2-9k).
essentially stiff (solid) rear wall, can usually be
(2) A shear wall (or braced frame) building is
avoided by better conceptual planning, e.g., by mod-
ifying the stiffness of the rear wall, or adding rigid normally rigid compared with a framed structure.
With low design stress limits in shear walls, deflec-
structural partitions to make the center of rigidity
of the lateral force-resisting elements close to the tion due to shear forces (for low buildings) is
negligible. Shear wall construction is an excellent
center of mass.
method of bracing buildings to limit damage, and
c IrregularBuildings. Geometric configuration, this type of construction is normally economically
type of structural members, details of connections, feasible up to about eight stories. Shear walls are
and materials of construction all have a profound usually of reinforced unit masonry, reinforced con-
effect on the structural-dynamic respbnse of a crete (fig 2-4b), or steel X-bracing (fig 2-4c) but may
building. When a building has irregular features, be of wood in wood-frame buildings up to and in-
such as asymmetry in plan or vertical discontinuity, cluding three stories. The shear wall concept for
the assumptions used in developing seismic criteria earthquake-resistant design of low buildings is quite
for buildings with regular features may not apply. valid. Its effectiveness depends primarily on the
Therefore, it is best to avoid creating buildings with connections between the structural elements. Nota-
irregular features. For example, planners often omit -ble exceptions to the excellent performance of shear
partitions and exterior walls in the first story of a walls occur when the height-to-width ratio becof
building to permit an open ground floor. This leaves great enough to make overturning a problem _
the columns at the ground level as the only elements when there are excessive openings in the shear
2-6
-- V
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-55
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
. STOR DRIPT
CONCRG re
oRk JTeeL(
COCit6G rF
OAC/NIT I -
MASONR YW4
///
(X0) JNWEAR 4LC.S A VRTCA44 CAN7IC.eVRS
AR4CeS IN TE9iSI0AJ
CAReY MS6 XJH4Alt-
Fe
_ P
I )
2-7
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
walls. Also, if the soil beneath its footings are rela- g. Connections. Past performance of buildings
tively soft, the entire shear wall may rotate, causing earthquakes has shown that connections betwe&....
localized damage around the walL floor and roof diaphragms and the shear walls are
(3) Either of the above structural systems may vulnerable to failure because of high stress concen-
be used in combination with a wide variety of floor, trations. In order to develop the reserve capacity of
roof, wall, and partition components. When frames the structural elements, the design forces for
and shear walls are combined, the system is called a connections between lateral force-resisting elements
dual bracing system. The type of structural system are required to be greater than the design forces for
used, with specified details concerning the ductility the elements themselves (e.g., chap 3, para 3-3(Jj1g,
and energy-absorbing capacity of its components, 3a, b, andd; and chap 4, para 4-6).
will establish the minimum K-value to be used for h. Ductility. Ductility is the capacity of building
calculating the total base shear and to distribute the materials, systems, or structures to absorb energy
lateral seismic forces. The decision as to the type of by deforming in the inelastic range. The capability
structural system to be used shall be based on the of a structure to absorb energy, with acceptable de-
merits and relative costs for the individual building formations and without failure, is a very desirable
being designed. characteristic in any earthquake-resistant design.
(4) The design engineer must be aware that a Structural steel (and wood to some degree) is consid-
building does not merely consist of a summation of ered to be a ductile material. Brittle materials such
parts such as walls, columns, trusses, and similar as concrete and unit-masonry must be properly rein-
components but is a completely integrated system forced with steel to provide the ductility character-
or unit which has its own properties with respect to istics necessary to resist seismic forces (chap 3, para
lateral force response. The designer must follow the 3-3(J)2b). In concrete columns, for example, the
forces through the structure into the ground and combined effect of flexure (due to frame action) and
make sure that every connection along the path of compression (due to the action of the overturning
stress is adequate to maintain the integrity of the moment of the structure as a whole) produces a
system. It is necessary to visualize the response of common mode of failure: buckling of the vertical
the complete structure and to keep in mind that the steel and spalling of the concrete cover near the fk
real forces involved: are not static but dynamic; are levels. Columns with proper spiral reinforcing ,>
usually erratically cyclic and repetitive; and can hoops have a greater reserve strength and ductility
"eMM cause deformations well beyond those determined (refer to chap 7, Space Frames).
from the elastic design. Seismic forces are assumed
to come from any horizontal direction and must be i NonstructuralParticipation.For both analysis
combined with gravity loads. and detailing, the effects of nonstructural parti-
tions, filler walls, and stairs (refer to chap 4, para
e. Diaphragms Floor and roof systems are gener- 4-7d) must be considered. The nonstructural ele-
ally used as diaphragms. It is customary to design ments that are rigidly tied to the structural system
the floor and roof (e.g., concrete slab, wood can have a substantial influence on the magnitude
sheathing, metal decking) as the web of a horizontal and distribution of earthquake forces, causing a
beam and to provide for the flange stresses of the shearwall-like response with considerably higher lat-
beam with structural elements concentrated at the eral forces and overturning moments. Any element
edge of the floor system (e.g., edge beams or special that is not strong enough to resist the forces that it
reinforcement in concrete slabs, continuous beams attracts will be damaged; therefore, it should be
in wood and metal deck sytems). Too frequently, it isolated from the lateral force-resisting system.
is forgotten that these flanges must be made contin-
uous or be adequately spliced. Horizontal truss j. Foundations. The differential movement of
systems may also be used as diaphragms (refer to foundations due to seismic motions is an important
chap 5, Diaphragms). cause of structural damage, especially in heavy,
rigid structures that cannot accommodate these
f. Shear Walls. The shear wall is designed as a movements. Adequate design must minimize the
vertical beam. To resist tensile stress due to bend- possibility of relative displacement, both horizontal
ing moments, structural elements are concentrated and vertical, between the various parts of the foun-
at the vertical edges of walls in a manner similar to dition and between the foundation and superstruc-
that described above for diaphragms. These bound- itre (refer to chap 3, para 3-3(J)3c; and chap 4, paer
ary elements must be anchored into a foundation 4-8, for seismic requirements).
which is capable of transferring the forces into the
ground (refer to chap 6, Walls). k. Damage Control Features. The design of a
2-S
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
structure in accordance with the seismic provisions buildings); in other cases, they are optional (e.g., to
of this manual will not fully ensure against earth- provide a more efficient design or to analyze the
quake damage because the horizontal deformations building for the effects of a predicted earthquake
from design loads are lower than those that can be ground motion). The alternatives are generally clas-
expected during a major earthquake. However, sified as dynamic methods and are not covered In
without increasing construction costs, a number of this manual. Using dynamic loading and a computer
things can be done to limit earthquake damage analysis, one can more accurately predict how a pro
which would be expensive to repair. In considering a posed building will act and deform under ground
building's response to earthquake motions, it is im- motions from a specific earthquake. It will be found
portant to keep in mind the structural system and that this response may sometimes cause deflections,
the geometry of the building. During a major earth- joint rotations, and stresses quite different from
quake It should be assumed that deflections (story those determined from the prescribed static load-
drift) may be SIK times that resulting from the de- ings. Before proceeding with the equivalent static
sign lateral forces (refer to chap 8, para 8-8(J)ld). A force procedure, the designer should make sure that
list of features to minimize damage follows: there are no special conditions that would warrant
(1) Provide details which allow structural move- or require the use of more rigorous methods.
ment without damage to nonstructural elements. a. ElasticAnalysis For most buildings requiring
Damage to such items as piping, glass, plaster, ve- an alternative design method, an elastic dynamic
neer, and partitions may constitute a major finan- analysis procedure is sufficient to determine load
cial loss. To minimize this type of damage, special distribution and member forces for design earth-
care in detailing, either to isolate these elements or quake motion. A response spectrum analysis with
to accommodate the movement, is required. the modes combined by the square-root-of-the-sum-
(2) Breakage of glass windows can be mini- of-the-squares SRSS) method or by some other ap-
mized by providing adequate clearance and flexible proved method is generally sufficient for an elastic
mountings at edges to allow for frame distortions. analysis. A time-history analysis may be used if nec-
(3) Damage to rigid nonstructural partitions essary.
can be largely eliminated by providing a detail at
the top and sides which will permit relative move- b. Inelastic Analysis. For major buildings, which
ment between the partitions and the adjacent require added assurance so that the building can
structural elements. withstand a major earthquake without collapse or
(4) In piping installations, the expansion loops within a limited range of damage, an inelastic dy-
and flexible joints used to accommodate tempera- namic analysis may be used. This usually is a time-
ture movement are often adaptable to handling the history analysis; however, other approximate proce-
relative seismic deflections between adjacent equip- dures that can estimate inelastic effects may be
ment items attached to floors. used.
(5) Fasten free-standing shelving to walls to
prevent toppling. 2-11. Future expansion. When future expan-
ion of a building is contemplated, it is generally
(6) Concrete stairways often suffer seismic better to plan for horizontal expansions rather than
damage due to their inhibition of drift between con- for vertical growth because there will be greater
nected floors. This can be avoided by providing a freedom in planning the future increment, there will
slip joint at the lower end of each stairway to elii- be less interruption of existing operations when ad-
nate the bracing effect of the stairway or by tying ditions are made, and the first Increment will not
stairways to stairway shear walls. have to bear a large share of cost of the second incre-
L Redundancy. Redundancy is a highly desirable ment. For future vertical expansion, the foundation,
characteristic for earthquake-resistant design. floor/roof system, and the structural frame must be
When the primary element or system yields or fails, proportioned for both the initial and future design
the lateral force can be redistributed to a secondary loadings, including the seismic forces. For future
system to prevent progressive failure. horizontal expansion, either a complete structural
separation between the two phases must be pro-
2-10. Alternatives to the prescribed provi- vided, or the first increment must be designed for its
sions. Alternatives to some of the seismic Aare of the loads under both conditions: the first
provisions are permitted if they can be properly sub- increment and the expansion. Many buildings that
stantiated. In some cases, alternative solutions are have been designed for future expansion under past
mandatory (e.g., rregular buildings and setback seismic criteria do not satisfy the present criteria;
2-9
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 1
therefore, these buildings must be upgraded and will the plan, the system, and the materials of constri
incur high seismic strentheni costs. tion; establish design criteria for the sped.,
facility; identify and locate primary structural ele"
2-12. Major checkpoints. The process of achiev- ments; determine and distribute lateral seismi
ing an adequate building must start with conceptual forces; prepare design calculations; detail connec-
planning and be carried through all phases of the de tions; detail nonstructural parts for damage controd
sign and construction program. The major check make clear, complete contract drawings; check shop
points include: perform site investigations; coordi- drawings; perform quality control inspection; and
nate the work of the architect and engineers maintain surveillance over any changed conditions
(structural, mechanical, and electrical) to establish during the entire construction period.
2-10
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
CHAPTER 3
DESIGN CRITERIA
3-1. Purpose and scope. This chapter pre- Fourth Edition, 19751 (hereafter referred to as the
scribes the criteria for the seismic design of build- SEAOC Recommendations). The SEAOC publica-
ings and other structures. tion, which includes the Recommendations, the
Commentary, and Appendices, may be used as a ref-
3-2. General. Te seismic design of buildings erence for this manual. (Note: The SEAOC
and other structures will be In accordance with the Commentary discusses and explains the provisions
criteria and design standards herein. Tle structural of the SEAOC Recommendations Lateral Force Re-
system or type of construction will admit to a ra- quirements. In some respects, the Commentary is as
tional analysis in accordance with established important as the Recommendations. The Commen-
principles of mechanics. Structures will be designed tary, in general, gives the intent of the seismic
for dead, live, snow, wind, and seismic forces. The provisions; however, it becomes an extension of the
dead, live, snow, and wind loads wil be as given in SEAOC Recommendations when supplementing the
applicable agency manuals Every building or struc- seismic provisions with clarifying interpretations.)
ture and every portion thereof will be designed and The following is a reprinted version of Section 1 of
constructed to resist stresses produced by lateral the SEAOC Recommendations that has been modi-
seismic forces in combination with dead and live fied to satisfy the requirements of this manual (see
loads as provided in this chapter. Materials and de- chap 6 and 7 for references to SEAOC Sections 2, ,
tails will conform to the seismic provisions, and 4). The modifications consist primarily of (1)
applicable guide specifications, and criteria herein. additions and interpretations which extend the pro-
The provisions of this chapter apply t the structure visions to more fully cover areas of lower seismicity,
as a unit and also to all parts thereof, Including the outside of California, (2) special provisions devel-
structural frame or walls, floor and roof systems, an- oped by the Tri-Services Committee; and (3) 1978
chorages and supports for architectural elements SEAOC Seismology Committee revisions. Modified
and mechanical and electrical equipment, and other portions are noted in italics.The SEAOC paragraph
elements. identification system has been maintained such that
3-3. Seismic design provisions. he seismic SEAOC Section l(J)2d is equivalent to paragraph
provisions of this manual are based on the 8-3(J)2d in this manual.
"Recommended Lateral Force Requirements and
Commentary" of the Seismology Committee of the 1
Publahed by the Structural Engineers Assioation of
Structural Engineers Association of California, California. 171 Second Street, San Francisco, California 94105.
SEAOC, SECTION 1*
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR THE DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF
EARTHQUAKE RESISTIVE STRUCTURES
(Modifications are In Italics)
(A) General.
1. The proper application of these lateral force requirements, both in de-
sign and construction, are intended to provide minimum standards toward
making buildings and other structures earthquake resistive. The provisions of
this Section apply to the structure as a unit and also to all parts thereof, in-
*From the publication iRecommended Lateral Force Requlrements and Commentary" by the Seismology Committee. Structural Engi-
ner Assodatlon of California. Copyright 1976, Structural Engineers Association of California, and reproduced with permission.
3-1
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
cluding the structural frame or walls, floor and roof systems, and other ele-
ments.
2 Every structure shall be designed and constructed to resist stresses
produced by lateral forces as provided in this Section. Stresses shall be calcu-
lated as the effect of a force applied horizontally at each floor or roof level
above the base. The force shall be assumed to come from any horizontal direc-
tion.
. Where prescribed wind loads produce higher stresses, such loads shall
be used in lieu of the loads resulting from earthquake forces.
4. The effects of verticalaccelerationsmust be consideredfor structuresin
Seismic Zones 3 and 4 (chap 4,para4-4c(2)).
& Dea4 live, snow, and wind loads will be in accordance with applicable
agency manuals Earthquake loads will be considered in combination with
dead loads and live loads as specified in paragraph 3U2c. Allowable
working stresses specified in agency manualsfor ordinaryor non-seismic con-
struction will be increasedone-third for earthquake loading, provided the re-
quired section orarea computed on this basis is not less than that requiredfor
vertical loading, without the one-third increase Working stresses for rein-
forced masonry construction will be as given in chapter 8, Reinforced Ma-
sonry. The one-third increase in stresses does not apply when strength design
orplasticdesign methods are used
(B) Definitlons.
BASE is the level at which the earthquake motions are considered to be
imparted to the structure or the level at which the structure as a dynamic vi-
brator is supported.
BOX SYSTEM is a structural system without a complete vertical load
carrying space frame. In this sytem, the required lateral forces are resisted by
shear walls or braced frames as hereinafter defined. Refer to chapter 4, para-
graph4-3c(4.
BRACED FRAME is a truss system or its equivalent which is provided to
resist lateral forces and in which the members are subjected primarily to axial
stresses. Refer to chapter .
DUCTILE MOMENT RESISTING SPACE FRAME is a moment resist-
ing space frame that complies with specialrequirementsgiven in chapter7 To
comply with the SEAOC Recommendations, only Type A concrete and steel
frames could be classifiedas ductile moment resistingspace frames, however,
in this manual the definition is extended to include concrete frame Type B for
buildingsin Seismic Zone 1.
ESSENTIAL FACILITIES are those structures which must be func-
tional for emergency post earthquake operations.
LATERAL FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM is that part of the structural
system assigned to resist the lateral forces prescribed inparagraph3-3(D).
MOMENT RESISTING SPACE FRAME is a vertical load carrying
space frame in which the members and joints are capable of resistingforces
primarily by flexure. Classificationsaregiven in chapter7.
SHEAR WALL is a wall designed t resist lateral forces parallel to the
plane of the wall. Classificationsaregivedin chapter6.
SPACE FRAME is a three-dimensional structural system, without bear-
ing walls, composed of interconnected members laterally supported so as to
3-2
TM 5-809-1o
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 8-3, Chap. 13
function as a complete self-contained unit with or without the aid of horizontal
diaphragms or floor bracing systems.
VERTICAL LOAD CARRYING SPACE FRAME is a space frame de-
signed to carry all vertical loads. Refer to chapter4,paragraph4-8c(4).
(C) Symbols and Notations.
The following symbols and notations apply to the provisions of this Sec-
tion:
C = Numerical coefficient as specified in paragraph8-(D)
Cp Numerical coefficient as specified in paragraph88(G) and as set
forth in table 8-4.
D = The dimension of the building in feet, in a direction parallel to the
applied forces.
di = Deflection at level i relative to the base, due to applied lateral
forces, I fa, for use in Formula(3-8).
F1, Fn, Fx = Lateral force applied to level i, n, or x, respectively.
Fp = Lateral forces on a part of the structure and in the
direction under consideration.
Ft - That portion of V considered concentrated at the top of the
structure in addition to Fn.
fi = Distributedportionof a total lateralforce at level i for use
in formula (3-8). *
g = Acceleration due to gravity.
hihn hx= Height in feet above the base to level i, n or x.
respectively.
I - Occupancy importance coefficient.
K = Numerical coefficient as set forth in Table 3-3.
Level i = Level of the structure referred to by the subscript i. i = 1
designates the first level above the base.
Level n = That level which is uppermost in the main portion of the
structure.
Level x = That level which is under design consideration. = I
designates the first level above the base.
N = The total number of stories above the base to level n.
S = Numerical coefficient for site-structure resonance.
T = Fundamental elastic period of vibration of the structure in
seconds in the direction under consideration.
T. = Characteristic site period.
V = The total lateral force or shear at the base.
W = The total dead load and applicable portions of other loads.
wi, wx = That portion of W which is located at or is assigned to level
i or x respectively.
Wpx = The weight of the diaphragm and the elements tributary
thereto at level x, including25percent of the floor live load
in storageand warehouse occupancies.*
Wp = The weight of a portion of a structure.
Z = Numerical coefficient related to the seismicity of a region.
3A
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
sumed to act nonconcurrently in the direction of each of the main axes (chap
4-4c)) of the structure in accordance with the formula
V = ZIKCSW. 43-1)
However, th, productofZIKCS wil not be less than O.1&
1. The value of Z is dependent upon the seismic zone as specified by fig-
ures 3-1, 3-2, 3-3 and 3-4 in paragraph3-4 and is determinedfrom table 3-1
below.
Table 3-L Z-Coefflie nt
Seismic Zone 0 1 21 3 4
Z-coefficent 0 1 316 3/8 34 1 1
Type of Occupancy I
EHsseniFacuties 1.50
High Rlis Faclites 1.25
All Others 1.00
3 le value of K shall be not less than that set forth in table 3-3.
4. The values of C and S are as indicated hereafter except that theproduct
of CS need not exceed 0.14.
& W Is the total dead load and applicable portions of other loads including
all permanent structuraland nonstructuralcomponents of a building such as
walls, floors, roofs, andfixed service equipment
a Where partition locations are subject to change, in addition to all
other loads, a uniformly distributeddead load of 20 pounds per square foot of
floor will be applicable.
b. In storage and warehouse occupancies, a minimum of 25 percent of
the floor live load will be applicable.
c. Where the design uniform snow load is 20 psf or less, no part need be
included in the value of "Wn' Where the snow load is greaterthan20psf, an ef-
fective weight of 70 percent of the full snow load wil be included, however,
where the snow load duration warrants, the effective weight of the snow load
may be reduced to 20percent of the full snow load
The value of C shall be determined in accordance with the formula
C.. 1 ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~13
The value of C need not exceed 0.12.
7. The period T shall be established using the structural properties and
deformational characteristics of resisting elements in a properly substantiated
analysis such as the formula
3-4
TM -809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
accordance with the principlesof formulas 3-54 (3-4, and(3-7) or any otherra-
tional distribution.The elastic deflections, di, shall be calculated using the ap-
plied lateral forces, fi** (efer to chap4 para4-3d.)
In the absence of a period de iation as indicated above, the value of T for
buildings may be determined by the formula
TcMUL O-SA)
or, for buildings in which the lateral force resisting system consists of moment
resisting space frames capable of resisting 100 percent of the required lateral
forces and such system is not enclosed by or adjoined by more rigid elements
tending to prevent the frame from resisting lateral forces, T may be deter-
mined by the formula
T'O.1ON 0-3B)
8. The value of S shall be determined by the following formulas but shall
not beless than 1.0.
ForT 1.0 orTless, S=1.0 + T
T -0.5
- 0. Fri
T ~~~~2. (4)
(J
T 1.0,S=1.2 + 0.6 T - 0.82 r~~~~~~~~~~~
For T greater than 0-4A)
(
T in Formulas 0-4) and 03-4A) shall be established by a properly substan-
tiated analysis but T shall not be taken as less than 0.3 seconds
The range of values of T. may be establishd from properly substantiated ge-
technical data, except that Ts shall cot betaken as less than 0.5 seconds nor
more than 2.6 seconds. T. shall be that value within the range of site periods,
as determined above, thatls nearest to T.
When Ts is not properly established, the value of S shall be 1.5.
EXCEPJ70NM Where T has been established by a properly substantiated
analysis and exceeds 2.5 seconds, the value of S may be determined by as-
suming a value of 2.5 seconds for Ts.
(E) Distribution of Lateral Forces.
1. Regular Structures or Framing Systems. The total lateral force V shall be
distributed over the height of the structure in accordance with the following
formulas:
V-Ft+ ZFl- (-5)
The concentrated force at the top, Ft. shall be determined by the formula
Ft=0.07 TV. 0-6)
Ft need not exceed 0.25V and may be considered as zero where T is 0.7
seconds or less. The remaining portion of the total base shear V shall be
distributed over the height of the structure including level n according to
the formula
Fx V-Ftt wxhx _37)
Aewihi
At each level designated as x, the force F shall be applied over the area of
the building in accordance with the mass distribution on that level.
2. Setbacks. Buildings having setbacks-herein the plan dimension of the
tower in each direction Is at least 75 percent of the corresponding plan dimen-
197
SEAOC Revisions
3-5
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
sion of the lower part may be considered as uniform buildings without set-
backs, providing other irregularities as defined in this Section do not exist.
3. Irregular Structures or Framing Systems. The distribution of the lateral
forces in structures which have highly irregular shapes, large differences in
lateral resistance or stiffness between adjacent stories or other unusual struc-
tural features shall be determined considering the dynamic characteristics of
the structure.
4. Distribution of Horizontal Shear. Total shear in any horizontal plane
shall be distributed to the various elements of the lateral force resisting sys-
tem in proportion to their rigidities, considering the rigidity of the horizontal
bracing system or diaphragm. Rigid elements that are assumed not to be part
of the lateral force-resisting system may be incorporated into buildings pro-
vided that their effect on the action of the system is considered and provided
for in the design.
5. Horizontal Torsional Moments. Provisions shall be made for the increase
in shear resulting from the horizontal torsion due to an eccentricity between
the center of mass and the center of rigidity. The forces shall not be decreased
due to torsional effects. Where the vertical resisting elements depend on dia-
phragm action for shear distribution at any level, the shear resisting elements
shall be capable of resisting a torsional moment assumed to be equivalent to
the story shear acting with an eccentricity of not less than five percent of the
maximum building dimension at that level.
(F) Overturning.
Every structure shall be designed to resist the overturning effects caused by
the wind forces and related requirements, or the earthquake forces specified in
this Section, whichever governs.
At any level, the incremental changes of the design overturning moment, in
the story under consideration, shall be distributed to the various resisting ele-
ments in the same proportion as the distribution of the shears in the resisting
system. Where other vertical members are provided which are capable of par-
tially resisting the overturning moments, a redistribution may be made to
these members if framing members of sufficient strength and stiffness to
transmit the required loads are provided.
Where a vertical resisting element is discontinuous, the overturning mo-
ment carried by the lowest story of that element shall be carried down as loads
to the foundation.
(0) Lateral Force on Elements of Structures.
Parts or portions of structures and their anchorage to the main structural
system shall be designed for lateral forces in accordance with the formula'
Fp=ZICpWp (3-8)
3-6
------------ ---
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
b. The value of Ifor elements of life safety systems (such as items as-
sociatedwith exiting and fireprotection)shall be 1.6.*
2. For applicable forces on diaphragmsand connections for exteriorpan-
els, refer to paragraphs8-8J2dand 8-JJ3d, respectively.
8. For applicable forces on flexible and flexibly mounted equipment and
machinery (footnote A, table 3-4), refer to chapter10 (equipment in buildings).
4. Forapplicableforces on storageracks, refer to chapter9 (footnote 6, ta-
ble 8-4).
5. Forapplicableforces on lightingfixtures, piping, stacks, bridge cranes
and monorails, and elevators, refer to chapter10.
(H) Drift Provisions.
1. Drift. Lateral deflections or drift of a story relative to its adjacent stories
shall not exceed 0.005 times the story height unless it can be demonstrated
that greater drift can be tolerated. The displacement calculated from the appli-
cation of the required lateral forces shall be multiplied by (1.O/K) to obtain the
drift. The ratio (1.0/K) shall not be less than 1.0.
2. Buiding Separations. All portions of structures shall be designed and
constructed to act as an integral unit in resisting horizontal forces unless sepa-
rated structurally by a distance sufficient to avoid contact under deflection
from seismic action or wind forces. Refer to chapter4,paragraph4-7.
(I) Alterhate Determination and Distribution of Seismic Forces.
Nothing in these Recommendations shall be deemed to prohibit the submis-
sion of properly substantiated technical data for establishing the lateral de-
sign forces and distribution by dynamic analyses. In such analyses the dy-
namic characteristics of the structure must be considered.
3-7
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
d. Deformation Compatibility. All framing elements not required by de-
sign to be part of the lateral force resisting system shall be investigated and
shown to be adequate for vertical load carrying capacity and induced moments
due to 3.01K) times the distortions resulting from the required lateral forces.
The rigidity of other elements shall be considered in accordance with para-
graph3-3(E)4.
e. Adjoining Rigid Elements. Moment resisting space frames and ductile
moment resisting space frames may be enclosed by or adjoined by more rigid
elements which would tend to prevent the space frame from resisting lateral
forces where it can be shown that the action or failure of the more rigid ele-
ments will not impair the vertical and lateral load resisting ability of the space
frame.
f. Frame Ductility. The necessary ductility for a ductile moment resisting
space frame shall be provided by a structuralsteel orreinforcedconcrete frame
complying with the requirementsof chapter7 andconforming to the classifica-
tions of tables3-3 and3-7.
g. Braced Frames. All members in braced frames shall be designed for
1.25 times the force determined in accordance with paragraph3.WA Connec-
tions shall be designed to develop the full capacity of the members or shall be
based on the above forces without the one-third increase usually permitted for
stresses resulting from earthquake forces. Members of braced frames shall
comply with the requirementsof chapter6 paragraph6-7. and conform to the
classificationsof tables3-Sand 3-7.
h. Shear Walls. Reinforced concrete shear walls for all structures shall
conforn to the requirements of chapter6,paragraph6-3 and conform to the
classificationsof tables 3-3 and 3-7. Reinforced masonry shearwalls shallcon-
form to the requirementsof chapter& For the calculation of shear stress only,
all masonry shear walls shall be designed to resist 1.5 times the force deter-
mined in accordance withparagraph3-3(D).
i. Framing Below Base. In buildings where K = 0.67 or 0.80, the special
ductility requirements of SEAOC sections 2 (chapter 7, paragraph7-3a/lD, 3
(chapter6,paragraph6-al)), and 4 (chapter7,paragraph7-5a(1)A as appropri-
ate, shall apply to all structural elements below the base which are required to
transmit to the foundation the forces resulting from lateral loads.
2. Design Requirements.
a. Minor Alterations. Minor structural alterations may be made in exist-
ing buildings and other structures, but the resistance to lateral forces shall be
not less than that before such alterations were made unless the building as al-
tered meets the requirements of these Recommendations.
b. Reinforced Masonry or Concrete. AU elements within the structure
which are of masonry or concrete shall be reinforced so as to qualify as rein-
forced masonry or concrete under theprovisions of chapters6 and8.
EXCEPTION:See table 8-5 for Seismic Zone 1 exceptions.
c. Combined Vertical and Horizontal Forces. In computing the effect of
seismic forces in combination with vertical loads, gravity load stresses in-
duced in members by dead load plus design live load, except roof live load,
shall be considered. Consideration should also be given to minimum gravity
loads acting in combination with lateral forces.
d. Diaphragms.* Floor and roof diaphragms and collectors shall be de-
signed to resist the seismic forces determied in accordancewith the following
formula.
'1978SEAOC Revisions
3-8
--- - -
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
Fpx= X=
ftWp WPX ^(3-9)
Fp,=0.14ZIwpx V-9A)
3-
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
be designed to resist the forcesper Formula3-8 and shall accommodate move-
ments of the structure resulting from lateral forces or temperature changes.
Concretepanels or othersimilar elements shall be supportedby means of cast-
in-place concrete or by mechanical connections and fasteners in accordance
with the followingprovisions:
(1) Connections and paneljoints shall allow for a relative movement be-
tween stories of not less than two times story drift caused by wind or (31KW
times the calculated elastic story displacement caused by required seismic
forces, or 12-inch, whichever is greater.
(2) Connections to permit movement in the plane of the panel for story
drift shall be properly designed sliding connections using slotted or oversize
holes or may be connections which permit movement by bending of steel or
otherconnectionsproviding equivalent slidingand ductility capacity.
(3) Bodies of connections, such as structuralsteel angles, rods, plates
etc., shall have sufficient ductility and rotationcapacity so as to preclude frac-
ture of the concrete or brittlefailures at or near welds. The body of the connec-
tionshall be designedfor 1.33 times the force determinedby Formula3-a
(4) Elements connecting the body to the panels or the structure,such as
bolts, insertswelds dowels, etc., shall be designed for 4 times the forces deter-
mined by Formula3-8 Elements of connections embedded in concreteshall be
attached to, or hooked around reinforcing stee4 or otherwise terminatedso as
to effectively transferforces to the reinforcingsteeL
(5) The value ofthe coefficientlin Formula3-8 shall be 1.0for the entire
connection (Le., the value need not be greaterthan 1.0 even if the I-coefficient
of the buildingis greaterthan 1.0).
e. Connections. Foradditionalrequirementsfor connections refer to chap-
ter 4, paragraph4-6
3-10
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Table 3-3. EortzontaZ Force Factor "1K" for Buildings or Other Structures*
(Refer to Table 3-7 (Paragraph 3-6) for Smarly Tables
for K VaZuee for Each Seismic Zone.)
Basic
System Category Type or Arrangement of Resisting Elements Value of Kb
Buildings with a ductile moment resisting space frame designed n
accordance
sace framewith
I the following criteria: The ductile moment resisting 0.67
shall have the capacity to resist the total required later-
^1force.
Elevated Elevated tanks plus full contents, on four or more cross-braced legs
Tanks and not supported by a building. The braced frame requirements of par- d
and Inverted 7 graph 3-3(J)Ig and the torsional requirements of paragraph 3-3(E)S 2 *5
Pendulums shall apply. The product of CS will not be less then 0.12. Refer to
u
e___________ ___urs___ Chapter 11 for nverted pendulurs.d
Structures Structures other than buildings, elevated tanks, or minor tructures
Other 8 set forth in Table 34. The product of CS will not be less than 0.10. 2.0
Then Also, refer to Chapter l1.d
Buildings
*Modification of SEAOC
Table IA.
**In 1980 SEAOC modified this category to include "buildings--with stud wall framing
and uing horizontal diaphragms and vertical shear pls for the lateral force system."
Therefore, vells in accordance with either paragrapif4-5a or paragraph 6-5b of Chapter 6
vill be in compliance vith item 5b above.
3-11
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Footnotesto Table 3-3
a If K - 1.33 in one direction, it will be 1.33 in both directions. Other K-values may vary In the
two directions
. Generally, one value of K applies to the total height of the building; however, f there Is a
change in K along the heightof the building(eg, due to change In framing systemA the K value
used at any level must be equal to or greater than the K value at the next level above (Also,
refer to provisions of paragraphs3-3lBJ and2forsetbackand irregularbuildings.)
c In Seismic Zone I concrete shearwals may exceed the 160-foot Imit (paragraph3- 11b.
d Categones 7 and & Refer to chapter 11 for alternate methods and additional requirements
Pedestal type elevated watertanks will not be permittedhi Seismic Zone Nos. and A In Seis-
mic Zone Nos. I and2 K will beSOforpedestaltype elevated tanks.
Horizontal
Direction of Value of
Part or Portion of Structure Force Cp
3-12
TM -809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
both the dynamic properties of de equipment and machinery and to the
building or structurein which it is paced but *hall not be Jess than the
fisted values. The desig of th equipment and machinery and their
anchorage is an ntegral part of the design nd specification of such
equipment andmachinery (refer to hapter OJ.
ForEssentialFacilitesand ift safety system eitc when th value of the I-
coefficient is equal to 1.5perparagraph9-GOJRA the design and detaiingof
equipment which must remain In place and be functional fblowing s major
earthquake lconsiderth effect ofdrift
t Theforceshlberesistedbypositiveanchorageandnotby ction.
o W for storage racks shall be the weight of th racks phs contents. 1
value of C, for racks over two storage support levels in height shall be 024
for the levels below te top two evels In fieu of th tabuted vaues, steel
storage racks may be designed n accordance with chapter 4 paragraph
048.
£ Ceing weight shall Include fight fixtures and other equipment or
partitions which ae latraly supported by the cslM For purposes of
determiningthe lateralforce, a celing weightof not less than 4poundsper
squarefootshalf be sed
3-4. Seismic zone maps. The seismic zones 3-5. Types of occupancy. General descriptions
required for the determatonof the coeffcient Z in and examples of various occupancy types are given
table 3-1, paragraph 3-S(D)1, are given on maps for the determination of the value of the coefficient I
shown on figures 3-1, 3-2, and 3-3 for the contigu- in table 3-2, paragraph 3-8(D)2.
ous states, Alaska, and Hawai, respectively. The a Esentia acities = .5 Tese are struc-
map on figure 3-4 shows the seismic zones for Cali- tures housing critical facilities which are necessary
fornia and Nevada in greater detafl and scale. Seis for post-disaster recovery and require continuous
mic zones for specific areas are tabulated in tables operation during and after an earthquake. This in-
3-5 and 3-6 for localities within the United States cludes facilities where damage from an earthquake
and outside the United States, respectively. The may cause significant loss of strategic and general
boundary lines are approximate, and in the event of communications and disaster response capability.
any conflict or uncertainty regarding the applicable Typical exampl are:
zone of any particular site, the higher zone will be
used.
3-13
':1
I
r >
n >W
I i
C, .I & (
,co
-n >
Ir
cm a CD
I
>pZ-4
r
z
n>
KAUAI
/ / co n
f~UU / / a
la
/ OAHU
/ OCCAN i
NIIHIAU
/ /
I / /
tl-p01 / MOLOKAI
/KAU /A AZ:
WSLUD~~UK
/ tANAI ID (MAUI
pACif C / LANAI do
/ KAHOOLAWE
STATUTE MILES
SEISMIC PROBABILITY
ZONE DAMAGE 3
0 None
1 Minor
2 Moderate
3 Majo:
4 Great
O/ 4
See TABLE 3-1 for
/ Figure 3-3
prescribed value of SEISMIC ZONE MAP
the coefficient Zo Hawaii
(r ( (
----- -
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
I. 14I
San
Frnclsc0
."r,\ Stockton
Modesto+ Y/ 4
N~~~~~ It
tresN~~~~~~i
\4 \ ¢ °<w9 ~La Vega~s_
Figure 3-4
SEISMIC ZONE tAP J
California and Nevada
with
Major Fault Systems and Observed A
Surface Ruptures During
Historically Record Earthquakes
(Faults, which are shown for
Information only, are not to be LAfetlI
scaled or used for seismicity studies)
--- RECENTLY ACTIVE FAULT \dloil
ONN6U SURFACE RUPTURE
TWO RECORDED RUPTURES I 4
40 a 0 @0 LES S Diego El Cent
3-17
TM 5-80910
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Table 3-4 Seismic Zone Tabutadom U.S.
s-18
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
Table 3-& Seismic Zone Tabuatioi, U.S.*
S-19
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
Table 3- Seismic Zone Tabulation, US.*
3-20
TM 5-809-1 0
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Tabk$-&i smcZoneTabuaon Outside U.S.4
1efer to table S-1 for prescribed values for seismic zone noe. 0 through 4. U denotes unknown seismicity.
hUse cal code If t Is more severe than mic zone no. 4.
3-21
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Table 3-6 Seismic Zone Tabulation, Outside U.S.'
"Refer to table 3-1 for prescrlbed values for seismic zone nos. Othrough 4.U denotes unknown aesmicity.
3-22
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
(1) Hospitals. a. Frame Specifications. (The design require-
(2) Fire stations, rescue stations, and garages ments are covered in chapter 7.)
for emergency vehicles. (1) Concrete Frame Type A. Ductile moment re-
(3) Power stations and other utilities required sisting space frame.
as emergency facilities. (2) Concrete Frame Type B. Moment resisting
(4) Mission-essential and primary communica- space frame. Qualifies as a ductile moment resisting
tion or data-handling facilities. space frame in Seismic Zone 1 only. May be used as
(5) Facilities involved in operational missile a lateral force resisting system in Seismic Zone 2
control, launch, tracking or other critical defense with certain height and K limits.
capabilities. (3) Concrete Frame Type C. Moment resisting
(6) Facilities involved in handling, processing, space frame. May be used as a lateral force resisting
or storing sensitive munitions, nuclear weaponry or system in Seismic Zone 1 only for buildings less
processes, gas and petroleum fuels, and chemical or than 80 feet in height.
biological contaminants. (4) Concrete FrameType D. Vertical load carry-
b. High Risk I =1.25. Those structures are ing space frame in accordance with ACI 3 18-77.
where primary occupancy is for assembly of a large (5) Steel Frame Type A. Ductile moment resist-
number of people, where the primary use is for ing space frame.
people that are confined (e.g., prison), or where serv- (6) Steel Frame Type B. Moment resisting
Ices are provided to a large area or large number of space frame. May be used as a lateral force resisting
other buildings. Buildings in this category may suf- system subject to certain height and K limits.
fer damage in a large earthquake but are recognized (7)Steel Frame Type C Vertical load carrying
as warranting a higher level of safety than the aver- space frame in accordance with AISC Specifica-
age building. Typical examples are: tions. May be used as a moment resisting space
(1) Buildings whose primary occupancy is that frame lateral force resisting system in Seismic Zone
of an auditorium, a recreation facility, diring hall, or 1 only for buildings less than 80 feet in height.
commissary which is subject to occupancy by more (8) Wood frames.
than 300 persons. b. Wail Specifications (Includes Braced Frames).
(2) Confinement facilities (e.g., prisons). (The design requirements are covered in chapter 6.)
(3) Central utility (power, heat, water, sewage) (1) Shear Wall Type A. Concrete (or steel) shear
that are not covered by paragraph a(3) above, and walls with vertical boundary elements. --
that serve large areas. (2) Shear Wall Type B. Concrete shear walls.
(4) Buildings having high value equipment (3) Bracedframes. Steel or concrete.
when justification provided by using agency. (4) Masonry. Masonry shear wall. When ma-
c. AU Others I = 1.0). This includes all struc- sonry shear walls are used as part of a dual system
tures not covered by the above categories. in Seismic Zones 2, 3 or 4, vertical boundary mem-
bers are required.
3-6. Summary of approved structural sys- (5) Wood, Wood stud shear walls with plywood
tems. The minimum values of the base shear or diagonal wood sheathing.** (Vote: Stud wall
coefficient K are set forth in table 3-3. Table 3-7 is shear walls other than those listed above limited to
provided as a guide to interpret table 3-3 and to 2 stories with K 0 1.33. See Stud Walls below.)
summarize the approved structural systems for (6) Stud walls. Wood or metal stud walls that
Seismic Zone 1, Seismic Zone 2, and Seismic Zones 3 comply with chapter 6, paragraphs 6-5 and 6-6.
and 4. The designations used for frame and wall **See footnote on the bottom of table 3-3 for 1980
specifications are described below. Note that the SEAOC modification.
wall specifications include braced frames.
..
3-23
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Tabe 3-7. Aroved Bui14ilg Syatmm
ZoneI
Height Zone2 Zones 3 and 4
Basic Value t Mii
Nln lnI MfitnA Minim= gtnft inimA
l feet) Requi red Required Required Required Required Required
Frme Wall Fran wall Frame wall
Concrete I Concrete A Concrete A
a
0.67 None or or or
Frs Steel A Steel A Steel A
(100: o .1 '\ /\
Force n
Frafe). 160No
Categories 1.00 Skel stsl Appicable
and 2 Concrete C Cocr te I
80 or \ or / \ / \
Steel C Skl / Steel
Concrete Shear Mall A Concrete A Shear Mall A Concrete A Shear Mail A
Nora or or rw or or or
Steel A Braced FraIe Stell A Braced Fram Steel A Braced Frae
Dual Shear Wall A Concrete Shear VWal A
System 0.80 160 or or or Not Not
(Frame 25. Steel I Braced Fru Steel I Braced Fram Applicable Applicable
Wall 100S).
Category 3 Concrete I Shear Mall * Concrete Concrete A
80 or or or Masonry2 or Masonry'
Steel a Masonry Steel I Steel A
S-U
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
CHAPTER 4
DESIGN PROCEDURE
4-1. Purpose and scope. This chapter describes period of the building while the period depends on
a general procedure for the design of buildings to re- the weight and stiffess of the building. First, trial
sist the earthquake lateral forces specified in chap- design lateral forces are obtained from approximate
ter 8, Design Criteria. Procedures for designing and caculation of period and weight. Next, trial member
detailing of structural elements of buildings are sizes are selected using approxmate calculations
more fully discussed in chapters through 8. De- and judgment. Finally, a preliminary analysis is
tailed examples for specific types of structures are made, and the trial aizes are confirmed or revised. If
included in the appendices of this manuaL there are substantial revisions to the Initial trial
sizes, the response characteristics of the structure
4-2. Preliminary design. The preliminary seis- will change and a reanalysis may be required.
mic design of the structure requires site investiga
tions, conceptual planning with the architect and 4-3. Minimum arthquake forces. Every
the mechanical and electrical engineer, selection of a building will be designed for lateral seismic forces,
workable structural system, and selection of trial acting nonconcurrently In the direction of each main
member sizes. axis of the structure (also, see para 4-4c). As a mini.
mum, the total forces (V = ZIKCSW) specified in
a. Site Investigation. Before proceeding with the chap S. para S-3(D), will be applied to the structure
design of a building, the engineer must know the as a whole and will be distributed to the various
seismic zone, the foundation conditions and haz- levels of the structure as prescribed in chapter S,
ards, and the tsunami generation characteristics (re- paragraph 3-8(E). The coefficients Z. I, K, C, and 8
fer to chap 2, para 2-7). In some cases geotechnical depend on the seismic zone of the site, occupancy
data may be required to determine Ts (refer to para importance, type of lateral resisting system (e.g.,
4-3). shear wall or space frame), the peiod of the struc-
b. Conceptual Planning. Collaboration of the ar- ture, and the site characteristics, respectively. W is
chitect and structural, mechanical, and electrical en- the effective weight of the structure. These, as well
.1, -', .. .
gineers is required to establish a concept for the as other symbols, are defined in chapter 3. para-
overall building system, to select the materials of graph S-8(C), and methods for determining their
construction, and to reconcile the conflicting re- values are discussed below. Some basic terminology
quirements of architectural structural mechanical, is defined in chapter S. paragraph 8-3(B). A graphic
and electrical sytems (refer to chap 2, para 2-8). representation of seismic forces is shown in figure
c- Selection of StructuralSystem. Before select- 4-1. The product of ZIKCS can result in an upper
ing the structural system, a familiarity with the Emit of 0.28 for buildings in zones of the highest
techniques and application of seismic design is es seismicity. The lower limit for ZIKCS in any of the
sential (refer to chap 2, para 2-9). Also the possibil- four seismic zones is 0.015.
ity of future expansion must be considered (chap 2, a. Z-Factor. The factor Z. which represents the
para 2-11). The limitations on structural systems seismicity of the site, is equal to or less than 1.0. It
(chap S. para S-3 and 3-6) and the special require- is obtained from chapter S. table 8-1, and is depend-
ments for ductility, tall buildings, concrete frames, ent on the seismic zone maps of chapter 8, para-
braced frames, shear walls, concrete and masonry, graph 3-4. For California and Nevada use the map
diaphragms, foundations, and exterior elements in figure 3-4; the other Contiguous States, Alaska
(chap 3,paragraph 3-S(J)) must be reviewed. and Hawaii use the maps in figures 3-1, 8-2. and
d Selection of Trial Structural Member Size. 8-8, respectively. Seismic zones for specific areas
Some of the structural members of a building are within the United States are tabulated in table 8-6.
governed by the gravity load design and are not af- For localities outside the United States refer to the
fected by the seismic loads. For these members the tabulation in figure 8-6. The boundary lines are ap-
sizes will have been determined by the usual require- proximate. If there is some uncertainty about the lo-
ments for dead and live loads. For the sizes of mem- cat$6i or the seismicity of the site, the larger num-
bers that form the seismic lateral forceresisting ber*ill be used.
system, a trial and error process is required because b. I-Factor. The value of the factor I is deter-
of the magnitude of the design forces depends on the mined from the occupancy classifications of chapter
4-1
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 68-3, Chap. 13
/" 8VeeL n
4 + - I U.
, . .
* S 0 6 * P5UILOttG
sroRx FO!Ce ,I
. I
B
.
W_
-.- I I I.
.%
*
.. ~.. ~~~~~~~~~~
.
" .
B
.. 1
I
* I * * It *
OVdGL
. ?. . I .7 a
p.
t" ,'-'/ O
- - -. U-.-
I
itA-d HOA/ -e ( 70L Oca)
4AAS& O.J'.M. W ( I71JUN/NG MOMGNT)
I.
suisiC/lpIr 0 T 0$GN471ON S
n N 80eR OPRJTORlSS. INTHIS e-4MPC4 %S5
X-41 JWTO/tY WVaYL UNieR CON$SlCK4AT0N AS IN
7H6 FORCe F AT LeYde. X:3
C. JTOAY LGV6CS Wen IN SUMMATIONS q4&SI/iG
PROM CuI ATT7H Piisr LVG AOV 7 ISASE
70 Zmn Arma UPPGRMOSr LEVEL
fgu r4-1 Seismi forces
a,!
4-2
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-5
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
8, table 3-2. The valesrange from 1.0 to 1.6. Exam- tem on a concrete box system), the K-value at the
ples of vanous occupancy clasifcations are given lower level cannot be less than the K-value of the
in chapter 3, paragraph 3-6. When there is some system above, and special consideration must be
doubt regarding the proper value of the I-factor, the given to the transition from one system to the other
decision will be made by the Design Agent. to assure sufficient load transfer capacity and in-
c. K-Factor. Te fictor K represents the type of elastic deformation capability
structural system and the nature of the structure (4) Vertical loadcarryingsystem. If the build
itself. The value of K, which is obtained from chap. ing does not have a complete vertical load-carrying
ter S, table 8-8, varies from 0.67 to 1.83 for build- space frame. it b considered to be a box system and
lugs and from 2.0 to 2.6 for structures other than has K = 1.83. In other words, if shear walls are
buildings.. Buildings that are considered to posss used to support the vertical floor loads, K = 1.83.
considerable inelastic deformation bility and/or IR order to use a value of K less than 1.33, the build-
have inherent redundancy are assigned the lower K ing must have a vertical load-carrying space frame
values. Buildings that tend to be more brittle and that is designed to carry essentially all vertical
lack redundancy are assigned the higher K-values; loads. However, some exceptions are acceptable
Damping, to a certain extent, is also considered in such as a minor load-bearing wall that does not sig-
the K-value. Whereas buildings generally have a nificantly influence the lateral force caistics
multiplicity of nonatructural and onomued of the building. Also, basement walls below the level
resisting elements that effectively increase the re- considered as the base of the building may be bear-
sistance of the structure, structures other than ing for loads originating at such level. The test for
buildings generally do not have such elements or qualifying as a vertical loadcarrying space frame is
have low dampin c eteristics and are assigned to determine whether or not the building can sup
larger K-values. A sumary of approved structural port the vertical loads if the shear walls are seri-
systems for each of the seismic zones is provided in ously damaged during an earthquake.
table 8-7 of chapter S. Although the selection of the (5) Laterd force-resisting system The lateral
K-factdr is generally a simple process, for some forceresisting system for A building is either (a) a
buildings it may be complicated by unusal com- box stem (table 8-S, Categories 6 and 6, shear
binations of materials, height limitations, ductility wallsorbraced frames without a complete vertical
reuiremets, and other special requirements. In load-carrying space frame), (b) a shear wall (or
the f wowing paragraphs sveral of the parameters braced frame) stem with a n ic retig
that influence the Kfactor are dicused as a guide vr l load-carrying space frame (table 8-8, Cate-
to selecting the proper value. gory 4), (c) a dud system consisting of both shear
(1) Seismic zone. The requirements for the K- walls (or brace fame) and a lateral force-resisting
values vary slightly for the different seismic zones. frame (table 3-8, Category 3), or d) a pace frame
In Zone 1, there are fewer redrictions on buings systm-ductle moment-reisting or moment-re-
over 160 feet In height. In Zones 1 and 2 there are slating types (table 3-3, Categories 1 and 2). These
fewer requ ts on ductility for frames. lateral force-resisting systems are reclassified in
(2) Height of buding. Some approved struc- table 3-7 to account for the various rireets in
tural systems are restricted by height limitations. the different seismic zones.
Buildings over 160 feet in height must be ductile (6) Buildings not classifiedabove. Any building
momenteisting space frames (K = 0.67) or dual designed within the scope of this manual must qual-
systems (K = 0.80); however, some exceptions are ify under one of the clications defined in chap-
allowed for Zone 1. Some space frames that do not ter S. table 8-3, or table 3-7, or discussed above. If
satisfy special ductility requirements are limited to there is doubt as to which of two classifications gov-
80 feet; reinforced masonry walls are limited to 80 ern the cue with the larger value of K should be
feet in height; and wood buildings are limited to used If the building does not appear to be covered
three stories or 40 feet in height. by any of the classifications, the structural system
(8) Combinations of K-values. If K = 1.33 must be modified to conform to one of the classifica-
used in one direction of a building, it must be used In tions or justification must be made that the struc-
both directions. For other values of K, it need not be tural system will satisy the intent of the seismic de-
the same in both direction. Generally the K-value is gprovisions.
constant throughout the height of the building. ?;d T, Building Period The period of vibration, T.
When a change of structural system does occur (e.g., -is the time required for one complete cycle of oscilla
steel frame on concrete shear walls, wood box y- tion of an elastic structure in a particular mode of vi-
4-3
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
bration. The building period referred to in the seis- dition generally applies to structural steel mome
mic provisions of this manual is the fundamental resisting space frames systems with nonpart.,_
period of vibration for each of the two translational pating walls and partitions. If the drift limitations
directions of the building (e.g., transverse and longi- are used as a basis for determining a predesign ini-
tudinal directions). In the fundamental mode the tial period estimation, precautions must be ob-
building acts as a cantilever essentially fixed at the served in order not to underestimate the total lateral
base, swaying first to one side and then to the other force by estimating a period that is longer than the
side. The calculation of the period, in accordance actual period. After member sizes have been deter-
with formula 3-3, requires a knowledge of the lat- mined the period must be recalculated as described
eral stiffness characteristics of building (i.e., force in paragraph (4). The limiting values of paragraph
versus displacement relationship). The fundamental (5)will be applicable (refer to Design Example A-3).
period of vibration, T, in each direction of the pro. (4) Periodcalculation. When formula 3-3 is em-
posed structure, is required in order to determine ployed (see fig 4-2), the most difficult part involves
the C-factor, the S-factor, and in some cases to deter- the determination of the story displacements (d;).
mine the force distribution, Ft, at the top of the The story weights (wi) are relatively simple to esti-
structure. Because the above factors must be known mate, and almost any set of story forces fif)can be
during the initial design stage when the sizes and used (e.g., the inverted triangular distribution such
details of all the structural elements may not have as obtained from formula 3-7 usually gives good re-
been established (thus the stiffness characteristics sults), but the corresponding lateral story displace-
are not know), an estimated initial value of T must ments must be calculated. The basic objective must
be used. The estimated value need only be accurate be a realistic approach to calculating the actual
enough to establish reasonable values for C, S. and period-rather than the manipulation of the struc-
Ft. The product of CS will be underestimated if the ture model so as to obtain a "calculated" but non-
assumed building period is too long, therefore, the valid long period and low base shear. For simple
estimated period should be on the short side in order structures, the lateral displacements required for
to be conservative. At the final design stage, the Formula 3-3 can be obtained by hand calculation
period must be checked so that C and S values used methods. For complex structures, the calculatie
in the design are either conservative or consistent for lateral displacements become lengthy so that
with the final period. The sensitivity of these factors aid of a computer program is normally used. o
is discussed in more detail in paragraphs 4-3e, £ programs that calculate member forces and frame
andg and 4-4a. deflections include a calculation of periods and mode
(1) Period for low-rise buildings. For most low- shapes. Calculations must take into account all ele-
rise buildings (eg., up to 5 stories with periods ments which stiffen the structure even if they are
shorter than 0.5 second) the calculation of T is not not part of the seismic-resisting system. (Note: The
necessary because C and CS are at their maximum assumption for the stiffer structure is used to calcu-
values and Ft is equal to zero. Refer to paragraph late the period for determination of lateral force
4-3g for additional discussion. coefficients, but it is unconservative to use this as-
(2) Initialperiod estimation As an initial step sumed stiffness to satisfy drift requirements as dis-
to estimate the building period in the fundamental cussed in para 4-5c.)
mode, the use of Formulas 3-3A and 3-3B, as speci- (5) Maximum value for period Using an un-
fied in chapter 3. paragraph 3-3(D), is acceptable. realistically long period for calculating the coeffi-
These empirical formulas rely only on basic building cients C and S can result in an unconservative de-
dimensions and the number of stories so that they sign. Because of the many parameters involved, it is
are easy to apply at the initial stage of the design. difficult to establish a hard and fast rule for what
The resulting period is generally shorter than the ac- the maximum value of the period T should be. The
tual period, thus it can be safely used for the final SEAOC Commentary advises a thorough examina-
design. However, if feasible, a more accurate esti- tion if the calculated T exceeds 0.5N2/3 , where N is
mate of the period should be made after the member the number of stories above the base to level n. This
sizes of the lateral-resisting system have been deter- formula results in periods ranging from 0.8 second
mined. for a two-story building to 3.0 seconds for a 15-story
(3) Alternate method for initial period estima- building. Even these periods are felt by some engi-
tion. For some structures, member sizes are con- neers to be too long. The Applied Technology Cr
trolled by limits on lateral drift (e.g., chap 3, para cil (ATC), in publication ATC 3-06, "Tentative
3-3(H)I) rather than by stress limitations. This con- visions for the Development of Seismic Regulattezd'
4-4
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Fxh
PIGUfge6 4*-I Ta 7r v41,J 2 (i 3)
Fe
FIGU/Ze 42b0 Ta
sfr 13
-
[ F4 I4 FsJS Ft
t+ Wi
at (3.3)
F. A,
..
SI'!
4-5
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 1.3
for Buildings,"* recommends that the minimum de- Ts, refer to "SEAOC Standard No. 1, Determin
sign lateral force be based on a maximum value of T of the Characteristic Site Period, T,," Appe
equal to 1.4 CRbn314 where ha is the height of the B of the SEAOC Recommendations). Howei
building in feet and CR = 0.025 for concrete frames for most low-rise buildings (e.g., T < 0.3 second),
and CR - 0.035 for steel frames. For steel frame where the difference between the minimum and
buildings, the formula results in periods ranging maximum effective S value is only 5 percent. the
from 0.5 second for a two-story (24 feet) building to maximum value i used and Ts need not be deter
2.4 seconds for a 15-story (180 feet) building. In this mined (refer to para 4-3g). For taller buildings,
manual the ATC formula is suggested as a limiting where Ts can affect the base shear coefficient by as
value for the period T for use in calculating the C much as 50 percent, it may be worthwhile to have a
and S coefficients, in lieu of more current data. How- geotechnical investigation made. On some sites the
ever, the designer must not use the above formulas values of Ta may be obvious without a detailed In-
for estimating the period used in design. The for- vestigation. For example, if the building is to be
mulas are only to be used to check against the value located on a firm site, Ts will be 0.5 second. A firm
of T calculated from the actual building properties. site is defined as a site where bedrock is within 10
e. C-Factor. The factor C is dependent on the feet or where there is very dense granular soils. At
period T of the structure as shown in formula 3-2, the other end of the scale, where there may be over
chapter 3. The maximum value of C is 0.12, which 500 feet of dense sand or over 300 feet of consoli-
occurs for all values of T less than 0.31 second. At dated clay, T, may be about 2.5 seconds. When a
the other extreme range of the scale, where T is 5.0 geotechnical investigation is made, Ts might not
seconds (say a 50-story building), the value of C is always be presented as a simple value, but might be
0.03 or about one-fourth of the maximum value. represented by a reasonable range of values. When
Table 4-1 below gives some values for C as a func- this occurs, the building period must be compared
tion of T. This table may be used in lieu of formula with the range of Ts values to obtain the highest
3-2. The factor S is also dependent on the period T. value for S.
Refer to paragraph 4-3g for combined CS factors. (1) Example for Ts given as a rangeof values. If
f. S-Factorand T. The factor S is dependent on Ts is given to be in the range of 1.0 second to '
the ratio of building period (T to characteristic site seconds, then:
period (Tj)as shown in formulas 3-4 and 3-4A, (a) For a building with a period shorter w_
chapter 3. The value of S may vary from 1.0 to 1.5. 1.0 second, use a Ts value of 1.0 second.
t
The maximum value occurs when T = T.. To use (b) For a building with a period longer than
less than the maximum S, values for both T and T. 1.5 seconds, use a Ts value of 1.5 seconds.
must be substantiated. For guidelines for determin- (c) For a building with a period within the
ing T. refer to paragraph 4-3d above. In order to de- range of 1.0 to 1.5 seconds, TIT, will be taken to
termine a value for Ts, a geotechnical investigation equal 1.0 and S will equal 1.5.
may be necessary (for guidelines for determining (2) Table for S-factor. Table 4-2 below gives
some values of S as a function of TITs. This table can
'Publlbhed as National Bureau of Standards Special Pubi- be used in lieu of formulas 3-4 and 3-4A. Refer to
cation 510, U.S. Government Printing Office. Washington, paragraph 4-3g, below, for CS factors combined.
D.C. 20402. (Stock No. 003-003-01939-9, Price $6.75)
(3-2)
[
Table 4-L. C - 1/151T
TIT. 0.12
..I. Ad .,:
j
I.
0.20 J
__A I. .
030 j 0.40
_ I
0.60
-
10.80
I,, I
1
I
1.20
Ii
1.60 2.00
_
1>2.29 1
I
S I 1.11 I 1.18 I 1.26 I 1.32 1.42 . 1.48 1.50 I 1.49 I 1.40 I 1.20 1 1'
4-6
TM 6-809-10
.r
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
13) Tand Ts limitationsfor the calculation of S. walls and columns below the floor level. If partitions
(a) If the period of the building Is shorter than are laterally supported top and bottom, their weight
0.3 second, use T = 0.3 second. is divided between the two floor levels; however, if
0) T. will range from .6 second to 2.5 the partitions are free standing, the total weight is
seconds. included with the supporting floor level.
(c) If T is longer than 2.5 seconds and T. is un- (2) Horizontal distribution. The horizontal dis-
known, use Ts. 2.5 seconds. tribution of weight at each floor level is required in
g. Combined CS Factors. The product of C and S order to calculate the center of mass (chap 3, para
factors describes the general relationship of base 3-3(E)5) and the diaphragm forces (chap 3. par
shear coefficients to building period of vibration Z, 3-8(3)2d). The weight of the diaphragm and the ele-
I, and K are independent of T). CS ranges from a ments tributary thereto (designated wp. in formula
maximum of 0.140 for short period buildings to a 3-9) include the floor system, tributary weights of
value of 0.027 for a building with a period of 6 sec- walls and partitions, and other elements attached to
onds (such as for a 60-story building). Table 4-3 the diaphragm. The weights of the shear walls (and
gives some values of CS as a function of building pe- items attached thereto) that act in the same direc-
riod f1) and site characteristic period (T.}. Figure tion under onsieration for the diaphragm, need
4-8 illustrates the relationship of CS to T graphi- not be included in the weight of the diaphragm un-
cally, showing the maximum and minimum CS less there is vertical discontinuity such that redistri-
values. Note that for some building periods, CS is bution of the shear wall weight to other shear walls
not very sensitive to a variation in To. Is required. The horizontal distribution generally
consists of a combination of uniform and concen-
h Weight. W, the total dead load and applicable trated weights along the length of the floor plus con-
portions of other loads, represents the total mass of centrated weights tributary to the shear walls at the
the building. It includes the weight of the structural shear walls (see fig 4-4).
slabs, beams, columns, and walls as well as non- (3) Summation. The sum of the horizontal die-
structural components such as partitions, ceilings, tribution weight (in each direction of motion) will be
floor topping, roofing, fireproofing material and equal to the story weight, and the sum of the story
fixed electrical and mechanical equipment. When weights equal the total weight W of the building, ex-
partition locations are subject to change, a uniform cept that the bottom half of the first story generally
distributed dead load of 20 pounds per square foot distributes itself directly to the base and is not
of floor space is used. Miscellan items such as necessarily included in the weight W (fig 4-2).
ducts, typical piping, awl conduits can be covered
by an additional 1 or 2 pounds per square foot. In 4-4. Distribution of forces. The total lateral
storage areas, 25 percent of the design live load shall force Is distributed throughout the building In a
be ncluded in the seismic weight W. In areas of manner that simulates the behavior of the building
heavy snow loads, some or all of the design snow during an earthquake.
load must be included (refer to chap , para a. Story Forces. The distribution of the lateral
3-3(D)5c). At the initial stage of design, the esti- force vertically along the height of the building is
mated weights of the structural members will be determined by formula 3-7 (fig 4-1) except for those
used. After the final sizes of structural members are buildings that are considered irregular. A sample
selected, the actual weights must be compared with format for determining story forces is shown in
the estimated weights. In addition to determining table 4-4. The procedure given is based on the as-
the overall weight W. the designer must determine suznption of a uniform building and is aimed at a
tributary weights at each floor for both vertical and reasonable evaluation of the relative maximum
horizontal distribution. Therefore, the calculations story shear (e.g., column (9) In table 4-4) envelope
for W must be done in an orderly manner so that that will occur.
tributary weights as well as the overall weights can (1) Regular buildings with T < 0.7 second
be accounted for. When the period of the building is less than 0.7 ec-
(1) Vertical distribution For vertical distribu- ond, Ft will be equal to zero. Then formula 3-7, the
tion, the weight "we" that contributes to story level vertical distribution equation, will reduce to the fol-
"x" is calculated separately for each floor (refer to
chap , para 3-8(E)). This generally includes the P0wing.
weight of the complete floor system, plus one-half
the weight of the story walls and columns above the FX=1i)
I,-h- (4-1)
floor level and one-half of the weight of the story
4-7
-------
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 08-3. Chap. 13
Figure 4-3. CS v
a,
4-.
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Tabie 4-3. CS as a Function of T and T8
T T <'0.3 0.5 0.75 1.00 1.25 g.50 .0 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00
0.5 .140 .140 .110 .080 .060 .054 .047 .039 .033 .030 .027
0.75 .140 .136 .116 .098 .082 .065 .047 .039 .033 .030 .027
1.00 .140 .130 .113 .100 .089 .077 .057 .039 .033 .030 .027
1.25 .140 .124 .109 .099 .090 .080 .065 .039 .033 .030 .027
1.50 .140 .120 .106 .096 .089 .081 .069 .046 .033 .030 .027
1.75 .140 .117 .103 .094 .088 .080 .070 .052 .033 .030 .027
2.00 .137 .115 .100 .092 .086 .079 .071 .055 .040 .030 .027
2.50 .133 .111 .097 .088 .083 .077 .070 .057 .046 .036 .027
Unknown .140 .140 .116 .100 .090 .081 .071 .057 .046 .036 .027
4-9
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chop. 13
NOgMA .
WA L 1
mirn-mEI6ar OF
J70mTv as.ow
: W4 W + W + Wo 4 We
NO Te :. a WC W/ + W5
FLOOR, WIGAIT W INC I6$ PL.OO1M smucrus,
,NSPA)o0a~ Cl(IJNG, MeCmANIC4 GuSiPMeNr
(UNe.r TAKIEN £SPA1Are(rY AS PVe ) AND (IF
APPLICA646) 20 PF ROR PrJlTIOl4S
4-10
- -
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Tab 4-4 Force distibution
IF, c44
4RoOf 6.7 10 9 2637 0.t26 170
___ . 214
it 16(d
Jo
/0 o 2
7 57.0 1460 670 68 206 15 t66
The story force F is distributed horizontally at acceleration at the upper stories; however, in some
r!O level x in proportion to its mass distribution at that cases the strict application of Ft may result in exces-
level (refer to para 4-3h(2) and fig 4-4). sive forces for roof diaphragms and excessive
(2) Regular building with >0.7 second When overturning moments at foundations. To lessen
the period of the building is greater than 0.7 second, these effects for diaphragms, chapter 3, paragraph
a lateral force Ft. as determined by formula 3-6, is 3-3(J)2d, places a limit of 0.30ZIvwp on the required
applied to the top level of the structure, usually the diaphragm force; and for overturning moments at
roof. Ft will vary from 6 percent (T = 0.7 second) foundations, the SEAOC Commentary suggests
to 25 percent (3.6 seconds) of the lateral force V. that Ft may be neglected. A better approximation of
The remaining portion of the force (V- Ft) is distrib- the force distribution may be made by using the
uted throughout the height of the structure in principles of dynamics which include the significant
accordance with formula 3-7. The total applied force modes of vibration (see para (4) below).
at the top level of the structure will be Ft + F, (4) Irregularand setback buildings. For irregu-
where Fn is the value of F obtained from formula lar structures or framing systems (chap 3, para
8-7 for the top level "n" (see fig 4-1). 3-3(EP3) or for setback buildings (chap 3, para
(3) Additional comments on F,. The rationale 3-3(E)2), the lateral force cannot be distributed in
for Ft is based on the following assumption: For accordance with the arbitrary rules for uniform
buildings with periods greater than 0.7 second (e.g., buildings that are contained in formulas 3-6 and
tall and/or flexible structures), the fundamental 3-7. but must be distributed by a rational procedure
mode shape may depart from the straight-line as- that takes into account the stiffness properties of
sumption (formula 4-1) and the effects of higher the lateral force resisting system, the mass distribu-
modes of vibration may become more significant. To tion, and the principles of dynamics. Refer to
account for this, a greater portion of the lateral force gEAOC Recommendations, appendix C, for pro-
is assigned to the top of the structure by use of Ft posed provisions on setback buildings. Conditions
from formula 3-6. This additional force is intended of irregularity that require special design proce-
to increase the shear force and the equivalent story dures include the following-
4-11
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
(a) Buildings with irregular configuration in tion. Special consideration must be made at outsi
plan or in the vertical dimension (eg., I,, U-, and T- comers and re-entrant corners for the vulnerable Ad
plan and setback buildings). fects of concurrent motions about both principal
(h Buildings with abrupt changes in lateral axes. An approved procedure for investigating the
resistance within any level or between adjacent lev- effects of concurrent motion on the vulnerable ele-
els (e.g., discontinuity of shear walls or columns). ments is to combine the seismic forces acting in the
(ci Buildings with abrupt changes in lateral direction on one axis with 0.3 times the force effects
stiffness within any level or between adjacent levels resulting from the seismic forces acting in the
(eg., large change in size of shear walls or column direction perpendicular to the first axis.
piers). (b Structuresother than buildings.For strumc-
(dl Unusual or novel structural features. tures circular in plan, such as tanks, towers, and
b. Overturning. The overturning effects are deter- stacks, the design should be equally resistant in all
mined by applying the story forces obtained from directions. For four-legged structures substantially
formulas 3-6 and 3-7 as illustrated in table 4-4 and square in plan, seventy percent 70%) of the pre-
figure 4-1. The structure must resist these forces in scribed forces should be applied concurrently in the
accordance with chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(F). In directions of the two principal axes, especially for
moment-resistant frame structures, the overturning purposes of designing for overturning effects on col-
is resisted by a combination of coupled axial column umns and foundations.
forces and bending moments in the column. In shear (2) Vertical forces. Vertical components of
wall buildings, the overturning moments are re- ground motion are not usually calculated but con-
sisted by bending in the shear walls. When shear sidered to be accounted for in the difference between
walls are linked together by beams, axial forces are the vertical load capacity and actual vertical loads
transmitted to the shear walls. The distribution and in special provisions using reduced dead loads.
between the resisting axial overturning forces and Such provisions include the 0.9 factor for dead load
bending moments are dependent on the relative in chapter 6. formula 6-2, and chapter 7, formula
stiffnesses of horizontal and vertical structural 7-2, for considering the minimum gravity loads
elements. Accurate determination of the resisting (chap 3, pars 3-3(J)2c). These reduced loads apply f
forces can be complex; therefore, approximate axial compression due to gravity in concrete c
methods are generally used. One method may be umns and walls when subjected to seismic bendiig-
used for calculating the axial forces and another moments and uplift forces and to beam bending
method may be used for calculating bending mo- moments due to gravity when combined with
ments and shears to assure that the structural seismic bending moments in the opposite direction
elements are not underdesigned. The forces for the (Le., bending moment reversal).
columns and shear walls must be transmitted to the (a) Horizontal elements. In Seismic Zones 3
foundations. In zones of high seismicity, the appli- and 4, special considerations must be given to the ef-
cation of the design forces create an apparent over- fects of vertical accelerations on horizontal pre-
turning instability condition that is difficult to rec- stressed elements (especially those with draped pre-
oncile with observations in past earthquakes. The stressing) and horizontal cantilevers (chap 3, para
SEAOC Commentary suggests supplemental crite- 3-3(A)4). An approved procedure for investigating
ria for determining overturning to the foundations the effects of vertical accelerations for the horizon-
(also refer to para 4-4a(3) and 4-8). tal prestressed elements is to rely on only fifty per-
c. Directionof Force cent (50%) of the dead load as a minimum gravity
(1) Horizontalforces. In general, the horizontal load when applying the lateral forces. Horizontal
design earthquake forces are applied nonconcur- cantilever elements should be checked for the capa-
rently in the direction of each of the main axes of the city of the elements to resist a net upward force of
structure (chap 3, para 3-3(D)). Howev~er, in some twenty percent (20%) of the dead load.
cases a more severe condition may occur when the (b Hold-downs. In Seismic Zones 3 and 4, the
force is applied at a horizontal direction not parallel design of hold-downs to resist bending moments and
to the main axes. For some elements of a building, uplift forces will use a maximum of 0.9 of the dead
the effects of concurrent motion about both princi- load for gravity resistance.
pal axes should be investigated. Ad Path of Forces. All of the inertia forces origi-
(a) Buildings. An independent design about naIting from the masses on and off the structr
each of the principal axes will generally provide must be transmitted from their source to the base
adequate resistance for forces applied in any direc- the structure (see fig 4-5 and 4-6).
4-12
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 884, Chap. 13
/'3AeCTION OF
Z-11 ,
eArHQc/
4ice
(1AP14IRA GM >
_ .
I
, /0"
-- Je-S*R, WALL
NOJMA
WA Lo - 1111700
STRUCTURE *
le
® LO 3 To
zPM
® N*tM4 L WA L - s At
tReJsriNG -a6Ltm e r *
*Note: Exampl ow el daphragm. Far rgid diaphragm, rative rlgdites and torion wil be conidered.
4-13
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
T
_-WetauT o
F LO/4
%-LOAD POM 0I4PR4IG4M
Wc.(.
FROM W44C. 1rTjLs(.
v'-- .W4LL 64 IC
JNXA iN
INIcT1oN ON 6SOUNO
_/. OR IN PASSIVG pR.fSSJUS
A64INST 7OOTINGSS
-OVERTUANING R/eJ/J7D 6Y
AXI A L OR C4.f IN PLs
4-14
---------
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
(1) Forces normal to the plane of a wall must be therefore, some force transfer must occur between
transferred either vertically to the floors above and shear walls and frames. Shear walls tend to support
below or horizontally to frames or shear walls. These the frame at the lower stories and the frame tends to
forces will be governed by formula 3-8. support the shear wall at the upper stories (see fig
(2) Diaphragms acting as horizontal beams 4-7). (Also, see chap 6, para 6-2d(3).)
must transfer inertia forces to the frames andlor f Elements Not Partof the LateralForce-Resist-
shear walls. These forces will be governed by formu- ing System. The elements designated as the lateral
las -9 and 3-9A. In some cases, the diaphragm force resisting-system must be designed to resist
forces are transferred to a collector member (or a the total applied lateral force. In addition, all load-
drag strut). This strut load must, in turn, be trans- carrying elements not designed to be part of the lat-
ferred to the shear walL eral force-resisting system must be analyzed to de-
(3) Frames and shear walls must transfer forces termine if they are compatible with the lateral
contributed from the diaphragms as well as their force-resisting system (see chap 3, pars 3-3(J)ld and
own inertia forces to the foundations. These forces e). Any element that is not strong enough to resist
are governed by formulas 3-1, 3-6, and 3-7. the forces that it attracts or the interstory drifts
(4) Forces applied to the foundations by the that occur will be damaged unless it is isolated from
shear walls and frames must be transmitted into the the lateral force-resisting system.
ground. See paragraph 4-8 for design of founda-
tions. g Dynamic Approach Alternative methods to
(5) Connections between all elements must be the static distribution of seismic forces are permit-
capable of transferring the applied forces from one ted by chapter S. paragraph 3-3(I). Some basic
element to another. Special design requirements for concepts are discussed in chapter 2, paragraphs 2-4
connections are reviewed In paragraph 4-6. and 2-10.
e RigidityAnalysis 4-5. Design of the structural elements. De-
(1) Horizontal forces. For rigid diaphragms, sign of diaphragms, walls, and frames are covered
the horizontal forces are transferred to the vertical by chapters , 6. and 7, respectively. These struc-
frames and shear walls in proportion to the relative tural-elements must be designed for various com-
rigidities. When all the vertical elements (frames or binations of loads and must satisfy certain deforma-
shear walls) are of equal size in a symmetrical build tion requirements.
ing, the diaphragm forces are distributed equally. a. Load combinations will be in accordance with
When there are large differences or a lack of symme- chapter S, paragraph 3-3()2c.
try, a rigidity analysis must be performed. When
the diaphragms are flexible, the horizontal forces 6. Structural elements will be designed to resist
are transferred in proportion to tributary area. (See the combined axial, shear, and bending forces.
chap 3, para 3-3(E)4, and chap 5, para 6-24) c. Deformations will be governed by the provi-
(2) Horizontal torsional moments. For rigid sions for interstory drift (chap 3, para 3-3(H1)1),
diaphragms, where the center of rigidity of the verti- building separations (chap 3, para 3-3(H)2, and para
cal lateral force-resisting elements (frames or shear 4-7), deformation compatibility (chap 3, para
walls) is not coincident with the center of mass, pro- 3-3(Jld), diaphragm deformation (chap 3, para
visions must be made for this eccentricity. For a 3-S(J)2d, and chap 6, para 6-2b), and exterior ele-
symmetrical building, a minimum eccentricity of ments (chap 3, para 3-3(J)3d).
6 percent of the maximum building dimension is re- (1) For determining compliance with the defor-
quired. (See chap 3, para 8-3(E)5, and chap 5, para mation provisions, only structural elements should
6-2d) be considered in the stiffness calculations. It is un-
(3) Distributionbetween shearwalls and fames conservative to include the stiffness participation of
(dual systems). When a dual bracing system is used nonstructural elements without substantiated data.
(table 8-3, Category 3, K = 0.80), a rigidity analysis This is in contrast with the assumptions used in the
must be made to determine the interaction between period calculation for obtaining values for C and S
the walls and the frames. Generally for tall (para 4-3d{4)). Thus, it is not uncommon to have one
buildings, shear walls deflect as vertical cantilevers set of stiffness assumptions for calculating the total
in a concave shape and frames deflect in a straight design lateral forces and another set of stiffness
line or convex shape (see fig 4-7). In a dual system jssumptions for calculating the design lateral
with rigid diaphragms, the shear walls and frames displacements. It is acceptable to calculate the
are forced to deflect the same amount at each sory: lateral deformations based on lateral forces corre-
4-15
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
0.152 0.06
, o~~~~tes
*j
10 Ito t. 191
.01
i.1t .11+
t107 f.07C
.7c
F . 074
77 -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
4-16
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
sponding to a building period TD longer than the a. Design Crteria. Special design requirements
period T used for the design lateral forces and with- for connections are included in the following para-
out the limit specified in paragraph 4-3d(5). An graphs of this manual.
(1) Chapter paragraph 8-8401g, Braced
example is given below.
(2) In the seven-story building example in table Frames. Connections of braced frames must be de-
4-4, C and S are based on a building period T of 0.8 signed to develop the full tension and compression
second. The design lateral forces include an addi- capacity of the members or they must be designed
tional top story force Ft of 44 kips and a total lateral for 1.25 times the design lateral force without the
force V of 791 kips. The calculated period based on usually permitted one-third increase.
(2) Chapter paragraphs 8-4J324 Dia-
the bare structural frame is 1.2 seconds. This period
is not valid for use in calculating the lateral forces phragms; 3-4T3a, Anchorage of Concrete or Ma-
because it ignores some elements that will stiffen sonry Walls, and 3-3)3b, Wood Diaphragms Used
the structure para 4-Sd(4)) and it exceeds the rec- to Support Concreteor Masonry Walls. These provi-
ommended maximum limit in paragraph 4-Sd(5). sions specify the minimum requirements for con-
However, the period of 1.2 seconds may be used as necting floors and roofs to concrete and masonry
TD to calculate the lateral forces used to determine walls.
the lateral displacement. The resulting (Ft)D is 54 (3) Chapter paragraph 8-83J)84 Exterior
kips and VD is 644 kips. Therefore, to calculate the Elements. Connections of precast or prefabricated
lateral displacement, the values of 64 kips and 644 'non-bearing, non-shear wall panels or similar ele-
lips may be used In lieu of 44 kips and 791 kips, re- ments must be designed in accordance with special
spectively. This reduces the calculated displacement provisions for story drift, seismic design forces, and
from 2.7 inches to 2.2 inches. This displacement will ductility.
be multiplied by 1.0/K to determine drift compliance (4) Chapter , Diaphragms; chapter 6, Walls;
or by 3.01K to determine deformation compliance chapter 7, Space Frames; and chapter 8, Reinforced
with provisions in chapter 8. Masonry, provide additional minimum connection
requirements for lateral force-resisting structural
d The secondary effects of lateral deformation systems.
(P-f, effect), when significant, must be investigated 6. Forces. Forces to be considered in design of
to assure lateral stability. connections between structural elements, in addi-
4-6. Connections between elements. Fore- tion to lateral force shears, are axial loads, flexural
most among requirements vital to earthquake-re- and torsions (twisting), as well as secondary or pry-
sistant design of all types of buildings is the neces- ing forces within connections-separately or com-
sity of tying the various structural elements to- bined as applicable to the specific case. These forces,
gether so that they act as a unit. Possibly the most at juncture seam along the intersection of the struc-
important aspect of lateral force design is the con- tural elements, may be the resultant of gravity
nections (seams and joints) between the structural loads, overturning, differential foundation settle-
elements. In designing and detailing, it Is well to ments, lateral forces both normal and parallel to
keep in mind that the lateral forces are not static, as vertical elements, and shrinkage and thermal forces.
assumed for convenience, but dynamic and to a Positive means will be provided for transferring
great extent unpredictable. Since prevention of col- shears from the plane of the diaphragm into the ver-
lapse during a severe earthquake depends upon the tical resisting elements, and also for transferring
energy absorbing capacity of the structural ele- wind or seismic forces from the vertical elements
ments, the ultimate strength of the structure should into the diaphragm. In designing connections or
be governed by the strength of the structural ele- ties, it is necessary to make each and every connec-
ments rather than by the strength of their connec tion consistent with the basic assumptions and dis-
tions; thus, connectors should not be the weak link tribution of forces. Provisions will be made in the
of the structure. Obviously, a structural element design of connections to lateral force movements in
cannot transmit shears, moments, and torsions in walls arising from creep, temperature, and shrink-
excess of the ultimate strength of the connection age movements in decks, including steel beams or
used to join elements. As a general rule these con- girders when decking is fastened thereto. All signi-
nections should be sufficient to develop the useful ~fiant loadings must be considered, and the joints
strength of the structural elements connected, re- pnd connections designed for forces consistent with
gardless of calculated stress. all reasonable combinations of loadings.
4-17
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chop. 13
c. Details. Details of connections shall admit to a eral, elements and members should be detailed
rational analysis in accordance with well-established that torsion and moments are held to a minimum
principles of mechanics. Joints and connections may the connections.
be made by welding, bolting, by bond and anchorage d Allowable Shear and Tension on Botts in Con-
of reinforcement, by dowels, and by mechanical de crte. Table 4-5 shows the maximum allowable
vices such as embedded shapes and welded studs. forces on steel bolts A307 or better) embedded in
The transfer of shear may be accomplished by using regular weight concrete (3,000 psi minimum
reinforcing steel extended as dowels coupled with strength). Values are based on a bolt spacing of at
cast-in-place concrete placed between roughened least 12 diameters with a minimum edge distance of
concrete interfaces. The entire shear should be 6 diameters. The bolts will have a standard bolt
considered as transferred through one type of de- head or an equal deformity in the embedded portion.
vice, even though a combination of devices may be In Seismic Zone Nos. 2, 3, and 4, an additional 2
available at the joint or support being considered Inches of embedment will be provided for anchor
unless one is sure that the combination of devices bolts located in the top of columns. When combining
will act in unison. Because joints and connections di- tension and shear forces on a bolt, the following in-
rectly affect the integrity of the structure, their teraction formula is applicable:
design and fabrication must be adequate for the
functions intended. Rotational forces resulting from De! shearFoe+ nea4 Tendon Force -2)
eccentric connections must be considered. In gen- AlloblShear Force JAlowbeTa Fensi
orce o
minimum
Diameter embedment' Shear Tendons
(inches) (Inches) (pounds) (pounds)
4-18
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13.
larger structure). Extensive damage has b ob-
4-7. Special seismic detailing. Some of the which can be attrib-
general requirements and details for satisfactory served from past earthquakes
performance under earthquake conditions are enu- uted to the omission of such separation. A separa-
merated and discussed in the following paragraphs. tion between the two units will be required in such
Also, refer to chapter 2, paragraph 2-9k. cases.
(2) As an alternative to integral construction or
a. Separationof Structures (chap X,para -(H)2). full separation, a properly substantiated separation
In past earthquakes the mutual hammering re- by a mechanical acting joint designed to take appro-
ceived by buildings in close proximity to one priate forces and displacements is permitted.
another has caused significant damage. The sim
plest way to prevent damage is to provide sufficient c. Bridges Between Buildings. Certain types of
clearance so that free motion of the two structures structures commonly found in industrial installa-
will result. 'Me motion to be provided for is pro- tions are tied together at or near their tops by
duced partly by the deflections of the structures connecting parts such as piping, conveyors, ducts,
themselves and partly by the rocking or settling of etc. For instance, it may be necessary to connect
foundations. The gap must equal the sum of the to- two buildings by a covered bridge or passageway. In
tal deflections from the base of the two buildings to most cases It would not be economically feasible to
the top of the lower building. make such a bridge sufficiently rigid to force both
(1) In the case of a normal building, less than So buildings to vibrate together. A sliding joint at one
feet in height using concrete or masonry shear walls, or both ends of the bridge can usually be installed.
the gap shall be not less than the arbitrary rule of 1 In general, it is preferable to avoid bridges between
inch for the first 20 feet of height above the ground buildings in Seismic Zone Nos. 8 and 4.
plus 1/2 inch for each 10 feet of additional height. d Stairway. Stairways may be considered as in-
(2) For higher or more flexible buildings, the clined extensions of horizontal diaphragms. Since
gap or seismic joint between the structures should the stairway has a vertical component it must be
be based on 3/K times the deflections determined considered as a vertical shear wall and designed as
from the required (prescribed) lateral forces. If the such or be cut loose so as not to act in the case of
design of the foundation is such that rotation is ex- earthquake shock. If the stiffness of the stairway
pected to occur at the base due to rocking or due to acting as an Inclined vertical shear wall is relatively
settlement of foundations, this additional deflection small when compared to other vertical resisting ele-
T""RIM",RIMI
F
(as determined by rational methods) will be in- ments in the building, the problem becomes lem
cluded. important. Thus, in general, the use of concrete
b. Seismic Joints. Junctures between distinct stairs in a stiff building with masonry or concrete
parts of buildings, such as the intersection of a wing walls may be satisfactory. However, more flexible
of a building with the main portion, are often de- steel stairs should generally be used in buildings
signed with flexible joints that alow relative having a flexible moment-resisting frame. Interior
movement. When this is done, each part of the build- stairs usually create a hole in the diaphragm which
ing must be considered as a separate structure that should be treated as an opening in the web of a plate
has its own independent bracing system. The crite- girder.
ria for separation of buildings in paragraph a above e. "Short-Column" Effects. Whenever the lateral
will apply to seismic joints for parts of buildings. deflection of any column is restrained, when full-
Seismic joint coverages will be made flexible, water- height deflections were assumed in the analysis, It
proof, and architecturally acceptable. will carry a larger portion of the lateral forces than
(1) An example that is frequently found in large assumed. In past earthquakes, column failures have
one-story industrial buildings with a relatively flexi- frequently been inadvertently caused by the stiffen-
ble frame follows: ing (shortening) effect of deep spandrels, stairways,
At one end of the industrial building it is desired to partial-height filler walls, or intermediate bracing
provide a small office section with stiff exterior or members. Unless considered in the analysis, such
interior walls. The office unit is relatively much stif- stiffening effect shall be eliminated by proper detail-
fer than the rest of the building. If these two units ing for adequate isolation at the juncture of the
are tied together, the horizontal force of the entire cblumn and the resisting elements.
structure will be delivered to the small stiff unit
which may be incapable of resisting such large it-8. Design of foundations. The foundations
must be designed for the seismic forces transmitted
forces (or excessive torsion may be developed in the
4-19
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
by the shear walls and frames of the lateral force- termined by the soils specialist. Passive resistr
resisting system.. The media used for the transmis- or lateral bearing values are permitted only wQ ,
sion of horizontal forces may be friction between concrete is deposited directly against naturaI
floor slab and ground; friction between bottom of ground or the backfill is well compacted. Passive re-
footing and ground; and/or passive resistance of sistance should not be used where the lateral bear-
earth against vertical surfaces of footings, grade ing surface is close to an excavation unless such ex-
beams, or basement walls. The overturning effects, cavation is carefully backfilled with well-compacted
which require a careful analysis of permissible over- materiaL The shear in the earth between such bear-
loads for combined effect of vertical and lateral ing surface and open or poorly compacted excava-
loads, will be made as part of the foundation design tion or a similar depression may be a critical item.
(refer to para 4-4b and to the SEAOC Commentary Where a building is supported by piles. caissons, or
on overturning for additional discussion of over- deep piers. it is frequently necessary to develop
turning effects). Resulting tensile forces must be horizontal shear through lateral bearing against the
resisted by anchorage into the foundation. Stability side of the pile, pier, or caisson. The upper soils may
against overturning must be provided for the short- not have sufficient lateral bearing value to resist the
time loading during an earthquake (or wind) without lateral forces. This creates bending in the piles
Imposing such restrictions as to create wide dispar- which must be provided for in the design. Where a
ity in foundation settlements under normal loading. building is supported on piles driven through very
This disparity could create more damage to the poor material it is frequently economical to drive
structure than that which might occur in an earth- batter piles to take care of horizontal shear transfer
quake under highly increased soil pressures. The soil to the ground. In instances where footings are sub-
pressure resisting combined static and prescribed jected to lateral thrusts due to applied vertical
seismic loads can generally exceed the normal loads, such horizontal thrust will be added to the
allowable pressure for static loads by 1/3. However. lateral seismic force indicated above. An example of
the various types of soils react differently to short- this case could be the outward thrusts on footings of
time seismic loading and any increase over normal a rigid gable bent due to applied vertical loads. The
allowable static loading will be confirmed by a soils ties can be formed by an interconnecting grid Pv
analysis. In no case will the footing size be less than work of reinforced concrete struts or structural s
that required for static loads alone. Earthquake vi- shapes encased in concrete. As an alternate, a rehd
brations may cause consolidation or liquefaction of forced concrete floor slab, doweled to walls and
loose soils, and the resultant settlement of building footings to provide restraint in all horizontal direc-
foundations usually will not be uniform. In the case tions, may be used in lieu of the grid network of ties.
of rigid structures supporte& on individual spread Slabs-on-grade will not be used as ties when signifi-
footings bearing on such material, excessive differ- cant differential settlement is expected between
ential settlements can result in damage to the footings and slab. In such cases, slabs-on-grade will
superstructure. Stabilization of the soil prior to con- be cut loose from footings and made free floating
struction or the use of piles, caissons, or deep piers (note that the effective unsupported height of the
bearing on a firm stratum may be the solution to wall is increased for this condition). Strut ties placed
this problem. below such slabs shall be cushioned or separated
a. Foundation Mhs. This paragraph supplements from the slab sufficiently so that slab settlement
the design criteria of chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(J)3c. will not damage the strut ties. Alternatively, it may
Individual pile, caisson, and deep pier footings of be more economical to overexcavate the soil under
every building or structure in Seismic Zones 2, 3, the footings and recompact to control differential
and 4 will be interconnected by ties. For Seismic settlements and to increase passive resistance so as
Zone 1, provide ties only when surrounding soil has to eliminate need for footing ties.
low passive resistance values. Each'tie will be 5. Pile oundations. For pile-supported struc-
designed to carry an axial tension and compression tures subjected to horizontal loads, it must be
horizontal force equal to 1/10 the larger pile cap decided whether the lateral load-carrying capacity
loading. Isolated spread footings on soil with a low of the vertical piles is adequate or whether batter
passive resistance will also be tied together in a way Riles should be used. The lateral load-carrying ca-
to prevent relative movement of the various parts of pacity of vertical piles is dependent on the proper-
the foundation with respect to each other. Passive .Ales of the soil; the size, length, and material of *'
resistance values vary greatly with type of soil and - pile; and the pile grouping and spacing. These
depth. Adequacy of passive resistance should be de- tors should be taken into consideration in estimtr
4-20
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Ing the ability of vertical piles to withstand the hor- yzed, a final design check must be made to verify
frontal loads. that the Initial assumptions are correct, and
whether or not the resulting structure satisfies the
4-9. Parts and elements of buildings. Parts intent of the seismic provisions.
and elements of buildings and their anchorages will
be designed for forces in accordance with chapter 3, a CompareFinalSizes With InitialEstimates
paragraph 8-3(G), formula 3-8, and table 8-4. (1) Weights. Compare the final weights of the
a. Structural elements include walls and parapets building with the weight used to determine the seis-
with lateral loads normal to the flat surfae, dia- mic forces. If the weight has increased significantly
phragns as horizontal beams (chap 8, para 8-3 (say over 5%), redesign will be necessary.
W ,2d) and penthouses (chimneys and smokestacks (2) Stiffness. If the final member sizes are sub-
are covered in para c below). These elements will be stantially different than the Initial estimates, a re-
designed to resist the specified lateral forces as well evaluatign of the design will be necessary (see para
as to transfer these forces to the structural system (s) and (4) below). If the relative stiffnesses of the
of the building through proper connections. varying elements have changed significantly, the
distribution of lateral forces must be reevaluated.
b. Architectural elements include partitions, or- (3) Period. If the initial period was determined
nmentation suspended ceilings, exterior panels by a method using structural properties and defor-
ichap 8, para 8-S(J)3d), and storage racks. Architec- mation characteristics, such as in formula 8-8, the
tural elements are covered in chapter 9. initial stiffness and weight properties must be com-
c. Mechanical and electrical elements, which are pared to the final properties of the structure. If the
covered by chapter 10, include chimneys and smoke- final period is shorter than the initial period that
stacks, as well as equipment and machinery. For was used to calculate the lateral forces, a new set of
rigid and rigidly attached equipment and macin- forces must be calculated and applied to the struc-
ery, the force factors of table 8-4 will be used; but ture.
for flexible and flexibly mounted equipment and ma- (4) Displacements.If the final stiffness, period,
chinery, the special provisions of chapter 10 are or forces have changed substantially, displacements
required. When the mechanical and electrical ele- will have to be recalculated to check for compliance
ments are part of the life safety system, an "I" with the various provisions for drift and deforma-
factor of 1.6 will be used. tion.
4-10. Structures other than buildings. This b. Path of Forces. Upon completion of the design,
manual is primarily concerned with the design of a final check will be made to determine that all the
buildings; however, provisions are also included for Inertia forces can be tranitted without instability
some structures other than buildings. When these from their source to the base of the structure. (See
structures are designed in accordance with formula para 4-4d.)
8-1 in chapter 8, paragraph 3-8(D), a K-value of 2.0
or 2.5 is used as specified n table 8-8. This higher c. Details. Check the structural details to assure
value is ustified by the assumption that these that the intent of the design calculations and the
structures will generally have lower damping char- seismic design detailing are properly provided for on
acteristics, less inelastic deformation capacity, and the construction drawings.
less redundancy than typical buildings. Procedures
and guidelines for structures other than buildings d Specifications. Check the specifications to as-
are included inchapter 11. sure that the intent of the design calculations,
material strength assumptions, and the seismic de-
4-11. Final design considerations. After the sign detailing are properly provided for in the job
structural elements have been selected and anal- specifications.
4-21
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 8-3, Chap. 13
CHAPTER 6
DIAPHRAGMS
6-1. Purpose and scope. This chapter pre- eners, and the peripheral beams or integral rein-
scribes the criteria for the design of horizontal di- forcement function as flanges (fig 5-1, 5-2, and 6-3).
aphragms and horizontal bracing of buildings in A diaphragm may be constructed of materials such
seismic areas, indicates principles and factors gov- as concrete, wood, or metal in various forms. Combi-
erning the horizontal distribution of lateral forces nations of materials are possible. Strength criteria
and resistance to lateral forces, gives certain design for such materials a cast-in-place reinforced con-
data, and lustrates typical details of construction. crete and structural steel are well established and
Refer to chapter 8, paragraph S-S(J)2d. for design present no problem to the designer once the loading
forces. and reaction system Is known. Other materials fre-
5-2. General. Buildings are composed of vertical quently used to support vertical loads in floors or
and horizontal structural elements which resist lat- roofs have well-established vertical load characteris-
eral forces. Horizontal forces on a structure pro- tics but have required tests to demonstrate their
duced by seismic ground motion originate at the ability to resist lateral forces. Various types of wood
centrold of the mass of the building elements and sheathing and steel decks fall in this category.
are proportional to the masses of these elements. Where a diaphragm is made up of units such as ply-
The forces originating at masses tributary to the wood, precast concrete floor units or steel deck
horizontal elements are distributed by such horizon- units, its characteristics are, to a large degree, de-
tal elements to vertical elements which in turn pendent upon the attachments of one unit to an-
transmit such forces to the ground. Forces may also other and to the supporting members.
be transmitted from vertical elements to horizontal (2) Horizontal bracing system. A horizontal
elements and then be redistributed to other vertical bracing system may be of any approved material,
elements. Refer to chapter 4, figures 4-4 and 4-5, such as reinforced concrete, structural steel or wood.
for tributary weights and path of forces, respec- The bracing system will be fully developed in both
tively. directions so that the bracing diagonals and chord
a. Function. Horizontal forces at any floor or roof members form complete horizontal trusses between
level are distributed to the vertical resisting ele- vertical resisting elements (fig 5-4). Deflections and
ments by using the strength and rigidity of the floor web flexibility due to the required static forces will
or roof deck to act as a diaphragm. Horizontal brac- be determined using normal design principles. The
ing may be used to act as a diaphragm to transfer stiffness category and span/depth limitations that
the horizontal forces to the vertical resisting apply to diaphragms (see para d, and f below) also
elements. apply to horizontal bracing systems. The general
(1) Diaphragms. A diaphragm may be consid- layout of a bracing system and sizing of members
ered analogous to a plate girder laid in a horizontal must be determined for each individual case.
for inclined in the case of a roof) plane where the b. Symbols and Notations. Additional terminol-
floor or roof deck performs the function of the plate ogy which relates to diaphragms and which will be
girder web, the joists or beams function as web stiff- used in this chapter is shown below:
NB -North-South direction
EW - East-West direction
* - Distance between center of gravity CG) of forces
and center of rigidity cr) of the vertical resisting
elements
RR - Relative rigidity
V - Shear (or reaction)
A, -Deflection of vertical element
Ad -Deflection of diaphragm
5-1
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
;m
5-2
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
c Seismic Loadings Floors and roofs used as concrete beam system of appreciable stiffness on
diaphragms will be designed for lateral forces speci- yielding supports. The support reactions are de-
fied in chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(J)2d, acting in any pendent on the relative stiffnesses of both dia-
horizontal direction. These forces include inertia phragm and vertical elements. A rigorous analysis
forces originating from the weight of the diaphragm is sometimes very time consuming and frequently
and the elements attached thereto, as well as forces unjustified by the results; at best, the results are no
that are required to be transferred to vertical resist- better than the assumptions that must be made. In
ing elements because of offsets or changes of stiff- such cases a design based on reasonable limits may
ness in vertical resisting elements above and below be used; however, the calculations must reasonably
the diaphragm (chap 4, fig 4-5 and 4-6). bracket the likely range of reactions and deflections
d Distributionof Seismic Forces.The total shear,
(fig 5-5(c)).
which includes the forces contributed through the (4) Torsional moment is generated whenever
diaphragm as well as the forces contributed from the center of gravity cg) of the lateral forces fails to
the vertical resisting elements above the dia- coincide with the center of rigidity cr) of the vertical
phragm, at any level will be distributed to the var- resisting elements, providing the diaphragm is suf-
ious vertical elements of the lateral force resisting ficiently rigid to transfer torsion. The magnitude of
system (shear walls or moment resisting frames) in the torsional moment that is required to be distrib-
proportion to their rigidities considering the rigidity uted to the vertical resisting elements by a dia-
of the diaphragm. The effect of diaphragm stiffness phragm is determined by the larger of the following
on the distribution of lateral forces is discussed and (a) the sum of the moments created by the physical
schematically illustrated below (fig 6-5). For this eccentricity of the translational forces at the level of
purpose, diaphragms are classified into five groups the diaphragm from the center of rigidity of the
of flexibilities relative to the flexibilities of the resisting elements MT = Fpe, where e = distance
walls. These are rigid, semi-rigid, semi-flexible, flex- between cg and cr) or (b) the sum of the moments
ible, and very flexible diaphragms. No diaphragm is created by an "accidental" torsion of 6%. Te "ac-
actually infinitely rigid and no diaphragm capable of cidental" torsion is an arbitrary code requirement
carrying a load is infinitely flexible. equivalent to the story shear acting with an eccen-
(1) A rigid diaphragm is assumed to distribute tricity of not less than 6% of the maximum building
horizontal forces to the vertical resisting elements dimension at that level (chap 3, para 3-3(E)5). The
in proportion to their relative rigidities. In other torsional moments will be distributed through rigid
words, under symmetrical loading a rigid dia- diaphragms to the vertical resisting elements in a
phragm will cause each vertical element to deflect method analogous to the torsion formula T=TcJJ
an equal amount with the result that a vertical ele- (fig 5-6). Thus the torsional shear forces can be ex-
ment with a high relative rigidity will resist a pressed by the formula FT=MTkdlIkd', where k is
greater proportion of the lateral force than an ele- the stiffness of the vertical resisting elements, d is
ment with a lower rigidity factor (fig 5-5(b)). the distance from the center of rigidity, and kd'
(2) A flexible diaphragm and a very flexible represents the polar moment of inertia (Note:
diaphragm are analogous to a shear deflecting con- MT=XFTd). The torsional shears will be combined
tinuous beam or series of beams spanning between with the direct (translational) shears (fig 5-6(b)).
supports. The supports are considered non-yielding, However, when the torsional shears are opposite in
as the relative stiffness of the vertical resisting direction to the direct shears, the lateral forces shall
elements compared to that of the diaphragm is not be decreased. A properly evaluated and rational
great. Thus a flexible diaphragm will be considered alternative (e.g., computer techniques) to this ap-
to distribute the lateral forces to the vertical resist- proach can be used (refer to SEAOC Commentary
ing elements on a tributary load basis. A flexible on horizontal torsional moments). When dia-
diaphragm will not be considered capable of dis- phragms are flexible, relative to the vertical resist-
tributing torsional stresses resulting from concrete ing elements e.g., wood floor diaphragms and con-
or masonry masses (fig 5-6(d)). crete or masonry shear walls), it will be assumed
(3) Semi-rigid and semi-flexible diaphragms are that the diaphragms cannot transmit torsional mo-
those which have significant deflection under load mients, thus there will be no torsional distribution.
but which also have sufficient stiffness to distribute. Qantilever diaphragms on the other hand will dis-
a portion of their load to vertical elements in pro- tibute translational forces to vertical resisting ele-
portion to the rigidities of the vertical resisting ments, even if the diaphragm is flexible. In this
elements. The action is analogous to a continuous case, the diaphragm and its chord act as a flexural
5-3
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
'p- 13ok 30
1 --
I w-deck I
I c
V an 2,
S~laprags o ¶ %a %lesnent
l~~Vetia
2ils
(o) Semi-R!Aid Digphra
ADia rtical
(d) Flexible DiaphraRm
iV
(a)
4- 41 -
No Rotation
H(b)
3S~~~~~~~~~I
D
Rotation on Rigid
-j
E
_
(a) Cantilever
on Diaphragm Diaphragm Diaphragm
5-A
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
beam supported by the vertical resisting elements the stiffness of a diaphragm. The limitation on de-
(fig 6-6(c)). flection is the allowable amount prescribed for the
e. Diaphragm Deflections. A diaphragm will be relative deflection (drift) of the walls between the
designed to provide such stiffness and strength so level of the diaphragm and the floor below. Refer to
that walls and other vertical elements laterally sup- chap 6, fig 6-2 and para 6-2b. The limitation im
ported by the diaphragm can safely sustain the posed on diaphragms supporting flexible walls is a
stresses Induced by the response to seismic motion. maxnium span-to-depth ratio, see table 6-1.
The total computed deflection t)of diaphragms f Flexibility Limitations. The determination and
under the prescribed static seismic forces consists of limitations of the deflections of a diaphragm is a de
the sum of two components. The first component is sign function. The deflections of some diaphragms
the flexural con (f) of the diaphragm which is can be computed with reasonable accuracy. How
determined in the same manner as the deflection of ever, other diaphragms have characteristic and fab
beams. The assumption that flexural stresses on the rication variables making an accurate solution of de
diaphragm web are neglected will be used except for flection characteristics meaningless. Thus the
reinforced concrete slabs. For such slabs the propor- methods of determination of the deflection char-
tional flexural stresses also may be assumed to be acteristics for diaphragms of all materials given
carried by the web. The second component is the herein will be used to keep the range of diaphragm
web shear) deflection (A&)of the diaphragm. The deflections within reasonable limits.
specific nature of the web deflection will vary de- 11) F-factor. In order to provide a means of
pending on the type of diaphragm. The total deflec- properly classifying and identifying the stiffness of
tion of the diaphragm under the prescribed static a diaphragm web, the factor "F" will be introduced.
forces will be used as the criteria for the adequacy of The factor F is equal to the average deflection in
TABLE5-L FlxbilityLmiationonDiaphamZ=
SpanlDepth Limitations
Maximum
Flexibility Span No torsion considered Torsion considered
category F Ifeet) in diaphragM in diaphragm!
Brittle Flexible Brittle Flexible
walst walls Walls t walls
Not Not
Very Over tobe tobe
flexib 150 used 2:1 used 1-112:1
Not
to be
Flexible 70-150 100 2:1 3:1 used 2:1
Not
semi- tobe
flexible 10-70 200 2-1/2:1 4:1 used 2-112:1
Notes:
iWalls in concrete and unit-masonry are classified as brittle; in all ca owable drift before selecting type of diaphragm
'When applying these limitations to cantilever diaphragms, the sparbpth ratio shall be limited to one-half that shown.
'No torsion in diaphragm other than the 5% "accidental" torsion rered by chapterS paragraph S-3(E)S.
4For Zones 1 and 2 diagonally sheathed mnd plywood diaphragms in the "Very Flexible" category may be used to support laterally
masonry and concrete walls In one-story buildings where the diaphragm is not required to act in rotation.
6-5
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
micro inches (millionths of an inch) of the diaphragm Braced Frames. For buildings such as large
web per foot of span stressed with a shear of one houses with long span vertical moment resist.'
pound per foot. Expressed as a formula this be- frames in the transverse direction, the diaphragm
comes: connecting these frames need be only nominal sway
bracing with little or no computed stresses, since
F - !MX where 5-i each bent would be designed to carry its tributary
qaL 1
L - Distance in feet between vertical resisting element
lateral force. However, in the longitudinal direction
(such as shear wall) and the point to which the where only the exterior walls resist seismic forces,
deflection is to be determined the diaphragm must span from side wall to side
q. - Average shear In diaphragm In pounds per foot waIL If the frames are of structural steel, considera-
over length LI tion should be given to the selection of a horizontal
A, -Web component of A4 steel bracing system as a diaphragm. If the frames
are of reinforced concrete, a concrete deck will nor-
Using the factor F, the flexibility categories of dia- mally be used. When applicable, torsion will be con-
phragm webs have designated values as prescribed sidered (para 5-2d(4)).
in table 5-1. The span-depth limitations do not di-
rectly reflect deflections. The web deflection will be b. Multi-Story Frame Structure&For tall, multi-
determined by the equation story buildings with moment resisting frames, dia-
phragms will be rigid enough to distribute horizon-
tal forces and torsion in proportion to the relative
rigidities of the frames. A more flexible diaphragm
lor (5-2)
on such structures must be avoided because it will
(2) Determination of F-factors The equations permit portions of a building to vibrate out-of- phase
for use in determining the strength and stiffness ca- with the rest of the structure, creating reverse warp-
pabilities of various diaphragm materials have in ing strains.
most cases only been published in the literature of c. Deep Beam Analogy. Diaphragms are designed
the companies supplying these materials. These as deep beams so that the web deckinr
have been based usually on a limited number of sheathing) will carry shear and the flanges (spai
tests and have been derived empirically to fit the beams or other members) at the edges will resistse
test data available to them. As more and more tests bending moments. Webs of precast concrete units or
were run, these equations were altered to incorpo- metal deck units will require details for joining the
rate the new data. This led to many somewhat sim- units to each other and to their supports so as to dis-
ilar equations for identical diaphragm components tribute shear forces. Boundary members at edges of
supplied by different manufacturers. The equations diaphragms must be designed to resist direct tensile
used in this manual have been developed using as a or compressive (chord) stresses, including adequate
basis all of the test data made available to the splices at points of discontinuity. For instance, in a
Triservice Seismic Design Committee at the time of steel frame building the spandrel beams acting as a
the last edition of this manual (April 1973) and may diaphragm flange component require a splice design
be subject to some revision in the future as new data at the columns for the tensile and compressive
are obtained. stresses induced by diaphragm action.
5-3. Diaphragm selectlon. In most buildings it (1) Openings. Diaphragms with openings, such
is economical to use the roof and floor systems as as cut-out areas for stairs or elevators, will be ana-
diaphragms; therefore, the overall structural sys- lyzed similarly to a plate girder with a hole in the
tem, including the vertical load resisting elements, web, and require complete detailing to show that all
affects the selection of the diaphragm (or horizontal the stresses around the opening will be developed.
bracing) system. The selected system must be com- (2) L- and T-shaped buildings. The L and T-
patible with the criteria governing the vertical load- shaped buildings will have the flange (chord)
carrying capacities and the fire resistant qualities. stresses developed through or into the heel of the L
Relative costs of various types of suitable dia- or T. This is analogous to a girder with a deep
phragms should be investigated to achieve the . haunch.
greatest economy. Some of the most common items ,; Braced Frame Systems. When plannir a
that affect the selection of the diaphragm system bracing system of a building, consider the stn
are summarized below. as a whole. Visualize the ways in which the
a. Transverse Frames and Longitudinal Walls or ture might fail and provide bracing with adequate
5-6
-------
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
strength and rigidity to keep the structure upright. chanical anchorage can be provided by steel inserts
Before deciding upon the position of bracing, the or reinforcement, by bonded cast-in-place concrete
structural engineer must be certain just where every lugs, or by bonded roughened surface, as shown on
obstruction and other controlling features will be figure 5-8. Positive anchorage between cast-in-place
located (see para 5-8). (Refer to chap 6, para 6-2d, concrete and the precast deck must be provided to
for vertical bracing.) transmit the lateral forces generated from the
e Connections. Connections and anchorages be- weights of the precast units to the cast-in-place
tween the diaphragms and the vertical resisting concrete diaphragm and then to the main lateral
elements will be designed to conform to chapter 8, force resisting system.
paragraphs -3(J)lg, 2d, , and chapter 4, (4) Precastconcrete slab units. If precast units
paragraphs 4-4d(5) and 4-6. are continuously bonded together as shown on fig-
ure 5-9, they may be considered concrete dia-
6-4. Concrete diaphragms. a. General Design phragms and designed accordingly as described
Criterb The criteria used to design concrete dia- hereinbefore. Intermittently bonded precast units
phragms will be ACI 318-77 (except appendix A) as or precast units with grouted shear keys will not be
modified by this paragraph. Concrete diaphragm used as a diaphragm.
webs will be designed as concrete slabs which may EXCEPTION: In Seismic Zone 1 (fig 5-9a),
be designed to support vertical loads between the the use of hollow core planks with grouted
framing members or rest on other vertical load-car- shear keys is permitted. Also the use of con-
rying elements such as precast concrete elements or nectors, in lieu of continuous bonding, for
steel decks. If shear is transferred from the dia- precast concrete members is permitted if the
phragm web to the framing members through steel following considerations and requirements
deck fastenings, the design will conform to the re- are satisfied.
quirements in paragraph 5-6, Steel Deck Dia- (a) Conformance with Prestressed Concrete
phragms. Institute PCI)-Design Handbook seismic
b. Span and Anchorage Requirements. The fol- design requirements.
lowing provisions are intended to prevent dia- (b) Shear forces for diaphragm action can be
phragm buckling. effectively transmitted through the connect-
(1) General Where reinforced concrete slabs are ors. The shear will be uniformly distributed
used as diaphragms to transfer lateral forces, the throughout the depth or length of the dia-
clear distance (LJ between framing members or me. phragm with reasonably spaced connectors
chanical anchors shall not exceed 38 times the total rather than with a few which will have local-
thickness of the slab (t). ized concentration of shear stresses.
(2) Cast-in-place concrete slabs not monolithic (c) Connectors will be designed for at least
with supporting fnming. When concrete slabs are two times the actual shear force.
not monolithic with the supporting framing mem- (d) Detail structural calculations be made
bers (e.g., slabs on steel beams) the slab will be including the localized effects in concrete
anchored by mechanical means at intervals not ex- slabs attributed from these connectors.
ceeding four feet on center along the length of the (e) Sufficient details of connectors and em-
supporting member. This anchorage is not a com- bedded anchorage be provided to preclude
puted item and should be similar to that shown on construction deficiency.
figure 6-7. For composite beams, anchorages pro- (5)Metal formed deck. Concrete slabs that are
vided in accordance with AISC provisions for com- cast by use of metal formed deck shall be governed
posite construction will meet the requirements of by either the requirements of paragraphs (2)above,
this paragraph. *or the requirements of paragraph -6d, Deck with
(3) Cast-in-placeconcrete diaphragmspertically Concrete Fill, depending on the characteristics of
supported by precast concrete slab units. If the slab the metal formed deck.
is not supporting vertical loads but is supported by
other vertical load-carrying elements, mechanical c. Special Reinforcement. Special diagonal rein-
anchorages will be provided at intervals not exceed- forcement will be placed in corners of diaphragms as
ing Sk. Thus, the provisions of (1)above will be sat- idicated in figure 5-10. Typical chord reinforce-
isfied by defining L, as the distance between the pAnt and connection details are shown in figure
mechanical anchorages between the diaphragm slab
and the vertical load-carrying members. This me- d Flexibility Factor. The web stiffness factor F
5-7
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
UTOAT/C44Y N06eD0
7I1Jj W17w G*AULAR
| 4LJX PI44eD fn~
JAACJ A 4'-O" AX.
I
A r 7R4tSfJ
A44 C J#O4.)
; ON CACH 70P
I CHtORD dA*GCE
A/ A
rI*. NL
/3 C7.~ j , .
. .
CA-4 7/N-P44 Ce
JLA S
*~ U
-- 1OWE4J JPACE
Ar 4'- Wo MAX.
-- Pe - CAJr
CONC. AUEM
dOETA JL i_
Figure 5-7. Anchorage of Cast-in-PZace Concrete
Slaba Not MonoZithic with Supporting Framing
i 4
5-8
--r-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-3S5
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
* 2 e /al o.C.*W # /
ELeMEHN-
JECTION A JE6C7ION B
I
F(- P M N
PR8CA$7
b104LOW
Re1NA0.tCEMSNT DP PLANK
PRGCAJr ec..~eNT
SECTION c _
| I
.
JsCTION D
4. .
5-9
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
i m ; Izz6 &
71
oWELS TO
M8rT MANMUM
ARA EuGIAUIn
Aon 84A-
J0 LA N
POURED 3T'*Iiz -
.IM
_. _ n"
*^
I.~~~~~~~~~6
I'
I-*
..
|
P
§
I
I
-4A-A twir
$ E6CLSONd A -A
- l
5-10
-- -------
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
LA ,2 A
P4AN
INTERMIT TINT WULO ~ .~~
iLATU JPACING SAJeD/
ON JE4EM CLCSAIO/
PReCAJT TE0
JECTION A-A
GROUTED JWH&A
I
DO
40
0000 00
aOLLOW CoRe P*tcArr *A Lsea.
JECTION
5-11
TM 5-609-10
NAVFAC P-355
AfM 88-3. Chap. 13
-TJPCAL
7-eMPei A TIh~Qd
TEELL A r0
Of SLAAX. 1--/I
oL At p i
I
_ _I
512
- - -
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
I eNP
WcoN?. cA'O~J *1/N.
A4 JSf ON JitSMIC
CALCUCAMION, 2Z1*5MIM. P-SPANMRE4 JUN.
/ CONr/MNUOfU
7K/I It9lN. hIAY
"-WALL RCIWP, AL JO 4 OMU AS
JO CMAPT, 6 CHO&O R&MN.
SECTION A tXeCTION
iOOW#L.- SIG AND
- (JPAN6 4AJU* ON
, 41/SM/C G6CA4CULA 71
MA.4' f,4Ci
SE CTION C JeCTION 3
w-e-CONT. CHOR& WHO.
., I CONC OPAINa
I t JPACING ASS' ON
1E/JMC CALCU/4ArIOA(
MAX,*'O'"JPAC/44
JE CT ON E JECTION F
5-13
TM5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
(see para 5-2/) will be determined by the following tables 5-2 through 5-4 for roof systems using s
formula: purlins and electrically welded wire mesh.
loll (2) In lieu of tables 5-2 through 5-4, the fo
F 15-3) lowing formula will be used to determine the
8.5tw'Vi -
allowable shear of the diaphragm.
where qD [.16fgtC + LO (kid, i- k2d2a)C2 5-4)
t Thickness of the ab n inches where
w Theweight ofth concrete in pounds per cubic foot.
-
qD m Allowable manimum shear per foot on diaphragm in
Minimum value of w wig be 90 pounds per cubic pounds per linear foot. The one- third increase usu.
foot. ally permitted to working stress in seismic design
f, - The compressive strength of the concrete at 28 Is not applicable.
days in pounds per square inch. fI 3 Oven-dry compressive strength of gypsum in p.as
Diaphragms of this type are in the rigid category of as determined by tests conforming to ASTM
C472-73.
stiffness and are usually limited only by the appro- Cl 1.0 for Cbass A gypsum concrete; 1.5 for Class B
priate deflection limitations. The deflections of this gypsum concrete.
type of diaphragm will be determined using the Cg = 1.4 for Class A gypsum concrete 1.0 for Class B
unfactored loads specified in chapter 3, paragraph gypsum concrete.
3-3. when controlled by the limits indicated in = Thickness of gypsum between subpurlins in inches.
paragraphs 5-2e and f k1- Number of mesh wires per foot passing over
subpurlins.
e. ElectricalRaceways. The placement of electri- di - Diameter of mesh wires passing over subpurlin in
cal raceways in concrete topping slabs may result in inches.
k2 - Number of mesh wires per foot parallel to
the slab being ineffective as a diaphragm. The effect subpurlins.
of the loss of concrete section will be considered. d- Diameter In inches of mesh wires parallel to
Coordination of structural diaphragm slab with elec- subpurlins.
trical plans will be provided. c FlexibilityFactor. The factor F para 5-2* and
5-5. Gypsum daphragms, cast-In-place. f for determination of diaphragm stiffness and de-
a. General Design Criteria. The following criteria flections will be determined by the formula
will be used to design cast-in-place gypsum dia- F = 140 - 1
phragms.
b. Shear Capacity where
(1) The allowable diaphragm shear on poured qD hm allowable shear specified In tables 5-2 through
gypsum concrete diaphragms will be as shown in 5-4 or Formula 5-4 in pounds per foot.
Table 5-2. Shear Valuea of Poured &1ipaunDiaphragme
B 1 1,000 21k" 6x 6
10 - 10
1, 1140
5-14
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P45
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Table -3. Shear on Anchor Bolts and Dowels -
Pio
.
NOTES: *1/3 increase usually permitted on working stresses in seismic
design is not applicable.
See Details A2, A4, and A in Figure 5-12.
I.,
PI
5-15
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
COAAM Q4ErE? E 4i
.
l 'I,
*- Onr¶rUbW.Lc
QDo1aLzg>ar
O6MI A?
li/
-- 4-
riusseD OL 0
000WO qYSL4t1 4USSSO reE Jus-
ROD O0"t. AWUV - AOw
'4 DORcavD 4 ew#
cowesrs-;Wc
Kls 5 4a Msso M
.
ac ~ri
Si a-, M. ft~V
I r-
MnM~m
-SU6
I ocft
OUf-W. 1
^#Dk- W r"/
C .
~i (a're~ n2meb fl4 S4:m9E
S re)
DE1T/ A4
7au*sev resDoaE
AnC 7'01 A 2
ROD o Jr '9, MLOEDf W
SZOS tO
Df.JrIc O l
sr r/ME s
:O..
DE aI M ll s or it" SIM .
:O;
5-16
AFM EAVFAC P-3 ,s8
Chap.
AF 8-,
9,7
S-17
TM -S-0S10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 83. Chap. 13
REQUIRED
44 . AS REQUIRED
O'j'4 Wm Sfmz Alar
'?' erwt c wilt
D6 TM/ A
AS REQUIRED
.04fdAACY at e'opl. Swat
1 6
DErrL A
Sheaf PA'r/r/ON
$-i
- -
TM 5409-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
This indicates that the diaphragm will be in the ID -Gross moment of inertia of deck unit about
semi-rigid category, however the span-depth and vertical centerline axis through unit in inches to
span limitations of the semi-flexible diaphragm the fourth power.
ix -Gross moment of inertia of deck unit about the
should be used for this type of diaphragm. horizontal neutral axis of the deck cros-section
d Typical Details. Refer to figures 6-12, 5-13, per foot of width in inches to the fourth power.
Li Distance in feet between vertical resisting
and 5-14. element (such as shear walli and the point to
which the deflection is to be determined.
64. Steel Dock Diaphragms (Single and Mul- L2 e-Average length of each deck unit I feet.
tiple Sheet Decks). a. General Design Cteria. 1.- =Length of edge lip on deck panel in inches (ee
The following criteria will be used to design steel Detail G in fig 6-151.
deck diaphragms. Three general categories of steel Lit Distance in feet between shear transfer
deck diaphragms are Type A (para 6-6b), Type B elements.
Lv -Vertical load span of deck units in feet.
(para -6c), and Decks with Concrete Fill (para 1 Minimum length In inches of seam weld.
5-6d). 1 Effective length in Inches of seam weld. The
(1) Typical deck uits and fastenings. The deck
ratio of for the various types of seam welds is
units will be composed of a single fluted sheet or a
combination of two or more sheets fastened to- given in figure 6-15.
gether with resistance welds. The special attach- n =Averagenumber of vertical deck elements per
foot which are laterally restrained at the bottom
ments used for field attachments of steel decks are by puddle welds.
shown in figure 5-16. In addition to those shown, qD -Working shear in pounds per foot. The onethird
standard fillet (18 inch X inch) and butt welds are increase usually permitted on working stresses
also used. The depth of deck units shall not be less is not applicable to this value.
than 1-112 inches. qq-. . - iComponents or limiting values of working shear
12) Definitions of special symbols Definitions in pounds per foot.
q," *Average shear in diaphragm over length L In
of the special symbols used in the determination of pounds per foot.
the working shears and flexibility of steel deck dia- R V
phragms are as follows:
S Section modulusin feet of puddle weld group at
a - Number of seam attachments In span along a supports. (Each weld assumed as unit area.1
seam. t Thickness of flat sheet elements In Inches (22
T
aP = Average spacing of profile channel closures. In gage minimum).
feet. t2 -Thickness of fluted element in inches 22 gage
minimlum).
as - Center to center pacing of seam welds In feet.
Usually LIa. tj Effective thickness of fluted elements in Inches.
a,,- Spacing of marginal welds in feet. 9;
b - Width of deck unit in feet.
See figure 5-16 for ratio of A.
Cl I t, - Thickness of closure element in Inches.
C2 -I for button-punched seams; 40ts1 1 1, for welded tt -Thickness of fill over top of deck in inches.
seams. t Thickness in Inches of deck sheet at seams.
Cs - 1 for button-punched seams; 10t.1,, for welded
w =Unit weight of fill concrete in pounds per ubic
seams. foot.
6 (3) Connections at ends and at supporting
C4 I1 for button-punched seams; L for welded beams. Refer to Type A and Type B details, para-
seams.
Cs - 1.2 for continuous angle closure; I for graphs 6-6b and -6c.
(4) Connections at marginal supports. Marginal
1.44
continuous ee osure; ap for rofile channel welds for all types of steel deck diaphragms will be
closure. spaced as follows:
d Distance in feet between outermost puddle
welds attaching a deck unit to the supporting aw3SOt X+t) Cl 'or puddle ields. (5-6)
framing member.
F 1.F2... -Components contributing to the flexibility a,1-M l; for fillet welds and seam wds. (5-7)
q
factor F F - FS). See paragraph -2f.
f, - Compressive strength of fill concrete at 28 days In no case will the spacing be greater than feet.
In pounds per square inch. See figures 5-16 and 5-26.
h - Height of fluted elements In Inches 1-1)2 Inch ,k" (5) Non-welded fasteners. Fastening methods
minimum). iboher than welds, such as self drilling fasteners, may
5-19
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
be used provided that equivalence to the welded limited to that determined by the following
method can be shown by approved test data. The re- mulas
sults of such test data will be presented by means of
equations or tables for qD and F in a manner similar qDulq 1+qs where lbs C1 but qD is not to
to that used in paragraphs 5-6b, 5-6r and 5-6d '
!A2&
exed I x108
EXCEPTION: The option to fasten steel deck
by powder actuated or pneumatically driven 1s4AApplie only when
fasteners will be limited to Setsmic Zone Na 1 1.< inch, refer to
and to areas with a wind velocity of less than 1.i jf HFz+F+V~) DotalG In Bs -15)
100 mph.
(5-11)
(6) Maximum effective thicknesses and weld
lengths Even though greater thicknesses and weld WheeK-
lengths may be installed, the maximum values for 1.000
use in determining the working shears In each type
of diaphragm will be as follows: I I(t1+t)ti +loon,%g a ii
ill~a Vh-7V +Ca)J
t ts an to - .060 Inch
te = .075inch
1= 2Inches (5-13)
360t0t~, P+
(7) Thickness of steeL The thickness of steel be q2= -1;-
fore coating with paint or galvanizing shall be in ac- (5-14)
cordance with following table. The thickness of the
uncoated steel shall not at any location be less than (2) lexibility factor. The flexibility factor, F.
95% of the design thickness. will be determined by the following formuln
Design Mhaimum F-F+F+F
Gage ickness Thickness
22 0.0295 0.028 Where
20 0.0358 0.034
18 0.0474 0.045 12(tl+t(b
16 0.0698 0.057
F, b L[C 6
FX<160 4 D
+ ]q
LvdS(tt+V~ lq
(5-17)
b. Type A Diaphragms-Decks Having Shear
Transfer Elements Directly Attached to Framing. Fs- L.,t 12.6UZC1Za 6-8
Multiple plate steel decks with the flat element ad-
jacent to framing members and single plate steel
decks fall into this category of diaphragms when The flexibility of these diaphragms will vary within
each deck unit is attached to the framing by at least a wide range. Arrangements can be used which fall
2 puddle welds as described on figure 5-15. t 1 , t2 , to into the semi-rigid, semi-flexible, and flexible cate-
will not be less than 22 U.S. Standard gage. Seam gories.
attachments will be made at least at midspan of L, (3) Sample calculationsand tables. A summary
but the spacing of attachments between supports of allowable shear (qd)and flexibility factors (F)for
will not exceed 3 feet on center. Typical details of some of the more common cross-sections is shown in
Type A diaphragms and attachments are shown In figure 5-19 and figure 5-20. Sample calculations
figures 5-16, 5-17, and 5-18. using the formulas for these cross-sections are given
EXCEPTION to 22 gage limitation: 22 gage is in figures 5-21 through 5-25.
the minimum thickness unless cross bracing is c. Type B Diaphragms-Decks Having an El.-
used to take lateral loads. However, an excep- vated Plane of Shear Transfer. Multiple steel decks
tion in Seismic Zone No. 1, for pre-engineered with fluted elements adjacent to framing members
metal buildings with diaphragms less than 22 ,and single plate steel decks with fluted elements in-
gage, requires that load tests be submitted for 4.capable of being welded to framing with at least two
evaluation and approval. -' puddle welds per unit fall Into this category of
phragm. This type of diaphragm has only w
(1) Shear capacity. The working shear will be seam attachments. TIe units will be compos7
5-20
---
TM 5-609-10
NAVFAC PUS
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
5-21
TM 5-09-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
S-22
AAW
4rw
AS ' C A
6itV
A Diapkrag8
DaGmofTPe
* $teeZ LAoa Open-.Web *Jogt
etai
Typj~~4 0 ~
TM 5-809-1 0
NAVFAC P355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
d A /t P.eo
df, s-I
d1 . di.N'jk
AS REQUIRED
-th4fO dust
, AS REQUIRED
M44WIfyo f edM. wigl
Deduct A
RaM/
II
Elead. . ;A.' ' .10
q-
_ MAfOo chof
AS REQUIRED
60VAV-)VWO me10
AS REQUIRED
IA.fdje Cary OR t.A/. will
TA SV6.41 S4
6-24
- - -
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P3SS
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
::
Z'e0
- 0o a370 .920 .290 60 20
5^ z6,RMOM r07R 9f.9 _ 0.4j 7.4R 64i3
174+
13_40 1280- 23418. 0+Ie/o~ 23+2k. .S+
e .
22
~~~~~__
_
.6
t 6s~~~.90 e2A
280
_:1.7
15J16
240o 16_ jo
9IE. 87-*9
.. 260
a1g
YR lug
720
/2Y /tO 1430 1960 o670 7P0 720
2 7./* 6./4 7.3tw 8. 2+ /*G
18 ? 720
e 990- 40 7. 0 d0i 6 20
f 141 7. I ,S.6 to + 4 *q7J15.4le
Po 700 .- 40 -70 410 840 J20 290
_~ii 20 e _ 1 . 28 +, 6+.
___940 0 e49040 ~
XF5
# , 1;: tk~f a I tf 9 94.t
2* 0 3*G. deo
-*4 40
5.02.f
7 42 710 708 + 450
&.0
J-Ir-v &" _
-1j3 SWi %0 F> ss.°ss - 1$;
.5..........0c
g~qS
X67+^2
tlO .90 4 5,
£5, 52 40 5.0
460
JUV~~tVL_ 20?85 .. 84, 7.64, M.B
Z1. 6. 94-
,,VI
5-25
I
il
ob
-SC TrIOJJ
5eczo J WO
EJJ s &,U
Y~g
|G-
Q4 e
1
ssER _ S 0
SPShI (Lv)
PA U(J
0
ti'9o>o
~w70 J00810
fl3
(A
4.. 3u % 1180 90 81070 C30 $70 520 j460 420
O480
.1 -6.2+ 7.4* e.7 9.94 " /3 14 + t 7+
lo*~~
nl4I3- L S =*c _
e 1$97
S
3.6.
4 .62
-s+ 5.2 + .0* - 80O
8.0+ .0 .* *1tf
.Z5R 197RZ .75R .57R. .43JC .IR
.1 2
4.21R
2t0o - ?~ ZaZO 940 800 90 C2O 560 1/0 4 70 -40 f/0
-%IS 5C C.7a+ 7.8+ .9 + '.111 12 + 1 .15-
.84R 3.872 .22R Z.77R 242?R VZR 1.94 1.74R I.CIR 149
1 /a50/230 Jonso 900 800 720 C60 4G/0 570 30
. _3.8+. 4..7 G. 7.7I8d&v
. 9.9W 1 * 1 13
- _______
- - 4. .232 2.649 2.312 2.02j /.80R 1.C.1 1.472 t.35R 1.24
~4 b
b :tSji
'ai Wl
( ( (
-
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-55
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
IC-
Ih ltaa
{Toa.a eaa
6 .2' h-f.SS
Lv&0'-o avle
3400 Es a C
Lv C, aC&a C5a C.$- I
A: r
,0oo' _ 3=a
. Z5
{It 1 92
wi00ff(.-
I
C I
it.J
to (X1844
68.4). 95 240
10
Rx e 2IS/06 ,:SO) 240 O.kP
n I %0
2.+.e °J Figwure 5-21. SteeZ
IOX.006=
7- Deck Daphragm Type A -
f- .J52 ,25.9+o4r 26.2 +4R Sample CalcuZatin No. 1
(JEC PIGURE 5-1q: Lv- 10', 205G.)
6-27
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
IX .. = 7t8 =*S
.?
5-28
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
b 2' h.5a
9z 7 coo
ilr 561.Iw)
O''risS
To* S2a47 a r92$2S
I
C,aC ,C SI^
z? gx4P-9 90
~= °°.P~v.
=920 9=
y sr
2a BX.0c0%
. {920 5 /9.O = 79.C
5-29
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM88-3. Chap. 13
SAALPL CA LC5s. J.Jo.4 poZ rEPC9
A D1APAMP.AA '*6
|~~ ! lo2(
_JO
~
x (4
4)7
A3 t .5
I1 Qz 30L6
D|
PIIAT
2 92~J.Sx.04dMx79d.0 9 9 f2 i06'/4, 1'Wm~ocno
T-AA7 - P 8 . a.
. ^ 66' SXJD
a
C-All) W&LDS~~dj
We6L(-)
'12X.048 x049
7c 4 4/s$J.
5-30
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P4-5
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
_s
'tx929 P/t92C/.07 . t °
RA10'
i-(47.5+84.4)1.0 wCS9.G
tL.LLQU 2SSI
o 1f70) 59.4 g
to g0 £- 2O: Lv
(FIGURE 10'I I C',16oa)
Ex lot'
X>,
= Z2=t. 077
f x2^°t(8.4) 4 x=9J.0
:V
541
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chop. 13
sheets not less than 20 U.S. Standard gage. Seam 5-4. Typical attachment details are shown in fig
attachment spacing will not exceed 3 feet on center. 5-29, Details A and B.
Typical details of Type B diaphragms and attach- 12) Steel deck as a diaphragm
ments are shown in figures 5-26 through 5-28. (a) Shear capacity. If the diaphragm shears
(1) Shear capacity. The working shear will be pass through the deck and its attachments, the
limited to that determined by the following for- working shear will be determined by the following
mulas: formulas:
qD = or qua whichever is the lesser, but
q3 . q4 .
not to exceed 1.050 pounds per foot. 15-19) (5-27)
5-32
TM 6809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
gVrMIMNF7Lrr Ks
ONE EAc> wAir
-
&VO CONNECTJON 70 .UPPORTNG &EAMS
- Ashy Ateur By
Wx AW&ZWr1 eVA
&
.34 ,.c. #72QXh n .
SPACE AS REQUIRED BY
FORMULA 5-7.
5-33
TM -S0910
AVFAC P5
AFM 63, Chap. 13
h *GAGE OS AN4L.
.SCAM ArTTCwMNr 4
I'LONGelr..
S&5 PI6AE 5-/S
COTINUO(JS ANGLE
ELErtMENT
\ / ~~~~~RIt£^D
DLfa/ a
CON rINUOS ANAL SEAR rRANSPER LEMaN
IMs&
;StiSpC
DE N/1 6
CovrMWOU sbc-A JoIAr
(see FaJu*qe g-g8 c o3S s
po Cro")
Figure 5-27. Stee Deck Diaphragm - ypical Attachment
of Shear ranafer EZemente for 2Vpe B Diaphragms
:. I
5-34
-
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM M3., Chop. 13.
TA {L C
-
SPLICE 'AT SUPPORT
Figure -28. Steel Deck Diaphmgms - fpi caZ Detaits Type B Diaphragms
.1
J
6-35
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
DCOWELS-
lz MtCAD
Smvcs TO C, it
{ UNFER $9Smtw~o ISM XI/NW
CUO&PD
TYPICAL4
I ' If
(GrE'EL DIC
II FOR DECK.TO BEAM
CONNECTION SEE
----- ' FIGURE 5-16
X~~~ _W? , e cowcr/mv
CCOAC. OR MASoAIRY WALL-TYPICAL
NoTE: POR jUeE ACIZ6/-77,PARA./ 2.2
DETA/L A DETAIL B
FLoOm mryT bhecr 01404Q4 r- oa awrf D"CrWom~
cavvVec ro(t To iLL coe.vcrlav To W.OL
sce
ses res
"71 or
q see &Vres
DmT _
OECX CxCI
41/iaes
FOR DECK TO SUPPORT
CONNECTION SEE
FIGURE 5-16
06 TIL C Q6TA !L Q-
ROOf w.TM DI/A4/IAG CO WECn ROW* MTA PDA41e1A
TImeaAZ/ DeCx ro W#L %V rsearav
CONMcnC
DeCx roh
NOTE: WHEN DECKS ARE ATTACHED AT ALL SHEAR TRANSFER POINTS
SIMILAR TO DETAILS A AND B. THE DIAPHRAGMS WILL BE
DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 5-4, CONCRETE
DIAPHRAGMS. WHEN SHEAR TRANSFER IS THROUGH THE
WELDS BETWEEN THE STEEL DECK AND FRAMING, THE
DIAPHRAGM WILL BE DESIGNED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
PARAGRAPH 5-6c(2), FORMULAS 5-27 and 5-32.
5-36
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
.~~~~~~~~r /- l 6 .R6OZQtO
- 2E 2D
OM2 9KeI2
*40
a,/0 280 2wo 2420 23/0 2VO
Oil
_ _ __ __ _ __ _ _ _ [yJ
; (
or&s:
I. 4 eurrov PJCH E'J4"o.C.
2. r16 G AG&S f:*OR dCJULr7P2.& 3H&CV /&CXS ARC-,OC6S1CAI-
A7&D wlV rH6 .AG 7 C- OF- HM66 /ZA7r -3NC-&rP-1sRSV
Ah/f- r-2UVCD TH6*Cr J6-COAJt
3. 1OCC SGCr70LJS ARC- A /)- PROM QhALVAJJ1Z&- SHC-C-TS
4. SOJJD WC-JZ3S COAJ8ISrOf- 3 PIf)PLc- WC-(nS ATCAC SUPPoRTr
6-37
TM 5-09-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
% gs b6 to KXs RIQ00
IG-la GAQiG& Mu.rPL&
PLATC W-CK wIr 2/
COlJC. PILL. 3C-JC) WC-LIr3
200 #a2.S
vCXuZ
Kb t, -. ~ tas % x.048 .032"
92 AW.92 (, + .032)LOOO
J 1.2 MD . 9.
,, .03
2.v 45 3 W st.9 1. 62' hot.
d.I.92S ZY0
4e2
V,.17( 0 2 0*t2) 2Z. - W8I45PCP. 01
3.40PSI1
2o 1354.2 + 11 ,C + 212.8 a27-
(% 260 IN FfIGURE 530 fOP 4. C, AND GAGE /tI)
b20
? 2 212.6D5*80)
LF-- 2 76O, £T-ePG~~ .
fAy 3 8
S-38
TM 640-10
NAVFAC P-35
AFM a-, Chap. 13
table 5-5. Fxibiity and Addoace Shears
ALLOWABLE SHEAR
HORIZONTAL DIAPHRAGMS- F Lbs. /Lin.Ft. (qD)
NOTE: THE ALLOWABLE SHEARS SOWN IN TABLE ARE BASIC VALUES TO WHICH THE
i' FACTORS FOR SPECIES SHOWN IN FIGURE 6-13 WILL BE APPLIED.
el9
5-3
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
and will be considered a very flexible diaphragm. blocking, which serve to transfer the assumed -
They will not be used for laterally supporting ma- to the sheathing.
sonry, concrete, or other walls which would be 3. Special diagonally sheathed diaphrani
seriously affected by high floor to floor deflection. may be used to resist shears, due to seismic forces,
(2) Diagonal sheathing. The one-third increase provided such shears do not stress the nails beyond
usually permitted on working stresses in seismic de- their allowable safe lateral strength and do not ex-
sign is not applicable to the working shears given in ceed 600 pounds per lineal foot of width. For
this subparagraph. approximating deflections, a value of F of 75 will be
(a)1 Conventional construction. These dia- used. Thus they fit into the category of flexible dia-
phragms will be made up of 1-inch nominal sheath- phragms.
ing boards laid at an angle of approximately 45 (3) Plywood sheathing
degrees to supports. Sheathing boards will be di- (a) All boundary members will be propor-
rectly nailed to each intermediate bearing member tioned and spliced where necessary to transmit
with not less than two 8d nails for one-inch by six- direct stresses. Framing members will be at least a
inch (1X6) boards and three 8d nails for boards 2-inch nominal width. In generaL panel edges will
eight inches (8') or wider, and in addition three 8d bear on the framing members and butt along their
nails and four 8d nails will be used for six-inch (8 center lines. Nails will be placed not less than three-
and eight-inch (8W) boards, respectively, at the dia- eighths inch 3/8) in from the panel edge, not more
phragm boundaries. End joints in adjacent boards than twelve inches (12-) apart along intermediate
will be separated by at least two joist or stud supports and six inches (6W) along panel edge-
spaces, and there will be at least two boards be. bearings, and will be firmly driven into the framing
tween joints on the same support. Boundary mem- members. No unblocked panels less than twelve
bers at edges of diaphragms will be designed to re inches (12Wwide will be used.
sist direct tensile or compressive chord stresses and (b The stiffness of plywood diaphragm webs
will be adequately tied together at corners. varies with the thickness of plywood, nailing, and
1. Conventional wood diaphragms may be the joint blocking. These variables also occur in the
used to resist shears not exceeding 300 pounds per determination of the working shear values of the
lineal foot of width. Two-inch (2') nominal diago- diaphragm. An F value for determining the sti l
nally sheathed diaphragms may be used with a category and for estimating deflections .
maximum design shear of 400 pounds per lineal foot determined using the following formula.
if 16d common nails are used in lieu of the 8d nails 33,0004 av (5-33)
specified for 1inch nominal sheathing. qD
2. This category of diaphragms has a value Where
of F of approximately 250 and will be considered as
qD Allowable shear specified in table 5-6 in pounds per
very flexible diaphragms and will not be used to lat- foot.
erally support masonry or concrete walls.
(b) Specialconstruction (ci For plywood diaphragms the tabular
1. Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms values of qD vary between 110 pounds per foot to
will include two adjoining layers of 1 inch nominal 820 pounds per foot. From this, the value of F can be
sheathing boards laid diagonally and at 90 degrees determined as varying between 300 and 20. Thus,
to each other. plywood diaphragms can be very flexible, flexible,
2. Special diagonally sheathed diaphragms or semi-flexible diaphragms depending on the selec-
also include single-layered diaphragms, conforming tion of the type of diaphragm to be used.
to conventional construction and which, in addition, (dJ Nailing. Pneumatically or mechanically
will have all elements designed in conformance with driven steel wire staples with a minimum crown
the following provision: Each chord or portion width of 7/16 inch is an acceptable alternate method
thereof may be considered as a beam loaded with a of attaching diaphragms. The crown of the staple
uniform load per foot equal to 50 percent of the unit will be installed parallel to the framing member.
shear due to diaphragm action. The load will be as-
sumed as acting normal to the chord in the plane of Common Minimum staplepenetration
the diaphragm and either toward or away from the -I wire nail Staple in framing member
diaphragm. The span of the chord, or portion ;. 6d No. 14 gage 1 inch
thereof, will be the distance between structural 8d No. 13 gage I inch
members of the diaphragm, such as joists or lOd No. 12 gage 1-118 inch
5-40
( (
Tabe 5-6.
R mended Shear In Pounds per Foot for Horizontal Plywood Diaphragms with Framing of Douglas Fir. Lurch or Southern Pine (a)
for Wind or Seismic Loading
Blocked Diaphr Unblocked Diaphragms
0 Nail Spacnr (in.) at diaphragm
boda ries (all cases), at con- Nails Spaced 6 Max. at
tinuous panel edges paraflel to Supported Edges fbl
CI
Common Mm al Mnmm M.~load (Case3 841 and at all
Grade Gra* Common~~~~~in
Nail P netaion
Penetration Minium
Plywood d
of F~mtn
MinFramin panel edges (Cain S h 61 lb)
6(Not Ca 1p
Case I All Other
Size in Framing Thickness M ber 6 4 2 2 (No Unbloed Confl tions
(inchel (inch) Nail spacing (in.) at other plywood Cotnsr(
panel edges. (Ca 1. 2. 3&4 loints Parallel 2 3.
SC 6 6 4 3 to Loadt
1-1/4 5/16 2 185s 250 375 420 165 125
STRUCTURALI 6d 1./ /63 210 280 420 475 185 140
STRUCTURAt I_
-A C-D INT-APA or 2 270 360 530 600 240 180
STRUCTURAL I 8d I.1 2 18 3 300 400 600 673 265 200
0t's
noI C-C EXT-APA 2 320 42S 640 ( 730(c) 285 21S
lOdi I.5/8 1/2 3 360 480 720 820 320 240
-'. . 5'16 2 170 225 -335 380 IS0 110
3 190 250 380 430 170 125
6d 1.1/4 2 185 250 375 420 165 125
3/8 3 210 280 420 47S 185 140
C-D INT-APA_
STRUCTURAL 11 2 240 320 480 545 215 160
0C4 C-D INT.APA. 38 3 270 360 540 610 240 180
STRUCTURAL If 8d 1-1/2 - - ____270
610 1 240 too
C-C EXT-APA, 1/2 2 270 360 530 600 240 180
CO and other APA grades 3 300 400 600 675 265 200
except Species Group 5
2 290 385 575 c) 6551c) 255 190
1/2 .1 325 430 650 735 290 215
lOd 1-5/8 -
518 2 320 425 640 c) 730(c) 285 215
1 360 480 720 820 320 240
(a)For framing other species: (I) Find species group of lumber in Table 8.1 A. NFPA (c) Reducetabulated allowable shears 1O percent when boundary members provide
1977 Nat'l Design Spec. 2) Find shear value rom table for nail size. and for lessthan 3-inch nominal nailingsurface.
Structural plywood (regardless of actual grade). 3) Multiply value by 0.82 or Notes: Design for diaphragm stresses depends on direction of continuous panel joints
Lumber Group III or 0.65 (or Lumber Group IV, with reference to load not on direction of long dimensions of plywood sheet.
(b)Space nails 12 in. on center along intermediate framing members or roofs, and Continuous framing may be in either direction for blocked diaphragms.
10 inches on center for floors..
02
CD Z
CD 0
Os
n
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
b. Typical Details. Refer to figures 5-32 through adequate means of resisting any given load
5-35. seismic purposes, when the damage to a spy
truss, column. or other member could cause com-
plete failure, multiple systems are generally used.
5-8. Horizontal bracing (wood or steel). For example, if one truss is damaged, these braces
a. GeneralDesign Citeria The criteria used to de-
sign horizontal steel bracing will be the "Specifica- would pick up its load sufficiently to prevent com-
tion for the Design, Fabrication. and Erection of plete collapse.
Structural Steel for Buildings," AISC. The criteria (2) Functions of roof and floor bracing. Te
basic functions of roof or floor bracing are to: (a)
for wood bracing will be "National Design Speci-
fication for Wood Construction." Reference should keep the top (compression) chords of trusses (or
frames) from buckling laterally, b) prevent trusses
be made to chapter 3, paragraphs 3-3(J)lg and
3-3(J)2d; paragraphs 5-2a(2) and 5-3d; and chapter from tipping over, (c) steady the columns, and d)
trwnsmit the lateral forces to the vertical bracing
S. paragraph 6-7, where applicable. system.
5. GeneralDiscussion (3) Connection& lieu of developing the full
(1) Generalsystena The entire system must be capacity of the member or part concerned, the con-
as simple, direct, positive, and effective as practica- nections will be designed for 1.25 times the design
ble. Although it is ordinarily preferable in nonsels force without the one-third increase usually permit-
mic design to have one definite, predetermined, and ted.
n2d.ft -
4. ZZ. -MM."IM."R.
1,
I?
5-42
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
j7.
6-4
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
SAC# r eVr^ A
swrtANO to sr os e ZS asr =VSWft '
wgrocot 0 fcu Irvo
$AO owl 7L JUOD DAOeMMJ i's~~~~~~
Arh Z
Am" T-_
t
4tor~~~t .ag. tJ *O rS
&C<11h4
smcrmnxw
.wrf
1 mu" to jot V
) covrv s
m $aOasou sn sS m w
ir~fe ^ores f *om ctn
S£c rloAI AO or stlef t c a la" cn
twer
ASeMr
{E9( e"
&0C411 so
&WWV res dc"Al
acE Sim ^4)JJ
- - - : - USE 5*
f.msenc^
~
-PDw M
4C*
S4E
4**o*.g. tm L4XA *{t
I S nr. . W~~ _ -
secroev c-
-
SfcT/oN D swim
m co
EEI I-
4A"^V4 iwat
aft, LI
1.# Ja
,mJ$Ar~f* W47
$,E( ung tI E I W *1 _
-4-
JOlTl ANCUoAIO! fl
1SEC'MA MA ON
MAIOPVAY (AIrJ A AS
WA L.
1
'w,
,
I
,}-,
w
.
-r -ri
.. . .
s ifc rs to_
ONG6J. ALK16
G0xJO
secri tON J'ECTIQN H
?Xwg 5-55. MOd mphuP"uaw Tpimt Conmotion Dtaiti
S44
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
5-45
TM S-09-10
NAVFAC P-55
AFM 63, Chap. 13
OAPf4RA4'$
/ StroW ai v
3 AMxAL Wl/,
4cOrs
SECTIOJ A SCcTiOAI A
S1
, jo/sr JOeosr
AMOM AUCR
+9
AIS AM OS SV co TAILS MIL U
USIGM TO USll t USCI5KD SZSNIC
lUU AM hAL AIICUO . r CmaC
?lNS wLLa U lIDIU NIe vuin UCISI
x WS* or NW sum
* * I
3-16 d-
NAJLS P 'Ii
Figure 5-35. Woo Di whraga -
PLAP E TWical Details of
TOP LAT LAPr QQRVM Conneotions to SteeZ Frcme
5-46
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
CHAPTER 6
WALLS AND BRACED FRAMES
6-1. Purpose and scope. This chapter pre- lel to the wall is classified as nonstructural. A
scribes the criteria for the design of walls and nonstructural wall shall be able to resist horizontal
vertical bracing of buildings for seismic resistance; wind or seismic forces normal to the wall. Noniso-
indicates the principles and factors governing the lated walls will obviously participate in shear
application of horizontal forces normal to the plane resistance to horizontal forces parallel to the wall,
of walls, parallel to the plane of walls (shear walls), since they tend to deflect and be stressed when the
and parallel to the plane of braced frames; gives cer- framework or horizontal diaphragms deform under
tain design data; and illustrates typical details of lateral forces.
construction. b. Loads Normal to Walls. Walls and partitions
6-2. General. Buildings are composed of vertical must safely resist horizontal seismic forces normal
and horizontal structural elements which resist lat- to their flat surface (figs 6-1 and 6-3 and fig 4-5);
eral forces. The forces originating from the mass of and moments and shears induced by relative
vertical elements may be transferred either directly deflections of the diaphragms above and below (fig
to the ground, as in the case of vertical cantilevers, 6-2). For diaphragm deflections refer to chapter 5.
or to horizontal resisting elements other than the When a wall resists horizontal forces perpendicular
ground through vertical beam action of the vertical to it, it usually distributes such loads vertically to
elements. The forces originating from the mass the horizontal resisting elements above or below. It
tributary to horizontal elements are distributed by may also distribute horizontally to shear walls or
such horizontal elements to vertical elements which frames (chap 4, para 4-4d and fig 4-5). A wall may
in turn transmit such forces to the ground. Vertical be either continuous or discontinuous across its sup-
elements used to transfer lateral forces to the ports. The horizontal seismic force normal to a wall
ground are: (1)shear walls, (2) braced frames, and (3) is a function of its weight. The formula given in
moment resisting frames. This paragraph covers chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(G), for the magnitude of
basic functions, essential characteristics, and seis- this force is F = ZICpW, with Cp = 0.30. (For
mic loads for walls (loaded normal and parallel to cantilevered walls, see paragraph c below.) This
their plane) and braced frames. Specific factors, cri- seismic force will be applied to the wall in both in-
teria, and typical details of design of walls and ward and outward directions. However, wind forces,
braced frames using various materials of construc- other forces, or interstory drift will frequently gov-
tion are described in paragraphs 6-3 through 6-8. ern the design.
Moment resisting frames are covered in chapter 7. c. Cantilevered Walls. Where walls, such as para-
a. Types of Walls and Loading Conditions. Walls pets, are cantilevered, the anchorage for reaction
may be subjected to both vertical (gravity) and hori- and cantilever moment is required to be fully devel-
zontal (wind or earthquake) forces. A wall carrying a oped (fig 6-3). Cp for this condition is 0.80 per
vertical load other than its own weight is called a chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(G) and table 3-4. Where a
bearing wall. The horizontal forces acting on a wall parapet wall is anchored to a concrete roof slab and
may be either normal to the wall or parallel to the is not a continuation of a wall below, the roof slab
wall. A shear wall resists horizontal forces parallel will be designed for the cantilever moment. Where
to the wall. Any wall or partition which carries a ver- the parapet is a continuation of a wall below, the
tical load other than its own weight, and/or. which cantilever moment will be divided between the con-
resists a horizontal force parallel to the wall, is crete slab and the wall below in proportion to their
classified as a structural wall. The combined effects relative stiffnesses. Where the parapet is an exten-
of horizontal forces and vertical load on a wall must sion of a wall below and is anchored to a roof or floor
be considered. Walls and partitions must be de- of wood, metal deck, or other similar materials, the
signed to withstand all vertical loads and horizontal moment at the base of the parapet will be developed
forces, both parallel to and normal to the flat into the wall below. In this case the anchorage force
surface, with due allowance for the effect of any ec- to the roof will be determined by the usual methods
centric loading or overturning forces generated. 6f.analysis, assuming a pinned condition for the con-
Any wall which is isolated on 3 sides (both ends and nection of the roof to the wall.
top) so as not to resist external loads or forces paral- d. Shear Wall-Loads Parallel to Wall.
6-1
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AfM 88-3. Chap. 13
t
WY &ISP4ACMON?
_,,t r 1hI31APgRAGM
8srweN srottfs,umir
amhar ro
PIN
P,2.veNr exc$isve
IN WAfI?
---- T
, q,
_ , a P (1 .J up *j
aV.
gv§t
(~~~~~
w=-- ' _L
I
f z'CpW' O. Frw Fig 6-2. Defleatione
(:3eS6N WAL.C POt .O4CQS IN Induced by Rewative
OPPOSITG J/UCT/ON ASO) Deftectiona of
ROPOR M CHAPT6t 3 PA/?GRAPH
3-3 (6) AHNO ?A4 34 Diaphragms (Refer
to Chapter 5)
Figure 6-1. Load fofbat to WaLL
f: M C . 08 aIwp
I3SJON
(C AR4PET FO I.
FORCOs IN OPPOSIrd 0.
01CTlON A(.$o) I 0
M a,e f2hw¢q
ippeq To cwAPrs .
PARAG4AP 3(6) Li AS
AMAJ T4UO 3-4
Figure -3. ParapetLoading
:.;
6-2
---------
TM 5-809- 10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Horizontal forces at any floor or roof level are gener- ever, the rotational influence on relative rigidities of
ally transferred to the ground foundation) by using walls for purposes of horizontal force distribution
the strength and rigidity of shear walls (and parti- may not be as significant. Considering the complex-
tions). A shear wall may be considered analogous to ities of soil behavior, a quantitative evaluation of
a cantilever plate girder standing on end in a verti- the foundation rotation is generally not practical,
cal plane where the wall performs the function of a but a qualitative evaluation, recognizing the limita-
plate girder web, the pilasters or floor diaphragms tions and using good judgment, will be provided.
function as web stiffeners, and the integral rein- (b) The relative rigidity of concrete or unit
forcement of the vertical boundaries function as masonry walls with normal openings is usually
flanges. Axial, flexural, and shear forces must be much greater than that of any building framework.
considered in the design of shear walls. The tensile Thus, the walls tend to resist essentially all or a ma-
forces on shear wall elements resulting from the jor part of the lateral force.
combination of seismic uplift forces and seismic (2) Shear wall with openings. The impact on the
overturning moments must be resisted by anchor- size and number of openings in shear walls to resist
age into the foundation medium unless they can be lateral forces must be considered. If openings are
overcome by gravity loads (e.g., 0.9 of dead load) very small, their effect on the overall state of stress
mobilized from neighboring elements (this is dis- in a shear wall is minor. Large openings have a more
cussed more fully in chap 4, para 4-4b, 4-4c(2), and pronounced effect and, if large enough, result in a
4-8). A shear wall may be constructed of materials system in which typical frame action predominates.
such as concrete, wood, unit masonry, or metal in Openings normally occur in regularly spaced verti-
various forms. Working stresses of such materials cal rows throughout the height of the wall and the
as cast-in-place reinforced concrete and reinforced connection between the wall sections is provided by
unit-masonry are well known and present no prob- either connecting beams (or spandrels) which form a
lem to the designer once the loading and reaction part of the wall, or floor slabs, or a combination of
system is determined. Other materials frequently both. If the openings do not line up vertically and/or
used to support vertical loads from floors and roofs horizontally, the complexity of the analysis is
have well-established vertical load-carrying charac- greatly increased. In most cases, a rigorous analysis
teristics but have required tests to demonstrate of a wall with openings is not required. When de-
their ability to resist lateral forces. Various types of signing a wall with openings, the deformations must
wood sheathing and metal siding fall into this cate- be visualized in order to establish some approximate
gory. Where a shear wall is made up of units such as method to analyze the stress distribution to the
plywood, gypsum wallboard, tilt-up concrete units, wall. Figures 6-4 and 6-5 give some visual descrip-
or metal panel units, its characteristics are, to a tions of such deformations. The major points that
large degree, dependent upon the attachments of need to be considered are: (1) the lengthening and
one unit to another and to the supporting members. shortening of the extreme sides (boundaries) due to
deep beam action, (2)the stress concentration at the
(1) Rigidity. The magnitude of the total lateral corner junctions of the horizontal and vertical com-
forces at any story or level depends upon the struc- ponents between openings, and (3)the shear and di-
tural system as a whole. The proportion of that total agonal tension in the horizontal and vertical compo-
horizontal load carried by a particular shear wall is nents.
based on its relative rigidity considering the rigidity
of the other walls and the diaphragms. The rigidity (a) Relative rigidities of piers and spandrels.
of a shear wall is inversely proportional to its deflec- The ease of methods of analysis for walls with
tion under a unit horizontal force. Where shear walls openings is greatly dependent on the relative rigidi-
are tied together by a rigid diaphragm or bracing so ties of the piers and the spandrels, as well as the
that all must deflect equally, the total translational general geometry of the building. Figure 6-6 shows
lateral force is shared in direct proportion to their two extreme examples of relative rigidities ofexte-
relative rigidities (torsional moments must also be rior walls of a building. In figure 6-6a the piers are
considered, chap 4, para 4-4e(2)). Wall deflection is very rigid and the spandrels are very flexible.
the sum of the deformations due to shear and Assuming a rigid base, the shear walls act as verti-
flexure (fig 6-4) plus any additional displacement cal cantilevers. When a lateral force is applied, the
that may occur due to rotation at the base. spandrels act as struts which flexurally deform to be
(a) The rotation at the foundation can greatly ;mpatible with the deformation of the cantilever
influence the overall rigidity of a shear wall because piers. It is relatively simple to determine the forces
of the very rigid nature of the shear wall itself; how- on the cantilever piers by ignoring the deformation
6-3
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
13AGONA X. ThN~itl
CRACA'S /N SPA AlOR64
MAY OCCUR AT 7TL
TOP OR AT OnTeR
GCr
t eTrIONS, ne/WemoN
OJ VSRT1CAL £A.eAR
-rIAGONA4 76HNS/ON
CRACICs N P/61 ,
UCSUACLY MOST
SeVd1R6 AT SOTrOM
WG1?fJ 14ORJIaONTAL
JHUA I5 L 4GST
6-4
TM -809-10
NAVFAC P4-5
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
5 Spc. E' to 10
(4TMRA
4OA t
A sc D 16 ** ao 16
CzDFL6X,61
g AGo
OpeORA
FORCU.. , . I I .l,
Rot4
I~~~~~~~~. . Ag .
B. I
eN Ain
d.
_.g~ _- _ F _
.
°113[14Mnoa " 'O, - -,,,,-,-,
4!)
'5
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
characteristics of the spandrels. The spandrels are and in chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(J)lh, respectiv
then designed to be compatible with the pier defor- A modified load factor for shear and diagonal K
mations. In figure 6-6b, the piers are relatively sion is used for buildings without a 100 percei
flexible compared to the spandrels. The spandrels ductile moment resisting space frame. Vertical
are assumed to be infinitely rigid and the piers are boundary elements (e.g., structural steel or confined
analyzed as fixed ended columns. The spandrels are reinforcement) are to be provided at the edges of
then designed for the forces induced by the columns. shear walls (and similar confinement adjacent to
The overall wall system is also analyzed for over- wall openings) under certain prescribed conditions
turning forces that induce axial forces into the (para 6-3a(lld) and 6-8).
columns. The calculations of relative rigidities for e. Braced Frames. The use of braced frames is an
both cases shown in figure 6 can be aided by the acceptable alternative method to resist lateral
charts in figure 6-11, paragraph 673b(3). For cases forces in place of shear walls. The material may be
of relative spandrel and pier rigidities other than reinforced concrete, structural steel or wood. Verti-
those shown, the analysis and design becomes more cal bracing systems are used to transfer the
complex. horizontal forces at the floor or roof levels to the
li Methods of anaysi. Approximate moth- foundations. The function of the bracing is to resist
ods for analyzing walls with openings are generally forces that tend to deform the building in the direc-
acceptable. (See app C, example C-4.) For the simple tion parallel to the plane of that bracing, and to
cases shown in figure 6-6 the procedure it straight- transmit these lateral loads to the foundation. As
forward. For more complex cases, a variation of as- with other systems, the deformations to be expected
sumptions may be used to determine the most crit- in a major earthquake can be much greater than
ical loads on various elements, thus resulting in a those found using the prescribed forces. As the duc-
conservative design. (Note In some cases a few ad- tility of conventional braced systems has not been
ditional reinforcing bars, at little additional cost, adequately demonstrated, multiple braces (see fig
can greatly increase the strength of shear walls with 6-7) should be used whenever possible to increase
openings.) However, when the reinforcement re- the redundancy. See paragraph 6-7 for vertically
quirements or the resulting stresses of this ap- braced frames.
proach appear excessively large, a rigorous analysis (1) Layout When planning a bracing systex
may be justified. a building consider the structure as a whole (see hbo-'
(3) Dual systems. Buildings may utilize both 5-4 and 6-7; also, refer to chap 5, para 5-2a(2), for
shear walls and moment resisting space frames to horizontal bracing systems). Visualize the ways in
resist lateral forces. The total lateral load is which a structure might fail, and provide bracing to
assumed to be resisted by the shear walls and the keep the structure from collapsing. The designers
frame is assigned to resist nominally 25 percent of must be certain just where every door, window,
the total lateral load. It is assumed that the contri- passageway, obstruction, and other controlling fea-
bution of the frame for lateral resistance will tures will be located before placing the bracing. The
provide redundancy and will provide a reserve architect must be certain just where the bracing is
strength against complete collapse if the shear walls to be placed before deciding the type of fenestration.
should fail. However, the difference in behavior be- (2) Lateralforce resistance. The braced framing
tween walls and frames results in non-uniform must be designed to carry the lateral force reactions
interacting forces between these elements when from the roof and floors. The entire system must be
they are connected together by floor slabs (see chap as simple, direct, positive, and effective as practica-
4, para 4-4e(3) and fig 4-7). Therefore, the distribu- ble. However, multiple systems will generally be
tion of forces in accordance with the relative used for seismic purposes when the damage to a
rigidities and the interaction of walls and frames specific member could cause complete failure. For
must also be considered (table 3-3). example, if one braced frame should be damaged,
(4) Special loading and detail requirements. All the other braced frames would pick up its load suffi-
portions of a shear wall will be designed to resist the ciently to prevent complete collapse. Locate vertical
combined effects of axial loads (if any) and other braced frames so as to limit torsion.
boundary forces as determined from a rational dis-
tribution of the total prescribed lateral forces on the C6-3. Cast-In-place concrete shear walls and
structure as a whole. Special criteria to control ,concrete braced frames. a. General Desitm
brittle behavior and to provide greater elastic re- Criteria The criteria used to design reinforced
sponse capacity of shear walls in concrete and unit- crete shear walls will be ACI 318-77 except Ap_'
masonry are required as stipulated in paragraph 6-3 dix A. and as modified by the SEAOC Section 3 (re-
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chop. 13
PI.
6-7
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
printed below) and In this manuaL For tilt-up and (1) SEAOC Section 3 Concrete ShOr Wall
other precast concrete shear walls refer to para, and Braced Framesd (Modifications
arein itaUlc
graph 6-4.
(A) General.
Design and construction of reinforced concrete shear walls and reinforced
concrete braced frames used to resist seismic forces shall conform to the re
quirements of the A.C.I. Building Code, A.C.I. 318, and all the requirements of
SEAOC Section 3 as modified herein.
Shear walls and braced frames shall be designed by the strength design
method except that the alternate design method may be used provided that
the factor of safety in shear and diagonal tension is equivalent to that achieved
with the strength design method.
AC.I. 318, for earthquake loading, shall be modified to:
U - 1.4(D+L) + 1.43 (E)
U = 0.9D + 1.4E (6-2)
provided further than 2.0 E shall be used In both equations in calculating shear
and diagonal tension in buildings other than those complying with require-
mentsforbuildingswithK 0.67.
(B) Braced Frames.
Reinforced concrete members of braced frames subjected primily to
axial stresses shall have special transve reinforcing as set forth in Section
2(E)40 throughout the full length of the member. Tension members shall addi-
tionally meet the requirement for compression members.
EXCEPTION: In Zone 1 and for Zone 2 buidings under 160 feet, the pro-
visions of chapter7, paragraphs7-4a(15)and (16) wiU satisfy this requirement.
(C) Shear and Diagonal Tension Strength Design.
1. Shear Stress. The nominal ultimate shear stress vu, resulting from
forces acting parallel to shear walls shall be computed by
=V u'p (6-3)
where
Vu = Ultimate shear computed according to Section 1 and including
the effect of gravity loads.
A0 Area of concrete sections resistingVu.
2. Shear Stress Limit. The ultimate shear stress vu thus computed Shl
not exceed that given by
vu=2Vrt2+pfy, (6-4)
where "p" is the ratio of the area of reinforcement to the area of concrete
'From the publicatiom "Recommended Lateral Force Requlementa and Commentary" by the
Seismology Committee, Structural Engineers Assocation of California. Copyright 1976,
Structural Engineers Assocation of California, and reproduced with permission.
lFormulas have been renumbered such that SEAOC Formula 3-1 Is designated as 6-11I this
manuel.
ISEAOC Section 2. Concrete Ductile Moment Resisting Space Frames, is reprinted, a modi-
fed In this manual, as chapter 7, paragraph 7-3a(lXesg, Section 21E4 Is paragraph 7-3a1)(E)4.
6-8
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3 Chap. 13
section resisting the shear Vu. At least an equal percentage of reinforce-
ment p" shall be provided perpendicular to that required to satisfy
Formula (6-4).
The average horizontal shear vu for all wall piers sharing a common lateral
force component shall not exceed
8VQ (6-5)
and the vu in any of the individual wall piers shall be not more than
iOV (6-6)
The value of the vertical shear vu shall not exceed
10VZ (6-7)
for horizontal wall elements.
3. Minimum Reinforcement. The minimum reinforcing ratio "p" for
all walls designed to resist seismic forces acting parallel to the wall shall be
0.0025 each way. The maximum spacing of reinforcement each way shall not
exceed dls or eighteen inches (180), whichever is smaller, where "d" is the di-
mension of the wall element parallel to the shear force. That portion of the wall
reinforcement required to resist design. shears shall be uniformly distributed.
See figure 6-&
4. Anchorage of Reinforcement. Wall reinforcement required to re-
sist wall shear shall be terminated with not less than a 90 degree bend plus a 6
bar diameter extension beyond the boundary reinforcing at vertical and hori-
zontal end faces of wall sections. Wall einforcement terminating in boundary
columns or beams shall be fully anchored into the boundary elements.
'-9
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
nhore:
OAJClta~CA SOW aV f(JVQP/orA ELoc6S
TrwiC.' woU' eelAw Ckw r s$ e 5crnov
.C2tTAVG' CNORa
U1Nol ICS10
N: -.
ALU RUNRCEMET SHIN Is WtICAL
UiNSS ADDITICaL OR IAX~E SWU
ARE RIQUIRED BY SISIC DSIN.
%5fZ
cr c- C PAA. G-3a (CJDG.
7TVP. 7',/E Atroawt, $p1Ces
Figure 6-8A Minimum Concrete Shear Wall Reinforcement (Two curtains)
. ,, I .9~p
6-10
TM 6809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
3M: 1. UU S Jn, N UID
AMLUS O OMDSGS
S V2 U
I A KA= 1 SuB NAIIK DICaU 71 1o
r r(X& OUATO 3. CO An= -3-2.
2. 'LL UITOW t w ts Trticl am" ADDITIaL
* U=2 MM am UQUIUD ay ShtIc 3t(ax.
3. IX LIZU Or1.LLAU2
SI UlU 3Uli.
rxOcAtL waLL eimiw-oaci/_,
Ih7/A4A~7L~tfl 8&G- TSLe C -2
a ",I-"4 Vfmrf*
lt
a0
r/
COUAM AIMS -t
Sam SIZE 4 UP ArLR of
SACI4'C7 4qS OPP0JIT(
MWYS
.4
wqero0vn.
O"&OKWCOM e4L. ru
I
TRcU 4 ,02MLL
,,
TYpACA't
. . .. -
WA' COo~2. X wQ rrricz. *sru ivresscrzs
"7s Amff, jwc-"&r wwtsS,
Ir~a c-2 rAbLC- C-3
0 SRACw@O0-,ARS AArh
. usIaJuOi riHE tLL PILR
Fgre B MJimCR PORC&(
6-11
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
I
coseIApea)r Ar oP/A)X( s
PIDAPURM4G,'A
CHORD3 RC-14J15,
- O1APYRAGi4
I CHORD RnemPO
WALL E EVATION I rH
SP4C/AL SOUDARY !LeCM41NrT5
NOTES: For Sections A-A, B-B, and C-C, see Figure 6-10.
Special vertical boundary members, as shown above, shall be
provided at the edges of concrete shear walls designated as
Shear Wall Type A (paragraph 6-3a(1)(D)).
6-12
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-55
AFM 884, Chap. 13
0-44-T
I S71D. HwooA
.HtOOP (1/6 7.5) . 2 H/OOP gC/t 7-S) /
_ I
I1 V
a
q
II
-q -
r I / I.
r
7VPICAL . -57D. OC
COqaJ6A
J5AR* . C.'O J
-r-3 "W.-
_
S&cr10,U A-AS
_ _ _ .
JAk45
cauce 6& U atw~e -
6-13
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
(2) Classifieation of concrete shear walls and ten on the curves can be used to check the result
concrete braced frames. Concrete shear walls and However, the charts will give no better results ti.
braced frames are classified under three categories the assumptions made in the shear wall analyst-
for use in table 3-7 in section 3-6. For instance, the point of contraflexure of a vertical
(a) Shear Wai Type A. Reinforced concrete pier may not be in the center of the pier height. In
shear walls with vertical boundary members, de- some cases the point of contraflexure may be
signed in accordance with the provisions. of para- selected by judgment and an interpolation made be-
graph 6-3a(1), are classified as Shear Wall Type A. tween the cantilever and fixed conditions.
(bi Shear Wail Type B. Reinforced concrete (4) Assumptions
shear walls designed similar to Shear Wall Type A, (a) The foundation is unyielding or that soil
with the exception of paragraph 6-3a(lHD) (i.e., spe- pressures will vary as a straight line under a wall
cial vertical boundary elements are not required), when subjected to overturning. These may not al-
are classified as Shear Wall Type B. ways be realistic assumptions, but are generally
(ci Braced frames. Reinforced concrete braced adequate for design purposes.
frames will be designed in accordance with the pro- (bi Where the openings in a shear wall are so
visions of paragraph 6-3a(l)(B). large that the resulting wall approaches an assem-
bly similar to a rigid frame (hid values off the chart),
b. Discussionof WaIlDeflections,ShearDistribu- the wall will be analyzed as a rigid frame.
tion, andAssumptions
(1) Wail deflections. The deflection of a concrete c. Construction Joints and Dowels. The contact
shear wall is the sum of the shear and flexural deflec- faces of shear wall construction joints have exhib-
tions. In the case of a solid wall with no openings the ited slippage and related drift damage in past
computations of deflection are quite simple. How- earthquakes. Consideration must be given to loca-
ever, where the shear wall has openings in it, as for tion and details of construction joints. They must be
doors and windows, the computations for deflection clean and roughened. It is highly desirable to pro-
and rigidity are much more complex. An exact anal- vide intermittent shear keys in Seismic Zone Nos. 3
ysis, considering angular rotation of elements, rib and 4. Shear friction reinforcement may be provided
shortening, etc., is very time consuming. For this in accordance with ACI (318-77) Section 11.7. A r
reason, several short-cut approximate methods in- efficient of friction of 0.6 is suggested to account,
volving more or less valid assumptions have been seismic effects.
developed. These do not always give consistent or
satisfactory results. Therefore, conservative ap- 6-4. Tilt-up and other precast concrete shear
proach and judgment must be used. Refer to para- walls. a. Analysis. Where tilt-up or precast con-
graph 6-2d(2) for additional discussion. crete walls are used as shear walls, the basic
(2) Sheardistribution. It is necessary to make a analysis is the same as that for walls of cast-in-place
logical and consistent distribution of story shears to concrete. In this case the boundary conditions be-
each wall. Rigidity analysis is discussed in chapter come critical and the shears between precast and
4, paragraph 4-4e, and in paragraph 6-2d of this cast-in-place elements must be analyzed. Shears be-
chapter. An exact determination of the story shear tween two precast elements or between a precast
distribution is very difficult and is not necessary. element and a cast-in-place element may be devel-
Approximate methods in which the deflections of oped by shear keys, dowels, or welded inserts. The
portions of walls are combined usually are adequate. contact joint itself is a cold joint and will be given no
Examples illustrating various methods of rigidity shear or tension value.
computations are shown in appendix C. b. Joints. Weakened plane joints are frequently
(3) Deflection charts. Deflection charts for provided in poured-in-place concrete to route cracks
fixed-ended corner and rectangular piers are shown caused by shrinkage or temperature change. These
in figure 6-11. Curves 5 and 6 are for cantilever cor- joints normally do not affect the analysis of shear
ner and rectangular piers. The corner pier curves are walls. However, in precast concrete elements, joints
for the special case where the I (moment of inertia) are frequently provided which structurally separate
of the corner pier is 1.5 times the I of a rectangular one element from another. In the case of precast
pier. For other I values the bending portion of the wall construction, for instance, one might have a se
deflection would be proportional. The deflections of concrete elements tied together at top and
shown on the charts are for a horizontal load P of Xttom but structurally separated from each oths
1,000,000 pounds. The deflections shown on the by vertical joints. Since all elements in a line are t
charts are reasonably accurate. The formulas writ- together at the top they must have equal horizon.
6-14
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
a: i- L:. I. I...
Y -F;.:T: :
o:...1*. 1 ,. _:.
.1 q .. l ::::-.
' ' ' '~
: 4 \ _..
-4-
--- ...... 1-
. . 4
.
A
v-... ,, X -~~~~~...
.... . *... ..... .1 .. ; s *... _
' .... ; .. ,. '. - ***
3 . _ ....... '.
- *. .... .. .
Figure 6-12a. Design Curves for Msinry and Concrete Shear WaZis
.
6-15
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
d i1 405 a*!
ZftZnor, :a
...,S
MA .E .......
u..e -11.
IMAUNAt ;.).,6v.
. .
. ....... Iw
AO=r_.
.1fI
i 121.
Figure 6-lib. Design Curves for Masonry
and Concrete Shear WaZls
-j
6-16
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
deflections and therefore a horizontal force parallel b. Working Shears for Plywood Details of ply-
with the line of units will be resisted by the individ- wood sheathed walls are shown on figure 6-14 and
ual elements in proportion to relative rigidities. the allowable working shears are shown in figure
Such elements may not have equal rigidities since 6-15. When a combination of plywood and other ma-
some may contain large openings or may be of dif- terials is used, the shear strength of the walls will be
ferent height-width ratios. Some elements may determined by the values permitted for plywood
deflect primarily in shear and others primarily in alone (fig 6-15).
flexure. Where significant dissimilar deflections are c. Deflections. The deflection of wood frame shear
found, the building elements tying the individual walls at the present time is not readily computable.
units together must be analyzed to determine their The maximum height-width limitations given herein
ability to resist or accept such deformations in- are presumed to satisfactorily control deflections.
cluding angular rotation without losing their ability Relative stiffnesses of wood stud shear walls will be
to function as ties or diaphragm chords or footings. measured by the effective lineal width of walls or
The use of mechanical keys or sleeved dowels may piers between openings.
be used to assist in eliminating differential move-
ment of adjacent precast panels separated by d. Let-In Brace. Except when used in combina-
control joints where appearance and weather-tight- tion with diagonal sheathing or plywood, a one-inch
ness are otherwise satisfactorily provided. by four-inch brace let into the studs may be used to
resist an additional horizontal force not exceeding
c Connectorsfor Shear Walls. Past experience in- 1,000 pounds, provided the total value of the shear
dicates that the performance of weld plates or other wall does not exceed 600 pounds per foot. Each such
nonductile connectors has been poor and in many brace shall be nailed to each stud and to the top and
cases they have resulted in failures during earth- bottom plates with two 8d nails.
quakes. These connectors have been weak links in
the shear wall connection. It is important that the e. Wall Tie-Down. The end studs of any plywood
load bearing shear walls be more stringently or con- sheathed shear wall and/or shear wall pier will be
servatively designed since any connector failure tied down in such a manner as to resist the overturn-
during an earthquake may result in progressive fail- ing forces produced by seismic forces parallel to the
ure to collapse. Therefore, all connectors for load shear wall. This overturning force is sometimes of
and nonload bearing walls will be designed for three sufficient magnitude to require special steel attach-
times the actual seismic shear forces. The shear ment details. A commonly used detail is shown on
force will be uniformly distributed throughout the figure 6-16. Tie-downs will be computed using the
height or length of the shear wall with reasonably required stresses for wood and its fastenings in-
spaced connectors (maximum spacing 4'-0) rather creased 33-1/3 percent for seismic forces.
than with a few which will have localized concentra- 6-6. Steel stud walls. Some small structures
tion of stresses. Detailed calculations will be made may be constructed using steel stud structural
including the localized effects in concrete walls walls. In order for this type of wall to be capable of
attributed from these connectors. Sufficient details acting as a shear wall, some form of bracing is re-
of connectors and embedded anchorage will be pro- quired. When the design forces permit, the detail
vided to preclude construction deficiency. shown on figure 6-17a may be used to resist a total
d. Typical Details. Refer to figure 6-12 for typical of 1,000 pounds. In larger buildings where the de-
details of attachments. sign forces become greater, this method is impracti-
cal and other shear wall systems may be required.
6-5. Wood stud shear walls. a. Working Figure 6-17b shows typical details at top of walls.
Shears Except Plywood Figure 6-13 gives in tabu-
lar form the maximum height-width ratios and 6-7. Vertically braced frames. a. General De-
allowable shear per lineal foot for wood stud shear sign Criteria. The criteria governing the design of
walls with various types of sheathing or plaster ex- vertical braced frames will be chapter 3, paragraph
cept for plywood sheathed walls. The usual 33-1/3 3-3(J)lg, paragraph 6-2 of this chapter, and as pre-
percent increase for short-time seismic loads is not scribed in this paragraph.
applicable to these allowable shear values. The 11) Structural steel braced frames. Members of
strength of any wood stud shear wall may be made braced frames will be composed of ASTM A86,
up of a combination of the materials listed. In no 4441, A500 (Grades B and C), A501, A672 (Grades
case shall the allowable shears for combinations of '2, 45, 50, and 55), or A588 structural steel and will
materials exceed 600 pounds per lineal foot. conform to the AISC "Specification for Design,
6-17
TM 5-609-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
I ~--Jr AS RM
C
%rre9(COLUMius
:!." "
AMeCAS PAM4\
PAtCAJT LAP
(PANAL 1XVINA-l
I - I I
I
l~~~~~~% l- l- l
JLr'. /WN
6-18
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
-
TYPICAL rSL
A7
IVRMtAL SEAR WALLS AJALAlJG CDCACH 8EARWG 44XWLUU PAER ALLOWAb5Lf
OW S/Mc WLZL CVAIAUJ ULESS AwrED EAHTT-AD£7
RA7 t3 (*w) US
IS7X41$Mr SH.4AHLrL4 e -dd 2:1
2-'JTRArLYTSrE5AoAmtA4 3 - ird
d 40
COJJVEJ4J JL / I r 2 -6d(5-adAT r8L4v-i'WS Jo0,
4M4GOJA44L SHEArMU4311.,08 J 6d(4-adArTCuLARxWS 2:1
SPOCAL DkQdU4L S.4TW 3-ral .Sb:1 I00
1*nJ GALWE DL417ER
LATH 4 GYPSUU P1ASeR t£ADLWD AMAL 5'c. 2:1
4d8tUO hO L4AWLS e c.
AETAL LATH 4 PfORM4L O / A IGA)CW VS'D4. 2:1 200
cMeV r PIASTE AD 6,4&660 AA4fLLS Cec.
G WSW LArh. PLAU OR IV= 15 GA4DQ: 4'&,DMAXWR
ABRP-ORATEb 4b n7stWr 1A0D 6LLWD AA 4L6 c..5.
8LOCK" 4 fir PARsr
4 1GAM& T' D14DA7R
GPSUU SME.47IG i4&D 10.4 044AIO4 P0Ao. llh:1 75
Wm r2arJ0 Wfl7wlJ bLXK(4 GAL VUA/IZED e 4eoc.
G)P.SCD $JMATMUJQ 8Oa4 1I-V.'IaAt'./ bVV04Ao7r*
M5AD AIA.AO POUIT' 175
51'a4' WITH 6L0cka'a GALrAJ./IZO 4"..c.
GYPMU MUL~a4RD(Rm,4L) SdF o0 Z 7'e .c I*:/ Im
11(ol.0M GA. e 41bc. 11:1 /S
GWSW MC4 U~abD(ew4LL) jd O P7.c.
F /25
W* M7m bLKOLY_ P4,"rG.A. eP 4'ac /5 :I lSO
GYPJLUV JMALLta4RDYMA) *, feC.c. /1:, 175
I TALWS SMALL hE ADDZ'*0 PO& PAR77CULAR &CAL OFS Ae t0 DWOLtEC MM? P0e-
CMAMkS LOW
SPECLU X 0.'- MMAL47D YULSS SpiECLS S 0'1 TAMW U4LS PeCS 9 a0' r1AAMD INLWS
DoLASP2Rw 0rc1 3sk )moa suc (SmrA) rs% Me(McROSA) 45%
LARCH Mt P-M (WATE) 70% e(SMAR) aS%
A6JJLOClC (SM)JJ) dS CE4R (Ci5SE4IRMD) C5 % PW(LtDGePaLF) CS%
RED"= m0O P(/aOhV WItJE) 3S% SPRXE'(&I4LEAU" 65%
2. rwe-D LowER Ca0I7 /e 7r74of C C7LWSLVt eg 4LL ePQ NODSMwtAe WALLS .W4LL
be REDXeCD 7 % 00' MO M4hA D V4LIJ&
3 D SRAIGHT SHEA rHLG -cLk
O4a4Lcm vair7 a-A.44Ceir 4RD5 VI.L WE JEPARATD by
ArL64Sr rW soraroeA^r s'-.cps M.4cTsArLm r my w46 romy .'Dl7 au X4(A&S nua
t PEC4L SACA7TwJ Sm4LL cOJ.s5r/ST 0 rp LAVeRS 0 rC4LArL7UV4L
U4Gau4L 4=CU4L SAV47SC4;
AT0o W EACH OrACR ALO OU M &4E ^4CC Om S7W .
s 7M 0'-AA4LS, See APPJCA6LE AGEC-AY GD SPECOPnCA77/OW.
G4. ThSE SAVAR WALLS SALL AxrM ED TmRETiS Prm cBs aW v cmAeTre4e uoAvsa
eXCEPT PoR Y&1ERs, S/w-R STALLSA AUUJOR .
COMR67- LP"S S"AS fCM*EAfr PAW
z m7 wwq 331sz .cREAsE -m swor- nur-z s&-wl La4M ssAr
TWSEALOW4PcE JACAR
AMCAZLE M rW CLCMS.
J SUAR WALLS ULM A COMSArTlA (' AeATrL4LS WIU U COL!* P e 6-13. Typical
cRWb Al Tr SW a4(01*VLS 0' riE IMMUA4L A40 l.r
.A 7
C-D A A4X GM0 PUU406
JP RXAL rood Stud Shear al
LU =W&6A770W VIYWAIfa- ThE 5/eAR WAILS L/ST-DA
9 A- WED6// ar 8
Lr w 6Ac-A44,- vicoD Rc-is reAA sr .waut -wc .
oo POW7 W M 0Rrf
A3lOr M.AACC Po-OL P of Various Materials
Other Than Plywood
I..
6-19
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
D/APHReAOM Ar
\0f oo/ PLOR e OORffA S
9LOCKIPS \ f._
worc-s:7~ 8E U A
SE66 //9 co-/4 AQR 7TEV3/ON 7/
WoeO $AHeArH/NAc.
6-20
( I.( (
Recommended Shear In Pounds Per Foot for Plywood Shear Walls with Framing of Douglas Fir. Larch. or Southern Pine (a)
For Wind or Seismic Loading (O)
Plywood Applied Plywood Applied Over
Direct to Framing 1tr Gypsum Sheathing
Minimum Minimum
Nominal Nail
Plywood Grade Plod Penetration Nail Size Nail Spacing t Plywood Nail Size Nail Spacing at Plywood
Thicknns in Framing (cornmon or Panel Edges (in.) (common or Panel Edges (in.)
(in. (in.) galvanized - - galvanized -
box) 6 4 2y, 2 box) 6 4 2%S 2
5/16 1.1/4 6d 200 300 450 510 8d 200 300 450 510
STRUCTURAL IC-DINT-APA. or 3/8 1.1/2 8d 230(d) 360(d) 530(d) 610(d) tOd 280 430 640(e) 730(e)
STRUCTURAL I C-C EXT-APA _
1/2 1-5/8 10d 340 510 770(e) 870(e) _ _ _ _ -
~1% C.D INTAPA 5116 or 1/4 (c 1-1/4 6d 180 270 400 450 8d 180 270 400 450
C-C EXT-APA
STRUCTtiRAL 11C-D INT-APA 3/8 1-1/2 Sd 220(d) 320(d) 470(d) 530(d) 1Od 260 380 570(e) 640(e)
4I STRUCTURAL 11C-C EXT.APA _
APA panel siding tf)and other
APA gradesexcept species 1/2 1-St8 lOd 310 460 690(ej 770(e) _ _ _ _
Group S.
NailSize - - Nail Size _
03 (galvanized (galvanized
APA grades except species 5/16(c) 1-1/4 cnit)t 140 210 320 360 Casing) 140 210 320 360
Group 5: 6d 8d _
I 3/8 1-1/2
(a)For framing of other species: (1)Find species group of lumber in the NFPA Nat'l
Design Spec. (2)(a For common or galvanized box nails fird shear value from table
for nail size, and for STRUCTURAL I plywood (regardless of actual grade). b) For
galvanizedcasingnails,takeshearvaluedirectlyfromtable.(3)Multlplythisvalueby
8d 130(d) 200(d) 300(d) 340(d) 1Od 160 240
(c)3/8-inchor3O3-16o.c. isminimumrecommendedwhenapplieddirecttoframingas
exterior siding
360
inches oc., or (2)plywood is applied with face grain across studs, or (3)plywood is
0.82 for Lumber Group Ill or 0.65 for Lumber Group IV. 1/2-inch or greater in thickness.
(b)All panel edges backed with 2-inch nominal or wider framing. Plywood installed (e)Reduce tabulated sheats 10 percenx when boundary members provide kss than 3-inch
either horizontally or vertically. Space nails 6 inches o.c. along intermediate mem- nominal nailing surface.
bers for 3/8-inch plywood with face grain parallel to-studs spaced 24 inches oc. For If 303-16 o.c. plywood may be S/16-inch. 3/8-nch or thicker. Thickness at point of
other conditions and plywood thicknesses, space nails 12 inch o.c. on Intermediate nailing on panel edges governs shear values.
supports.
_.It
*f
,oL1re o ._1 -
:tJ
AACLYING /1/TI$ r~ .
LOCKN
71113 BOL r Nor ro & CON/DERED
.e *.a - n. flav.rr
-. 41 *4 J jV-Huf
AM Dcm;& . frvLW
.3 91i. cot4CRerE COVERAG UDCR
$ AROUND ANCHOR BOL r
.."'m'4M4~
TYPICAL h Do wN DE rAInu
2 x 5eRIDS r I
5rteel 00P1ri
Pe4AV 6
CORNER D E
1 rAIL A TIE-DOWN
NOTE: Angle,-bolts, plates, posts, footings, etc., to be designed
for uplift.
6-22
------- - -
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel can be much greater than those found using the pre-
Buildings." scribed forces. As the ductility of the usual braced
(2) Reinforced concrete bracedframes. Will con- systems has not been adequately demonstrated,
form to the requirements of paragraph 6-3a(lXB). multiple braces should be used whenever possible
(3) Wood braced frames. Wood braced frames (see para 6-2e).
will be designed using normal procedures illustrated (3) Connections. Obviously, a member will not
in many easily obtainable texts and are not covered support loads in excess of what its connections and
in this manual. "National Design Specifications for other details can hold. As a general principle, these
Wood Construction" (1977 Edition and 1980 Sup- details should be sufficient to develop the useful
plement), NFPA, applies. strength of the member or part concerned, regard-
b. GeneralDiscussion. less of calculated stress. In lieu of developing the
(1) Definition of braced frame. In chapter , full capacity of the member or part concerned, the
paragraph 3-3(B), a braced frame is defined as a connections will be designed for 1.25 times the de-
truss system or its equivalent which is provided to sign force without the one-third increase usually
resist lateral forces and in which the members are permitted.
subjected to axial stresses. The determination of a SpecialRequirementsfor Braced Frames. Refer
whether a bracing system, such as one utilizing deep to chapter , paragraph -3(J)lg, for special load
knee braces, is a braced frame or a moment resisting factor and connection requirements for braced
frame is explained in the 1960 SEAOC Commentary frames. Reference should also be made to the
(p. 32) as follows: "If the deflection of a braced bent SEAOC Commentary, pages 47-C and 48-C.
is predominantly due to bending and rotation of in-
dividual members rather than the direct stress 6-8. Masonry shear walls. Distribution of
distortion of shear carrying bracing nembers, it shears to masonry walls will be in a similar manner
may be considered a frame; if it deflects primarily as described for cast-in-place concrete walls. For
due to the distortion of the shear carrying member it typical masonry shear wall details, see chapter 8,
is a shear wall." Braced frames may be made of any Reinforced Masonry. When masonry shear walls are
approved structural material (para 6-2e). Braced used as part of a dual system (i.e., K=0.8 per cat-
frames may be of various forms. The X-braced pan- egory 3 in table 3-3) in Seismic Zones 2, 3, or 4,
els, consisting of diagonal tension members and special vertical boundary elements are required.
vertical compression members, are most frequently These elements will be composed of structural steel
used (fig 6-18). Trussed portal bracing or K-bracing or reinforced concrete in accordance with paragraph
is frequently used to permit unobstructed openings 6-3a(l)(D) or will be composed of masonry columns
Ifig 6-20). Braced frames with single diagonal mem- or pilasters in accordance with chapter 8, paragraph
bers capable of taking compression as well as 8-14.
tension are used to permit flexibility in the location 6-9. Metal wall systems. Metal wall panels or
of openings (fig 6-19). The deflection of braced sidings less than 22 gage are not permitted for use
frames is readily computed using recognized as shear walls. Metal decking and attachments com-
methods. plying with chapter 5, paragraph 5-6 will be
(2) Function of braced frame. The function of permitted for use as shear wall diaphragms.
the bracing is that of resisting forces that tend to EXCEPTION: In Seismic Zone 1, a pre-
deform the building in a direction parallel to the engineered metal building with panels less than
plane of that bracing, and to transmit these lateral 22 gage requires that load tests be submitted
loads to the foundation. As with other systems, the for evaluation and approval.
deformations to be expected in a major earthquake
k ?
P.?
6-23
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 80-3, Chap. 13
'
TYPICAL,
8RIDdIA14
TYPICALI
2.2ZO sru
$TUD V 6kQCED P4C EL
iAb.6SJ orS&ewis NOTED
M'L J6 Sc6 LO.4' 8Y6401 $1VJ (wI6 Sac
-6tcvfTo A
r7Vlcot AVIC6o s65 sT Sru . .
or JWo rock
K C SZVO L<*SPEL- C
@ ^'X ma2 o EcrJ 1L~~~~~~%"XJW 14vs
*~~~~P ozavv C
C 3"L4S'i-
V '7rE
5Lo
W-_, .
WIMw
AF
-
O.TA/L p
-24
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
6-25
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Fig. -18.
I
Or~~~~D- II0,'
_____~~~"I
--
N.
X-DRACED RAME (diagonals in tension;
1-%
verticals in tension or compression).
AS I
Fig. 8-19. BRACED FAM (diagonals
and verticals in compression or Fig. -20. PORTAL BRACED FRM
tension).
_. y._ffi_
ai 0
;,
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
CHAPTER 7
SPACE FRAMES
7-1. Purpose and scope. This chapter pre- in which the members and joints are capable of re-
scribes the criteria for design of moment resisting sisting design lateral forces by bending moments.
space frames of buildings in seismic areas; indicates Although a moment resisting space frame need not
principles, factors, and concepts involved in seismic comply with all the special requirements of a ductile
design of moment resisting frames; gives design moment resisting space frame, it will comply with
data; and illustrates typical details of construction. the applicable requirements set forth in this chapter
For braced frames which act as shear walls, refer to to qualify as a seismic space frame.
chapter 6. c. Ductile Moment Resisting Space Frames. To
qualify for a K-factor of 0.67, the structural system
7-2. General. A space frame, as defined in chap- for resisting lateral forces must be a ductile moment
ter 3, paragraph 3-3(B), is a three-dimensional resisting space frame. A ductile moment resisting
structural system, without bearing walls, composed space frame will be required for any building of any
of interconnected members laterally supported so as height where a K-factor of less than 1 is used (some
to function as a complete self-contained unit with or exceptions are permitted for dual systems as pro-
without the aid of horizontal diaphragms or floor vided for in table 3-7). A ductile moment resisting
bracing systems. space frame will be based on the assumption that
a. Seismic Space Frames. Horizontal forces at the frame depends on its own bending stiffness for
any floor or roof level are transmitted to the founda- the lateral stability of the structure. Beams (or gird-
tion (ground) by using the strength, rigidity, and ers) shall be connected to columns by rigid joints
ductility of a moment resisting space frame. A seis- which are capable of developing in the beams the full
mic space frame will be based on the assumption plastic capacity of the beams, under moment rever-
that the frame depends on its own bending stiffness sals. To take advantage of the energy absorbing
for the lateral stability of the structure fig 7-1). It capacity of the structural members, connections
is important to remember that deformations result- shall be designed to be at least as strong as the
ing from the dynamic response of a major members connected. A ductile moment resisting
earthquake are much greater than those determined space frame will be constructed of structural steel or
* from the application of the prescribed forces. This reinforced concrete and will comply with the re-
means that a space frame that conforms to the mini- quirements of Concrete Frame Type A (para 7-3) or
mum requirements of this manual will survive a Steel Frame Type A (para 7-5). In Seismic Zone No.
major earthquake only if it can yield without essen- 1, Concrete Frame Type B (para 7-4a) qualifies as a
tial loss of lateral resistance or vertical load ductile moment-resisting space frame.
capacity. Since normal building materials have very & Cassification of Moment Resisting Space
limited energy-absorbing capacity in the elastic Frames. Space frames are classified under several
range of action, it follows that what is needed is a categories in chapter 3, paragraph 3-6a, for use in
large energy capacity in the inelastic range. The table 3-7. The design criteria for Types A, B. and C
term "ductility" is used to denote this property. of both concrete and steel moment resisting space
Providing a ductile seismic frame may well prove to frames are covered in paragraphs 7-3 through 7-6.
be the difference between sustaining tolerable and, Concrete Frame Type D, which is not classified as a
in many cases, repairable damage, instead of cata- moment resisting seismic space frame (although
strophic failure. The energy dissipation, ductility, such a frame will naturally have some moment re-
and structural response (deformation) of space sistant capacity), is a vertical load-carying space
frames depend upon the type of members, connec- frame designed in accordance with ACI 318-77.
tions Ujoints), and materials of construction used.
The behavior of joints is a critical factor in the effi- 7-3. Concrete Ductile Moment Resisting
ciency of building frames during high intensity cy- Space Frame-Concrete Frame Type A.
clic loading. A seismic space frame will be a moment a GeneralDesign Criteria. The criteria used to de-
resisting space frame or a ductile moment resisting slin ductile moment resisting space frames will be
space frame. HfI 318-77 except appendix A, and as modified by
b. Moment Resisting Space Frames. A moment SEAOC Section 2 (reprinted below) and by this
space frame is a vertical load-carrying space frame manual.
7-1
TM-5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
J/O.GSW4 Ye
/3GIA 4e C T/ 0N
/:c<2CJC~
S/,E~kU
// /l~11:1reIsCeRI
,CO..S 1Or6NING I
e.g. S, MAY S
SIGNItIC4NT
7-2
TM 5-809-1O
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
11) SEAOC Section 2, Concrete Ductile
Moment Resisting Space Framesa (Modifications
are in italics)
(A) General.
Design and construction of cast-in-place, monolithic reinforced concrete
framing members and their connections in ductile moment resisting space
frames shall conform to the requirements of ACI Building Code, ACI 318, and
all the requirements of SEAOC Section 2 as modifed herein.
EXCEPTION: Precast concrete frame members may be used, if the
resulting construction complies with all the provisions of this Sec-
tion.
All lateral load resisting frame members shall be designed by the strength
design method except that the alternate design method may be used provided
that it is shown that the factor of safety is equivalent to that achieved with the
strength design method.
ACI 818, for earthquake loading shall be modified to:
U=1.4(D+L)+1.4E
U=O.9D+1.4E (7-2)
Members of space frames which are designed to resist seismic forces shall
be designed, in accordance with the provisions of this Section, so that shear
failures will not occur if the frame is subjected to lateral displacements in ex-
cess of yield displacements.
(B) Definitions.
CONFINED CONCRETE is concrete which is confined by closely spaced
special transverse reinforcement restraining the concrete in directions perpen-
dicular to the applied stresses.
SPECIAL TRANSVERSE REINFORCEMENT s composed of spirals,
stirrup-ties, or hoops and supplementary cross-ties provided to restrain the
concrete to make it qualify as confined concrete.
STIRRUP-TIES OR HOOPS are continuous reinforcing steel of not less
than a No. bar bent to form a closed hoop which encloses the longitudinal re-
inforcing and the ends of which have a standard 135 degree bend with a 10 bar
diameter extension or equivalent.
(C) Physical Requirements for Concrete and Reinforcing Steel.
1. Concrete. The minimum specified 28-day strength of the concrete,
shall be 3000 pounds per square inch.
The maximum specified strength for lightweight concrete shall be
limited to 4000 psi
2. Reinforcement. All longitudinal reinforcing steel in umns and
beams shall comply with'ASTM A-615, grade 40 or 60. The actual yield
stress, based on mill tests, shall not exceed the minimum specified yield stress,
fy, by more than 18,000 psi. Retests shall not exceed this value by more than
an additional 3000 psi In addition the ultimate tensile stress shall be not less
than 1.33 times the actual yield stress, based on mill tests.c Grades other than
these specified for design shall not be used'
p?
'Foa the publication "Recommended lateral Force Re- ;trSctural Engineers Assocation of California. and reproduced
rgheata and Commentary" by the Seismology Committee, with permission.
Structural Engineers Assodatlon of California. Copyright 1976,
73
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Where reinforcing steel is to be welded, a chemical analysis of the steel
shall be providedd Welding shall conform to "Structural Welding Code- Re-
enforcing Steel, "A WS D1.4-79.
(D) Flexural Members.
1. General. Flexural members shall not have a width-depth ratio of less
than 0.3, nor shall the width be less than ten inches 101) nor more than the
supporting column width plus a distance on each side of the column of three.
fourths the depth of the flexural member. Flexural members framing into col-
umns shall be subject to a rational joint analysis. (figure 7-2)
2. Reinforcement. All flexural members shall have a minimum rein-
forcement ratio, for top and for bottom reinforcement, of 2001fy throughout
their length. The reinforcement ratio "p" shall not exceed 0.025.
The positive moment capacity at the face of columns shall be not less
than 50 percent of the negative moment capacity provided. A minimum of one-
fourth of the larget amount of the negative reinforcement required at either
end shall continue throughout the length of the beam. At least two bars shall
be provided both top and bottom. (figure 7-3)
3. Splices. Tensile steel shall not be spliced by lapping in a region of
tension or reversing stress unless the region is confined by stirrup-ties. Splices
shall not be located within the column or within a distance of twice the mem-
ber depth from the face of the column. At least two stirrup-ties shall be pro-
vided at all splices. (figure7-)
4. Anchorage. Flexural members terminating at a column, in any ver-
tical place, shall have top and bottom reinforcement extending, without hori-
zontal offsets, to the far face of a confined concrete region, terminating in a
standard 90 degree hook. Length of required anchorage shall be computed be-
ginning at the near face of the column. Length of anchorage in confined re.
gions shall be not less than 56 percent of the development length, but not less
than twenty four inches (240). (figue 7-3)
EXCEPTION: Where the column resists less than 25 percent of the
story-bent shear, at least 50 percent of such top and bottom rein-
forcement shal be anchored within such column cores and the re.
mainder shall be anchored in regions outside the column core
confined as specified herein for columns.
5. Web Reinforcement. Vertical web reinforcement of not less than
No. 3 bars shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of ACI 318,
except that:
a. Stirrups shall be spaced to resist the ultimate design shear Vu in
which v j >LM
i.4VD+L (7-3)
*Formulas have been renumbered such that S>OC Formula 2-1 Is designated as Formula
7-1 n thi manual.
'ASTM A706 conforn to these provisions.
"Chemlcal analysi Isnot required for ASTM A70&
7-4
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
b. Stirrups shall be spaced at no more than df2 throughout the length of
the member.
c. Stirrup-ties, at a maximum spacing of not over d!4, 8 bar diameters,
24 stirrup-tie diameters, or twelve inches (12), whichever is least, shall be
provided in the following locations:
At each end of all flexural members, the first stirrup-tie shall be lo-
cated not moe than two inches (2') from the face of the column and
the last, a distance of at least twice the member depth from the face
of the columns.
Wherever ultimate moment capacities may be developed in the flex-
ural members under inelastic lateral displacement of the frame.
Wherever required compression reinforcement occurs in the flexural
members.
d. In regions where stirrup-ties are required, longitudinal bars shall
have lateral support conforming to the provisions of ties for tied columns.
Single or overlapping stirrup-ties and supplementary cross-ties may be used.
Section 2(E)
(E) Columns Subject to Direct Stress and Bending.
1. Dimensional Limitations. The ratio of minimum to maximum col-
umn thickness shall not be less than 0.4 nor shall any dimension be less than
twelve Inches (12 ). (figure 7-2)
2. Vertical Reinforcement. The reinforcement ration "p" in tied col-
umns shall not be less than O.Ol nor greater than 0.06. (figure 7-8)
3. Splices. Lap splices shall be made within the center half of column
height, and the splice length shall not be less than 30 bar diameters. Continu-
ity may also be effected by welding or by approved mechanical devices pro-
vided not more than alternate bars are welded or mechanically spliced at any
level and the vertical distances between these welds or splices of adjacent bars
Is not less than twenty-four inches (24'). (figure 7-4)
4. Spocial Transverse Reinforcement. The cores of columns shall be
confined by special transverse reinforcement as specified herein or as required
to meet shear requirements. (figure 7-6)
a. The volumetric ratio of spiral reinforcement shall not be less than
that required in ACI-318 nor
p =012 f ,74
whichever Is greater. 4
b. The total cross-sectional area (A'sh) of rectangular hoop reinforce-
ment shall not be less than
A'sh=0.30ahw '( Ag -1, 7-5)
nor
A'sh-0.12ah'i 17-6)
whichever is greater, where
a = center to center spacing of hoops in inches with a maximum of
four inches (4 ).
A, = area of column core.
7-5
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
Ag = gross area of column.
A"h= total cross-sectional area in square inches of hoop reinforcement
including supplementary crossties having a spacing of (a)inches
and crossing a section having a core dimension of h.
he = core dimension of tied column in inches.
f = yield strength of hoop or spiral reinforcement.
Single or overlapping hoops may be provided to meet this require-
ment. Supplementary crossties of the same size and spacing as hoops using
135 degree minimum hooks engaging the periphery hoop and secured to a lon-
gitudinal bar may be used. Supplementary crossties or legs of overlapping
hoops shall not be spaced more than fourteen inches 14') on center trans-
versely.
EXCEPTION: Formula (7-5) need not be complied with if the column
design is based on the column core only.
c. Special transverse reinforcement shall be provided in that portion of
'a'. ;, I- P..
the column over a length equal to the maximum column dimension or one-sixth
of the clear height of the column, but not less than eighteen inches 18) from
either face of the joint.
d. At any section where the ultimate capacity of the column is less than
the sum of the shears (1V) computed by Formula (7-3) for all the beams fram-
ing into the column above the level under consideration, special transverse
reinforcement shall be provided. For beams framing into opposite sides of the
column, the moment components of Formula (7-3) may be assumed to be of
opposite sign. For the purpose of this determination, the factor of 1.4 in For-
mula (7-3) may be changed to 1.1. For determination of the ultimate capacity
of the column. the moments resulting from Formula (7-3) may be assumed to
result from deformation of the frame in any one principal axis.
e. Columns which support discontinuous members, such as shear walls,
qn.
... e it 3~-I_ braced frames, or other rigid elements shall have special transverse
.. reinforce-
ment for the full height of the supporting columns.
5. Column Shear. The transverse reinforcement in columns subjected
to bending and axial compression shall satisfy the formula
Av fy e =VV (7-7)
A~Va TV
where Vu shall be computed by using the ultimate moment capacity in the
ends of either the beams or columns framing into the connection. Ultimate
moment capacities shall be computed without + or other reduction factors and
under all possible vertical loading conditions and assuming the maximum re-
inforcing yield strength based on 25 percent over specified yield.
Vc=vcAc, where vc shall be in accordance with ACI 318, except that Vc shall
be considered zero where * < 0.12 fee
Ag
a = spacing, ( 1/2 minimum column dimension.
dc = dimension of column core in direction of load.
A, = total cross sectional area of special transverse reinforcement in
tension within a distance, 9, except that two-thirds of such area
shall be used in the case of circular spirals.
Ac = Area of column core.
(F) Beom-Column Connection. -
1. Analysis. The transverse reinforcement through the connection shall
7-6
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
be proportioned according to the requirements of paragraph 7(J(E)4. The
transverse reinforcement thus selected shall be checked according to the pro-
visions set forth in paragraph7-84a1AE)5 with the exception that Vu, acting
on the connection shall be equal to the maximum shears in the connection
computed by rational analysis taking into account the column shear and the
concentrated shears developed from the forces in the beam reinforcement at a
stress assumed at fy.
Within the depth of the shallowest framing member, special transverse
column reinforcement of one-half the amount in the preceding paragraph shall
be required where members frame into all four sides of a column and whose
width is at least three-fourths the column width. When a corner of a tied col-
umn, unconfined by flexural members, exceeds four inches (4'). the full special
transverse reinforcement shall be provided through the connection and around
bars outside of the connection.
Special transverse beam reinforcing shall be provided through the beam-
column connection to provide confinement for longitudinal reinforcement out-
side the column core where such confinement is not provided by another beam
framing into the connection.
2. Dsign Limitations. At any beam-column connection where Tu ;
0.12f,, the total ultimate moment capacity of the column, at the design earth-
quake axial load, shall be greater than the total ultimate moment capacity of
the beams, along the principal planes at that connection.
EXCEPTION: Where certain beam-column connections at any level
do not comply with the above limitations, the remaining columns
and connected flexural members shall comply and further shall be
capable of resisting the entire shear at that level accounting for the
altered relative rigidities and torsion resulting from the omission of
elastic action of the non-conforming beam-column connections.
-. v__..:_.
(0) Inspection.
For buildings designed under this Section, a specially qualified inspector
shall provide continuous Inspection of the placement of the reinforcement and
concrete and report to the registered professional engineer responsible for the
structural design. The inspector shall submit to the appropriate authority a
certificate indicating compliance with the plans and specifications.
(2) Summary of Major SEAOC Modifications (g) The provisions of paragraph 7-Sa(1) are
to ACI 818-77: illustrated in figures 7-2 through 7-9.
(a) Limitations of precast concrete members (3) Special modifications
(par 7-Sa(1)(A)). (al Prestressed, post-tensioned, and flat-slab
(b) Modification to design load factors para systems are not to be used as part of the lateral
(A), formula 7-1). force resisting space frame (see para 7-Sb for
(e) Limitations on grades of reinforcing steel general discussion).
(para 7-a(lHC)2). (bi Column ties will be at least No. 4 bars for
(d4 Limitations are placed on dimensions and vertical bars No. 11 or larger and for bundled bars
maximum percentage of reinforcing that can be and at least No. 3 bars for vertical bars less than No.
used (para 7-8a(1)(D)1,2). 11.
(e) Special requirements for splices, anchor- b. General Discussion. Ductility of reinforced
ages, beam stirrups, column ties and hoops, and concrete frames is accomplished by: (1) using the
joint reinforcement (para 7-3a(1XD)3. 4, (E), (F)). ~ttod of design outlined in ACI 318-77 with a
(t) Special requirements to provide the forma- bodified load factor, (2) limiting the percentage of
tion of inelastic hinges in beams rather than in col- 'steel reinforcement so that the steel will yield before
umns (pan 7-Sa(XE)4d). the concrete fails in compression, (3)confinement of
7-7
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
the concrete with special transverse reinforcement (5) All frame flexural members will have a ir
so as to prevent failure of joints under moment re- mum reinforcement ratio, p for top and botL,
versals (refer to ACI-352L, (4)proportioning mem- reinforcement of 200/fy throughout their length ex-
bers so that any yielding will be confined to the cept where a greater minimum is required by ACI
flexural members (girders) rather than to the col- 318. At least two bars will be provided, both top and
umns, and (5) avoidance of shear failure. The bottom, throughout their length.
standard acceptable method of construction for the (6) At locations where the ultimate capacity of
framing members and their connection is cast-in- a member will be developed under inelastic lateral
place monolithic reinforced concrete. It is some- displacement of the frame, the maximum p will not
times feasible to precast beam-column elements and exceed 0.025.
join them at points of minimum moment with a cast- (7) The positive moment capacity of flexural
in-place splice, so an exception is permitted (para members at columns will be at least 40 percent of
7-3a(1)(A)). However, the use of prestressing to the negative moment capacity.
develop ductile moment capacity is a subject for (8) Splices in required reinforcing of flexural
further study and is not presently permitted. The members framing into columns will not be located
use of flat slabs to develop ductile moment capacity within the column nor within a distance of twice the
is also doubtful, thus does not qualify without spe- member depth from the face of the column. At least
cial design provisions to provide an equivalent duc- two closed stirrup ties will be provided at all splices.
tile frame within the depth of the slab. Other mem- (9) Flexural member framing into a column
bers within the building, not part of the concrete where there is no flexural member on the opposite
ductile moment resisting space frame, may be pre- side will have top and bottom reinforcement extend-
cast, prestressed. composite, or any other appropri- ing to the far face of the confined region and
ate system if adequate diaphragms and connections terminated with a standard hook.
are developed so the building will respond to seismic (10) The length of anchorage in confined re-
input as a unit. These members shall comply with gions may be 0.56 d. In other regions, anchorage
the design requirements of the ACI Building Code, length will be d. In no case will the anchorage
ACI 318. length be less than 24 inches (d is developmn
7-4. Concrete Moment Resisting Space length per ACI).
Frames-Concrete Frame Types B and C (11) Stirrup ties of not less than No. 3 bars
be provided at a spacing of not over d/4 nor 12 a for a
a Concrete Frame Type B. The criteria used to distance of at least the member depth at the end of
design Type B concrete moment resisting space each flexural member and wherever ultimate capaci-
frames will be ACI 318-77 except appendix A. and ties may be reached under lateral displacement of
as modified below and illustrated in figure 7-10 the frame. The first stirrup tie will be placed 2' from
through figure 7-15. Refer to chapter 3, paragraph the face of the column.
3-6 and table 3-7, for the limitations on the use of (12J Standard stirrups will be provided at a
this type of concrete space frame. maximum spacing of 3/4d throughout the length of
(1) The provisions of paragraphs 7-3a(1XA), the flexible member, or minimum required by ACI
(B), and (D) 1 will apply (see fig 7-2). 318, whichever governs.
(2) Prestressed post-tensioned, and flat slab (13) The reinforcement ratio, p, in tied columns
systems are not to be used as part of the lateral will not be less than 0.01 nor greater than 0.06.
force resisting space frame (see para 7-3b) (14) Lap splices shall be made within the center
(3) The specified yield strength of reinforcing
steel will not exceed 60,000 p.si. half of column height, and the splice length shall not
(4) Members of the moment resisting space be less than 30 bar diameters. Continuity may also
frame will be designed for the shear that results be effected by welding or by approved mechanical
devices provided not more than alternate bars are
from the formation of inelastic joint rotations, in the welded or mechanically spliced at any level and the
same direction, at each end of the member (see fig vertical distance between these welds or splices of
7-14).
adjacent bars is not less than twenty-four inches
,(24 ).
(15) Special transverse reinforcement for col-
'Committee 352 "Recommendations for Design of Beam-
Column Joints in Monolithic Reinforced Concrete Structures." ,"Jumns will be continuous reinforcement enclosing -
ACI Journal. ProceedingsV.73, No. 28, July 1976. This reference longitudinal reinforcement and ending with
provides stat-ofthe-art summary of current information. degree bend with a 10 bar diameter extension.
7-S
TM 6-809-10
.NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
[1111
.b..6
tEZ COLUMS:
W = 12" Min,
W/C 0.4
up'
S
FLEXURAL MEMERS:
b 10", Min.
b Col. + iD, Max.
D 3.33b Max..
PEAK/COLUM HINGE:
(Hay Also Control)
If P/Ag 0.12 fec
7-9
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
i
See footnote
I -If PIAS - 0.12 f c
a, paragraph I of Columns ncluding effects
7-3b, and o P must be A 14 of flexural
Example A-2, members.
!9t.
sheet 24 of
25 -- !--t ŽMin. top reinforcing:
. 1
CTop column
(at
steel
* 2 continuous bars
* p - 2OO/fY
_~
a 25% of top steel at
I___ _ 1-f'
,?v
.I i lumn i_1
I
fill'~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
.i _. _
.4-;5
II bh
eLl
* 1MW M l _
Zrx. il' P
/ Bottom steel
Min.I bottom reinforcing:
C~ OOACD at column o 2 continuous bars
equal to a p - 200/fY
dOWrAP-0A minimum of
(See Grder- 50% of top
Column Joint A- _ __ steel at
Analysis) 4
----- column
ELEVATION OF GIRDER AND COLUMN
FLEXURAL MEMBER:
fe a 3,000 p.s.I. min. at 28 days
f 40 ksi (ASTN A615) or 60 ksi (ASTM A615 or ASTM A706)
Reinforcement-ratio, p - A /bd or p - A'/bd: p - 0.025 max.
tls is not a code requirement. It is a recommendation of
ACI Committee 352, ACI Journal, July 1976.
7-10
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 884, Chap. 13
-4V
of
I1
Ic
V
WELDED OR
I I ECHANICAL SPLICE
-S trcal about
I re fcolumn
COLUN:
Id is the tension development length. See ACT 318-77, Sect. .12.2.
At any levels not more than alternate bars
vll be welded or mechanical spliced.
Minimum distance between two adjacent bar
splices 24".
For 14S & 185 bars, welded splices are
recomnended. Lap splices will not be
used.
Reference:
paragraph 7-3
7-1
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
-~
vseno IW e8f41S
Min. hoop and tie size
is #3 for longitudinal
bars #10 or smaller, #4
for logitudinal bars #11
or larger.
I 0
II I 4
1. 1
HooP O COL UA'U r/& SPIRAL
SPIRAL RATIO: .US&D IL? COL Uk/VS
HOOP REQUIREMENTS - TOTAL TIE AREA:
IP6 0. 45 - or 0.12
A"h - 0.30 ah" ft* _ 1) or
whichever is reater.
'tFormula 7-5
X0 Formula 7-6
FUN~CTIONS
All - 0.12 y , whichever is greater.
&h
U 0
7-12
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
__ - - - - - - - __ __ i,
"lb
=tF- -
I
I
S77rRPtUPS Li
E0W
* 2 "IA1. -I
* SrRRUP - 7l-bs R&Qu/Ro (Os Ivu) &A4cH
GCW; WJ4C-- Mu MAY *& O&VC-LOPC-);
1 1.4 (D e-L) WHZC&-lc-QUIRC-& COMP C&SSO.' SrcC-L
OCCUR2; AJIWAr ALL SPeCC-S.
I11 I I II II
C~~~~l
A LOADWGr
N
DESIGW: Vertical web reinforcement in accor-
dance with Chapter 11 of ACI 318, and the mini-
mum requirements in paragraph 7-3a(1)(D) as
indicated herein.
P1t
7-13
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
7-14
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
-U~F A A4tJO.-:
4 AAX. COL. D1UCAS1WV;
ft - CL&AWR Herlam7S;
OR la V
Reference:
paragraph 7-3
I1
7-16
TM 5-60-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 68-3, Chap. 13
-==-+ r=ztAs
k4
OPR
I
POIWr OP
.4 A/-C 20
K - -V- As --4
oe UV
5 g If
~WHURUaw 0a7t. w
xcp; r Ww OA,
4 .12 A
(Yr yr)e THUAm T4 a a
S. 4MAX.._'
Only 1/2 the special transverse reinforcement
Is required for columns where girders frame
Into all four sides.
NOTE: Column Confining Reinforcerant s a inimua and
may govern. See Figure 7-5.
The amount of reinforcement at the
intersections frequently results in
congestion of bars. A careful study Reference:
of the bar layouts should be made paragraph 7-3
during design.
7-16
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
plementary cross ties, if needed, will have standard cept that such web reinforcement shall not be less
hooks at the ends. Single leg cross ties may be lap than 0.0016 times the product of the width of the
spliced if a minimum of 20 diameter lap is provided. web and the spacing of the web reinforcement along
Refer to figure 7-13. the longitudinal axis of the member. The first stir-
(16) At the ends of columns, special transverse rup will be located at 2 inches from the column face.
reinforcement will be provided over a length equal The next six stirrups will be placed not over d/4.
to the maximum column dimension or one-sixth the (3) Positive moment reinforcement at the sup-
clear height of the column, but not less than 18" ports of flexural members subject to reversal of
from either face of the joint. This transverse rein- moments will be anchored by bond, hooks, or me-
forcement will be spaced at not over 4 on center chanical anchors in or through the supporting
and have a total cross-sectional area of not less than member to develop the yield strength of the bar. The
A'S=0.08 ah f' (see para 7-3a(l)E)4 for
positive moment capacity of flexural members at
ah definition of terms) columns will be at least 0 percent of the negative
capacity.
(17) A inimum special transverse reinforce- (4) Lapped splices in flexural members, located
ment of No. 4 at a maximum spacing of 4 on center,
or equivalent, will be provided throughout the in a region of tension or reversing stress, will be con-
beam-column joint. The requirement for cross ties fined by at least two stirrups at each splice.
(fig 7-13) may be omitted within the joint if the lon- (5) The spacing of ties at the ends of tied col-
gitudinal column bars are confined by adjoining umns will not exceed 4 inches for a distance equal to
the maximum column dimension but not less than
beams. onesixth of the clear height of the column from the
b. Concrete Frame Type C. The criteria used to face of the joint. The first such tie will be located 2
design Type C concrete moment resisting space inches from the face of the joint. Joints of exterior
frames will be ACI 318-77 except appendix A, and and corner columns will be confined by lateral rein-
as modified below. This type of space frame is lim- forcement through the joint. Such lateral reinforce-
ited in use to Seismic Zone 1, for K not less than 1.0, ment will consist of spirals or ties as required at the
and for buildings not taller than 80 feet, when de- ends of columns.
signed to resist earthquake forces (see chap 3, para
8-6 and table 8-7). 7-5. Steel ductile moment resisting space
(1) For earthquake loading ACI 318 load fac- frames-Steel Frame Type A.
tors will be modified to formulas 7-1 and 7-2 in a. General Design Crteria.The criteria used to
paragraph 7-3a(lXA), and the dimensional limits of design steel ductile moment resisting space frames
paragraph 7-3a(1KD)1 will apply (see fig 7-2). will be the latest edition of AISC Specification as
(2) Flexural members are required to have web modified by SEAOC Section 4 (reprinted below).
reinforcement throughout the length of the member. (1) SEAOC Section 4 Steel Ductile Moment-
It will be designed in accordance with ACI-318 ex- Resisting Space Frames:*
(A) General.
Design and construction of steel framing in ductile moment resisting
space frames shall conform to the latest edition of the American Institute of
Steel Construction "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of
Structural Steel for Buildings" and the American Welding Society's "Struc-
tural Welding Code" AWS D1.1 latest edition and to all the requirements of
this Section.
(B) DefInitions.
CONNECTION consists of only those elements that connect the member
to the joint.
JOINT is the entire assemblage at the intersections of the members.
7-17
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
k,'*1 W k". .l
*/V/j . at
.f fOdNi3Y * -
Ifla92
St-L o~ eas
' OfE
I
A._
p' L 3sg.
._
F4R3w5yOdN13R
.
1
Reference:
paragraph 7-4
WAShW&Va 7/7?d9
7-18
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
_
m
_
_
_
- m
r. & 25Z of top steel at
'column
3T1. Hoo_/
/ I
Ik..-e - I
ZIX-- 4 ttom steel at Q'Kin. bottom reinforcing:
/ column equal to * 2 continuous bars
a minimum of 40% * P - 200/fy
L/OJrARC-A of top steel at
(See para- column
giaph 7-4a(7_
ELEVATION OF GIRDER AND COLUMN
FLEXURAL MEMBER: COLUMN
fec - 3,000 p.s.t. in. at 28 days
fy - 40 ksi (ASIN A615) or 60 ksi (ASTM A615 or A706).
Reinforcement ratio p - A/bd or p' - A;/bd: p 0.025 max.
t5 is'not a code requirement. It is a recommendation of ACI
Coimittee 352, ACI Journal, July 1976.
L (Anchorage) - 0.56 1 OR Mn. 24" *00TE: For 1d, development length
of deformed bars in ten-
L a 1d for Top Member (ithout column above t) uions see AdCI 318-7,
Sect-. 12.2.
COLUMN:
fS - 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days Mim.
f a 40 ksi (AST A) or 60 ki (ASTH A615 or ASTH A706)
Reinforcement ratio p (for tied columns)
& 0.01 and 0.06.
Reference:
paragraph 7-4
FiWure 7-11. Cncrete ane pe B - Legitudia Rinforcewnt
7-19
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
- of Splice
la WELDED OR
MCHANICAL SPLICE
Provide at least
two stirrup-ties.
Symetrical about
iof column
COLUMN:
Id LB the tension development length. See ACI 318-77, Sect. 12.2.
At any level, not more than alternate bars
will be welded or mechanical spliced. Min.
distance between two adjacent bar splices 24".
Reference:
paragraph 7-4
a.
7-20
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
I
S6 rl/z R UPI Il j
S7S7J -
USC WI A AW
no* ah Min. hoop and tie size
is 3 for longitudinal
bars 10 and smaller, and
#4 for longitudinal bars
4:
39~~~~-
TCR 03$ *776
I
0
i
m_ L~~.
I
a
__ -- L
FUNCTIONS ' r
Shear Reinforcement * * * *
.An "gIngt - -
Reference:
paragraph 7-4
Restrain Longitudinal * * * *
Steel From uckling
Confine Concrete _
Figure 7-13. Concrete Frome Type,.- - Transverse Reinforcement
7-21
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 86-3. Chap. 13
S A4X.- 4; 8R srIgnup
*Mr/eISOjR
le
71 . 2'WMf1CHMfit.Q
C A 1* W ICr$~
I ' jmIv -
I~ lI
~~. .
_._ *_ .
iI ii I I I I IUI V A:4~&4
sO+
~ +
c.. .
co~da"D SA/89.0
x. -i* . Av A! Reference:
- paragraph 7-4
ftVa . 0"R b d
K " .Ya / v
Figure 7-24. Concrete Frame ype . - Oirder Web Reinforcement
'-/
7-22
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
7-23
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
(C) Materials.
Structural steel shall conform to one of the following ASTM Specifica
tions, latest edition: A36 A441, A500 (Grades B and Q ASOI, A572 (Grades
4Z 45 50 and 55A or A58& Exceptions: Structural Steel ASTM A283 Grade D
may be used for base plates and anchor bolts.
(D) Connections.
Each beam or girder moment connection to a column shall be capable of
developing in the beam the full plastic capacity of the beam or girder.
EXCEPTION: The connection need not develop the full plastic capa-
city of the beam or girder if it can be shown that adequately ductile
joint displacement capacity is provided with a lesser connection.
For steel whose specified ultimate strength is less than 1.5 of the specified
yield strength, plastic hinges in beams formed during inelastic deformations of
the frame shall not occur at locations in which the beam flange area has been
reduced such as by holes for bolts.
(E) Local Buckling.
Members in which hinges will form during inelastic displacement of the
frames shall comply with the requirements for "plastic design sections."
(F) Non-DestructiveWeldTesting.
Tension groove welded connections between primary members of the duc-
tile moment resisting space frame shall be tested by non-destructive methods
for compliance with AWS D1.1 and job specifications. A program for this
testing shall be established by the engineer.
7-U
A
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
71.1 Q I 'I
,4 '- K111,14,
A/OCT:
W5LDS UU4e 10S VAS
SMOJ LLer WdL/3S A r P-U-L. PdVI-
ZMeArWio bUrr W61 LOs. aM6 ,dc'YiUwG SrRZsfP oe CH/PA/21
WC- 5ACM/GAJ W&LDS.
THG PVREP0S6 0P 77R/S eC-wA AUD GIAD&f2 coJJ/Jec7a'1 ro
rZeW coLUcI /3 ro Je&VCLOP 7ri6 P414L psric CAPAC1TV
or-- 5A AUD
07HeR CO JUc7-IO/oIX-rAILS WN/CRAR& CAPA,5L& O.
D&MVLOPIA/GI TrMPLAST7C CAPACITY Or-7bI - COAlVC-CMD
AbC-AA48 A.J GdI&RO&S MAY t3C- Us-4.
7-25
TM 6-09-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
CHAPTER 8
REINFORCED MASONRY
8-1. Purpose and scope. This chapter pre- masonry in resisting forces. Joint reinforcement is
scribes the criteria for design of masonry construc- an assemblage of steel reinforcing wires designed
tion for buildings in seismic areas. for use in masonry bed joints, serving to distribute
stresses and to tie separate wythes together.
8-2. General. Unit-masonry shall be reinforced
with deformed bare for axial, flexural, shear, and di- c. Masonry Wal A vertical, plate-like element
agonal tension stresses as determined by design cal- (whose horizontal dimension exceeds five times its
culations. In addition, there are several prescribed thickness) constructed of stone, brick, concrete ma-
arbitrary limitations on dimensions and reinforce- sonry units, glazed structural units, or other suit-
ment requirements; for example: (1) the ninimum able masonry materials:
thickness of a wall (or partition) is governed by the (1) Load bearingwall Any wall which in addi,
type (structural role) or wall and the height between tion to supporting its own weight supports other
supporting diaphragms, and (2) the manimum loads (floors, roofs, walls, etc.).
spacing and minimum area of reinforcing bars de (2) Nonad bearingwalL Any wall which does
pend upon the type of wall and the seismic zone. not intentionally support the building above it.
Additional reinforcing bars are prescribed for use (3) Shear wall Any wall which resists a horizon-
around openings, at comers, anchored intersections, tal force applied in the plane of the wall (i.e., any
in wall piers, and at end of wall-panels such as at wall unless isolated along 3 edges).
control joints. The minimum reinforcement pre- (4) Structural wall Any wall which serves in
scribed in the manual is to provide empirical require- providing resistance to loads or forces other than
ments relative to damage control ductility and those induced by the weight of the wall itself.
boundary conditions). No attempt is made to go into (5) Exterior wall Any outer wall serving as a
great detail regarding seismic load assumptions and vertical enclosure of a building.
stress distribution. These are covered elsewhere in (6) Partition.Any interior wall (or vice versa).
the manual. (7) Filler wall. A non-bearing wall in skeleton
frame construction, built between steel or concrete
8-3. Definitions. Unless otherwise expressly vertical load-carrying space frame and wholly sup-
stated, the following terms shall, for the purpose of ported at each story.
this chapter, have the meaning indicated herein. (8) Composite wall A two-wythe wall in which
Where terms are not defined they shall have their the wythes are of different material. The wythes are
ordinarily accepted meanings, or such as the context so bonded as to exert a common reaction under load.
may imply. GSU faced masonry and BzickICMU grouted ma-
a. Reinforced Masonry. Masonry units, reinforce- sonry are composite walls.
ment, grout, and mortar combined in such a manner (9) Cavity wall A wall built of masonry units so
that the component materials act together in resist- arranged as to provide a continuous air space within
ing forces, and with at least the minimum reinforce. the wall (with or without insulating material) and In
ment as prescribed by this chapter: which both the inner and outer wythes of the wall
(1) Grouted masonry. Multi-wythe masonry are reinforced so as to separately resist seismic
construction in which the space between wythes is forces in proportion to their rigidities.
solidly filled with grout. (10) Veneered walL A masonry faced wall n
(2) Hollow masonry. Single-wythe masonry which the veneer is attached to the back-up wall. It
construction composed of hollow units in which cells will not be considered as part of the wall in comput-
and voids containing reinforcing bars or embedded ing strength nor considered a part of the required
items are filled with gout as the work progresses. thickness of wall.
(3) Filled cell masonry. Single-wythe masonry d StructuralMembers
construction composed of hollow-units in which all _ (1) Pilaster.An integral portion of a wall which
voids are filled with grout after the wall is laid. prbjects from either or both wall faces which may
b. Reinforcement. Deformed reinforcing bars or Nerve as either a vertical beam or column or both.
joint reinforcement embedded or incased in unit- (2) Column. A compression member, vertical or
masonry in such a manner that it works with the nearly vertical, the width of which does not exceed
0-1
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
three times its thickness and the height of which ex- (6) Low-lift grouting method contemplates
ceeds four times its least lateral dimension. Any grout will be poured in small increments not exc&ew
portion of a bearing wall not bonded at the sides into ing 4 feet as the masonry work progresses.
associated masonry shall be considered a column (7) High-lift grouting method contemplates
when its horizontal dimension does not exceed three that grout will be pumped into all wall voids after
times its thickness. The least nominal dimension of the masonry units, reinforcing steel, and embedded
every masonry column or wall pilaster shall be not items are built to full story height. High-lift grout is
less than 12 inches. No masonry column will have an placed in one continuous pour by lifts which allow
unsupported length greater than eighteen times its time for consolidation and loss of water, but placed
least nominal dimension. Refer to paragraph 8-14. at such a rate as not to form intermediate construc-
(3) Wall-paneL A wall segment in one plane tion joints or blowouts.
which lies between: (1)wall ends, 2) control joints, f. Letter symbols are defined or illustrated where
or (3)a control joint and wall end. Each wall-panel is first used and arranged alphabetically in figure 8-1.
considered to be a separate vertical structural ele-
ment. 8-4. Basis of design. Previous chapters of this
(4) Pier. An upright part of a wall between (or manual establish the basis for determining seismic
adjacent to) openings, the width of which does not forces. This chapter prescribes the criteria for the
exceed five times its thickness. Design as column if structural design of unit-masonry construction. Ex-
width is less than three times the thickness; design terior walls, partitions, and all masonry elements
as a wall if width exceeds five times the thickness. will be reinforced with steel. Layout and details of
See paragraph 8-15, table 8-7, and figure 8-6. construction shall be compatible with the applica-
(5) Lintel A beam located over any opening in a tion of the rules for modular measure. Masonry shall
wall to carry weight of the construction and super- conform to one of the following basic types: (1)rein-
imposed loads above the opening. forced grouted masonry, (2) reinforced hollow
(6) Bond beam. A horizontal reinforced ma- masonry, or (3) reinforced filled-cell masonry. For
sonry beam, serving as an integral part of the wall. any specific facility, the adoption of the type of con-
Its principle purpose is to provide structural integ- struction, use of bases and wainscots, and selec'
rity and in turn crack-controL It may also serve as a of materials, including contractor's options, w y
chord (flange) member of a horizontal diaphragm governed by manuals and guide specifications of AV
provided reinforcement steel is made continuous for plicable agency. For Zone 1 structures, the excep-
full length of the diaphragm. tion for wall reinforcement under paragraph 8-13,
(7) Lateral support. Members such as cross table 8-5, applies. Where the exception applies,
walls, columns, pilasters, buttresses, floors, roofs, or masonry construction shall conform to TM
spandrel beams which have sufficient strength and 5-809-3/AFM-88-3, chapter 3 and NAVFAC
stability to resist the horizontal forces transmitted DM2.6.
to them may be considered as lateral supports.
8-5. Design criteria. The design assumptions for
a Terminology reinforced unit-masonry, as regards the theory of
(1) Controljoint. A continuous vertical joint in stress distribution and analysis, will be based on the
a wall designed to accommodate movements result- principles governing the design of reinforced con-
ing from temperature and moisture changes. crete, except as modified hereinafter. Reinforced
(2) Wythe Each continuous vertical section of a masonry will not be used in rigid frames. Where
wall, one masonry unit in thickness. only intermittent cells are filled with grout, the f-
(3) Collarjoint. The continuous vertical, longi- fective area for structural sections will be governed
tudinal joint between two wythes of masonry. by table 8-1 and figures 8-2 and 8-3. Several
(4) Grout. A mixture of portland cement, aggre- arbitrary limitations on dimensions and reinforcing
gates, and water which is proportioned to produce are prescribed. The masonry construction must not
pouring or pumping consistency without segrega- only meet these arbitrary prescribed limits and re-
tion of the constituents, serving to fill cells, voids, or quirements, but must also be structurally safe for
collar joints in masonry walls so as to encase rein- the loads and forces that will be applied.
forcing and bond units together for composite
action. ,I-6. Working stresses. All reinforced masonry
(5) Mortar. A plastic mixture of portland 'will be so designed and detailed that the
cement and lime (or masonry cement), fine aggre- stresses do not exceed those required by tables
gate, and water used to bond masonry. and 8-3. The shear and diagonal tension stresses re-
6-2
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
X?
'-4
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Table 8-la. Assuned Dimenzions (Inches) for Effective Area
of Concrete BZock (Figures 8-2 and 8-3)
. .,
PtI
.t%:
8-4
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Double-Bar Single-Bar
Stud, Stud
M. . . T:
6-5
TM 5-60-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 83, Chap. 13
YT OF S So
8I = MOW UIT 2 SOLD & OMO Us
for Cdes of Materl to
f 1,500 pOsL fe a 1,350 psi
pcifed" Building Bricks Concrete asonry *or materials where
AM C62, Units AST C90, ultiate compressive
Crade KW or SW Crade N-1 strtss (f ) is
Iteing Bricks Glazed Structussl *stabllsJ t
13STH C2169 racing Units$ approved prism tests.
Grade KW or SW AST C126 Type I but not to exceed
Concrete Building Hollow Brick Unit:
Bricks ASTH C55, AS3T C652 Grade
ASTH C145 Type - MW or SW
. ~~~~~~~~~~~~To
xced
J.
0-7
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
suiting from the prescribed earthquake forces shall struction in structural steel or reinforced concr,
be increased by 50 percent (see chap 3, para above the 80 feet, provided isolation compat 1
3-3(J)lh). In walls or other structural members com- with three times (or 31K where K < 1.0) the floors
posed of different kinds or grades of units, floor drift is assured by the detailing.
materials, or mortars, the maximum stress will not
exceed the allowable stress for the weakest of the 8-9. Vertical support. Members (girder, beams,
combinations of units, materials, and mortars of ledgers, etc.) which provide vertical load support
which the member is composed. will be limited to non-combustible construction. The
vertical support will be such that the maximum de-
Table 84 AUowable Stresses forReinforcingBars flection of the support under all design dead and live
Type of Stress PSI loads will not exceed L/600 where L is the clear span
Tensile 20,0001 of the support. To limit settlement cracking, it is es-
Compression. Columns2 sential that temporary shores be removed before
Bond-Plain Bars 60 erecting masonry.
Bond-Deformed Bars 140
'For deformed bars with a yield strength of 60,000 psi or more 8-10. Lateral support. Exterior shear walls and
and in sizes No. II and smaller. use 24,000 pai shear partitions shall be anchored to the structural
2
* 'i....N.
0r 40 percent of yield strength, but not to exceed 24,000 psi. frame or diaphragm (horizontal resisting element)
by dowels, anchor bolts, or other approved methods
. Allowable axial unit stresses in walls are de- to withstand applicable horizontal forces, normal to
termined by the following formula: face, but in no case less than 200 pounds per lineal
F.-0.20 fl I (it I] (8-1) foot. Dovetail anchors are inadequate for this pur-
b. Allowable axial forces in columns are deter- pose. Nonstructural partitions should be isolated
mined by the following formula: from exterior walls and shear partitions so as to pre-
vent buttress action which would restrict shear
F., _(0.8f,+0.65 Pf,-40t_8-2) walls from deflecting with the diaphragms. Isolated
c. Combinations of axial and flexural stresses will masonry partitions shall be braced to overhead con-
satisfy the following formula: struction or anchored to other isolated cross-wall
assure lateral stability (refer to chap 9, para
f h C . {or C 1.33 when in combin- 83 and fig 9-1). Wedges will not be used between topv
_4 A 41-0ation with seismic or wind)
partition and framing.
d See Figure 8-1 for symbols and nomenclature.
8-11. Lintel beams. Lintels are formed by
8-7. General design. In calculating wall placing beam units over openings and reinforcing
stresses, concentrated loads may be distributed with a minimum of two #4 bars embedded in
over a length of wall not exceeding the center to cen- concrete corefill. Reinforcement shall extend 40-bar
ter distance between loads. Where the concentrated diameters or 24 inches, whichever is greater, beyond
loads are not distributed through a structural ele- each face of opening; reinforcement shall be sup-
ment, the length of wall considered shall not exceed ported by wire chairs to insure proper coverage of
the width of bearing plus four times the wall steel. Steel stirrups will be provided as required.
thickness. Concentrated loads shall not be distrib- Bond beams serving as lintels shall be provided with
uted across continuous vertical joints. Due allow- supplemental steel as required.
ance will be made for the effect of eccentric loads.
including additional moments caused by any end 8-12. Bond beams. Reinforcement bars in bond
rotation of floor or roof elements framing into walls. beams will be lapped 40 diameters or 24 inches.
Effective width in computing flexural stresses per whichever is greater, at splices, at intersections, and
reinforcing bar shall not be greater than six times at comers. Bar splices will be staggered. Bond
the wall thickness or 48 inches for running bond or beams will be provided at top of masonry founda-
three times the wall thickness or 24 inches for tion wall stems, below and at top of openings or
stacked bond (fig 8-3(b)). immediately above lintels, at floor and roof levels,
and at top of parapet walls. Intermediate bond
8-8. Height above grade limitation. Unit. . beams will be provided as required to conform to the
masonry construction will not be used for shear . 'maximum spacing of, horizontal bars (para 8-13b,
walls where the structure exceeds 80 feet in height * table 8-5). However, whenever the height is -"
above the adjacent ground level. Nonstructural ma- multiple of this normal spacing, the spacing =
sonry partitions may be used with skeleton con- increased up to a maximum of 24 inches prou.d
6-s
II.A
C ( (
W- 0
'S
a
.0
m
z
I'
Ino
0 a
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
the bond beams are supplemented with joint rein 24 inches minimum
forcement. One line of joint reinforcement will be
provided for each 8-inch increase in the spacing. No Table 8-4 Maximum UnsupportedWail Height orLengtr
additional bond beam will be required between win-
dow openings which do not exceed 6 feet in height, Max. height
provided the prescribed supplemental joint rein- Nominal or length
forcement is installed. To facilitate placement of Type of walbic
TIW
o well
ewan
thicknesa
between
diaphragms
steel or concrete corefill, the top bond beam for filler (inches? or supports
walls or partitions may be placed in next to top Ifeet)
course. The area of bond beam reinforcement shall
be included as part of the minimum horizontal steel.
See figure 8-4. Structural 8 12
(lead-bearing 8 16
8-13. Walls and partitions. Masonry walls and or shearl 10 20
12 24
partitions shall be designed for applicable vertical 14 28
loads and horizontal forces, both parallel and normal 16 32
to face, with due allowance for the effect of any ec-
centric loadings. Since distribution of lateral forces
to any wall-panel depends upon the relative stiffness naonstructural 4* 10
of the various vertical resisting elements at the par- 8 24
ticular level, the location of control-joints must be 10 30
established before distribution of the lateral forces 12 36
is made. For more complete discussion of lateral 14 36
force distribution refer to chapter 4, paragraph 4-4, 18 36
and chapter 6, paragraph 6-2. The resulting stresses msnya ~~~~ rsbebytis
reinforced car
will comply with the requirements of paragraph 8-6. *4-inch wafta In Zone I only ini buildings not
In addition, there are certain prescribed arbitrary exceeding three stories.
limitations on wall dimensions, minimum reinforce-
8-14. Columns and plasters. Masonry
ment, and maximum bar spacings. umna and pilasters (fig 8-5) will be constructy
a. Height and Thickness Limitations. The mini- reinforced masonry as prescribed by this chapl&
mum nominal thickness of a wall is controlled by the and will be designed to withstand all horizontal and
type (structural role) of the wall and the height and vertical loads. Masonry columns or pilasters will not
width between supports. Table 8-4 applies. be used to qualify a structure for a complete vertical
b. Minimum Reinforcement. Unit-masonry needs load-carrying space frame so as to reduce the factor
to be reinforced not only for structural strength but "K" below 1.33 of a box system. Masonry columns
to provide ductile properties and to hold it together will not be used in rigid frame construction.
in the event of severe seismic disturbanct. All walls a. Limiting Dimensions. The least nominal di-
and partitions will be reinforced as required by mension of every masonry column or wall pilaster
,structural calculations, but in no case, less than the will be not less than 12 inches. No masonry column
minimum area of steel and the maximnum spacing of or pilaster will have an unsupported length greater
bars prescribed below. The minimum reinforcement than 18 times its least nominal dimension. Table
and the maximum spacing of bars is controlled by 8-6 applies (also, see pars 8-3d and table 8-7).
the type of wall and the seismic zone. Table 8-5 ap- b. AUowable Loads. The maximum allowable ax
plies. Only reinforcement which is continuous in any ial load on columns and pilasters will be governed by
wall-panel will be considered in computing the paragraph 8-6 (formula 8-2).
minimum area of reinforcement. Joint-reinforce-
ment used for crack-control or mechanical bonding c. Vertical Reinforcement. Vertical reinforcement
may be considered as part of the total minimum hor- will be neither less than 0.005A& nor more than
izontal reinforcement, but will not be used to resist 0.04Ag, where Ag is gross area of column. Not less
computed stresses. Further, additional bars will be than four #4 bars will be used. Bars will be lapped 30
provided around openings, at corners, anchored in- C> diameters.
tersections, in wall piers, and at ends of wall-panels ,fi d Lateral Ties. Hoop ties of not less than 12 hars
as prescribed elsewhere in this chapter. Vertical for #7 or smaller vertical reinforcement and ( a
bars in walls will be lapped spliced 40 diameters or for larger reinforcement will be spaced apa.__.ot
-10
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Table 8-5. Minimum Wal Reinforcement
NOTES
IThe total minimum reinforcement b the sum of the vertical and horizontal reinforcement; not
les tha 11 of the prescribed total inum reinforcement l be used In ether direction.
sThe percentage of area reinforcement is based on gross area of wall (nominal dimensions).
. .
sException: In Seismic Zone 1. one story structures with eave heights not exceeding 14 feet; and
two and three story structures with story heights not exceeding 12 feet may be reinforced or par-
tially reinforced masonry. These structures must be capable of resisting seismic zone 1 loads but
wilI be designed by the usual non-seismic criteria. (Partially reinforced masonry shall be designed
as unreinforced masonry except that reinforcement is provided in some areas to resist flexural
tension stresses. The maximun spacing of vertical reinforcement shall be 8 feet. Vertical rein-
forcement shall be provided at each aide of each opening and each corner of all walls Horizontal
reinforcement shal be provided at top of footings, at bottom and top of openings, at roof and
floor levels, and at top of parapet walls.)
over 16 bar diameters, 48 tie diameters, or the least bottom of opening. The lintel bars above the open-
nominal dimension of the column. Lateral ties will ing may serve as the top horizontal bar and a bond
11-1 be in contact with the vertical steel and not in the beam bar at the bottom of the opening may serve as
horizontal bed joints. Lateral ties shall be placed not the bottom horizontal bar. Case I applies to: (1)all
vft less than 1-1/2 inches nor more than 3 inches from openings in nonstructural partitions over 100
the top of column. Additional ties of three 13 bars square inches, and (2)any opening in structural par-
shall be placed within the top 6 inches of column. titions or exterior walls which is 2 feet or less both
ways but over 100 square inches.
8-15. Wall piers. Masonry wall piers will be de-
signed to withstand all horizontal and vertical b. Case II. The perimeter reinforcement will be
loads. Every pier or wall section whose height ex- the same as in Case I plus additional reinforcement
ceeds four times its thickness and whose width is as follows: provide at least one bar, #4 or larger, on
less than three times its thickness will be designed all four sides of the opening in addition to required
and constructed as required for columns. Every pier bars in Case I and shall extend not less than 40 bar
or wall section whose width is between three and diameters or 24 inches, whichever is larger, beyond
five times its thickness will have all horizontal steel corners of the opening. Case II applies to exterior
in the form of ties. Table 8-7 and figure 8-6 apply. walls and structural partitions for any opening
which exceeds 2 feet but not over 4 feet in any direc-
8-16. Wall openings. Since the area ground wall tion.
openings is vulnerable to failure, supplemental c, Case III. The perimeter reinforcement will be
reinforcement around the perimeter of openings is the same as in Case II, except that vertical jamb
prescribed herein. For purpose of this paragraph, bars will be provided in lieu of the shorter vertical
the term "jamb bars" shall mean bars of the same bars. Case III applies to any opening which exceeds
size, number, extent, and anchorage as the typical 4 feet in either direction in exterior walls or struc-
vertical stud reinforcement in that wall, and in no tural partitions.
case less than one bar, #4 or larger. Refer to figure
8-7. B-17. Stacked bond. Since a running bond pat-
a Case I. Provide jamb bars on each side of tern is the strongest and most economical, the
opening and at least one bar, #4 or larger, at top and criteria in this manual are based upon each wythe of
0-11
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
I
Tabte 8-6. Coiwim o PiMaster Height Limitation
i,
Uni t
'-
S-12
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-45
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Table 8-7. Dimensfon of Falt Pier. (Inohe8)
Nominal
Nomnal Design
Column as
If: a Design s a Design as a
thalles Pier If Wall If
(inches) W less h greater WEquals W Exceeds
than than
6 24* 24 24 - 32 32
8 24* 32 24 - 40 40
10 32* 40 32 - 48 48
12 40 48 40 - 64 64
16 48 61 48 - 80 80
Design Paragraph 8-14 Paragraph 8-15 Paragraph 8-13
Criteria For additional reinforcement around
openings, see paragraph 8-16
*Requires pilaster
I ~~ ~ ~ VI4ALL LEVA W .
, 1|,ll~.V
v
I r~TLs -I
ma CTIGWI
15asi~ Li!;cj
I
I
_~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~I >- I I l1
4 _ as ~~~~~~~~t
_
P1
1'
8-44
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
masonry walls being constructed in a running bond feet height. The deflection of a supporting lintel wili
pattern. Use of stacked bond pattern will be re- be limited to L/600.
striated to reinforced walls essential to the b. Adhered veneer is masonry veneer attached to
architectural treatment. Filled cell masonry or the backing with minimum 8/8 inch to maximum 8/4
grouted masonry shall be used. For filled cell ma.
inch mortar or with approved thin set latex Port-
sonry, open end blocks shall be used and so arranged land cement mortar. The bond of the mortar to the
that closed ends are not abutting. supporting element shall be capable of withstanding
8-18. Cavity walls. This form of construction is a shear stress of 50 p.s.i. Maximum thickness of the
commonly used where resistance to rain penetration veneer shall be limited to 1 Inch. Since adhered ve-
is desired and where thermal insulation may be pro- neer is supported through adhesion to the mortar
vided. The two wythes of the wall forming the applied over a backup, consideration shall be given
cavity must be separately reinforced and thus de- for differential movement of supports including that
signed as independent structural walls. There is no caused by temperature, shrinkage, creep, and deflec-
limitation on the width of the cavity. The wall thick- tion. A horizontal expansion joint in the veneer is
ness and heights must comply with table 8-4. If the recommended at each floor level to prevent spalling.
exterior wythe is tied to the reinforced Inner wythe Vertical control joints should be provided in the ve-
but is nonbearing and isolated on three sides, the ex- neer at each control joint in the backup.
terior wythe may be unreinforced, in which case this
construction may be considered as an anchored 8-20. Three basic types of reinforced ma-
veneer and must comply with requirement for an- sonry walls. a. Reinforced grouted masonry is
chored veneer. that type of construction made with two wythes of
EXCEPTION: Seismic Zone 1, see table 8-S exceptions, cav- masonry units in which the collar joint between is
ity wafls may be designed In accordance with TM-5 -S09-S. reinforced and filled solidly with concrete grout. The
AFM 884. chapter S and NAVFAC DM-2.6. grout may be placed as the work progresses or after
the masonry units are laid. Collar joints will be rein-
8-19. Veneered wall. There are two methods for forced with deformed bars, both vertical and hori-
attaching veneer to a backup structural wall (see fig zontal. Reinforcement and embedded items such as
8-8). structural connections and electrical conduit shall
a Anchored veneer is a masonry facing secured be positioned so as to allow proper placement of
by joint reinforcement or equivalent mechanical tie grout. All units will be laid in running bond with full
attached to the backup. All required load carrying shoved head and bed mortar joints. Masonry head-
capacity (both vertical and lateral) shall be provided ers will not project into grout spaces. Clipped-brick
by the structural backup wall. The veneer shall be headers will be used where the appearance of ma-
nonbearing and isolated on three edges to preclude sonry:headers is required. See figure 8-9.
It from resisting any load other than its own weight (1) High-fift grouting procedures contemplate
and in no case shall it be considered part of the wall that: first, both vertical and horizontal bars are erec-
in computing required thickness of a masonry wall. ted; then, the masonry units are laid. one wythe of
The veneer shall be not less than 1-112 inches nor masonry on each side of the reinforcement, with
more than 5 inches thick. The veneer will be tied to space between for grout; finally, after the masonry
the structural wall with 816 inch round corrosion is built a full story height, the collar joint is filled
resisting metal ties or joint reinforcement capable of solidly with concrete grout. As the work progresses.
resisting in tension or compression, the wind load or both wythes shall be kept approximately at the
two times the weight of veneer, whichever governs. same height to accommodate the wall ties (or ladder
Maximum spacing of ties is 16 inches and a tie must bars) spaced not to exceed 24 inches horizontally
be provided for each two square feet of wiall area. and 16 inches vertically to resist the hydrostatic
Adjustable ties are not permitted. The maximum pressures of the fluid grout. These ties shall be laid
space between the veneer and the backing shall not In the mortar bed and all ties shall be in the same
exceed 2 inches unless spot mortar bedding is line vertically in order to facilitate the vibrating of
provided to stiffen the ties. A noncombustible, non- the grout pours. Width of the grout space shall be
corrosive horizontal structural framing shall be not less than 3-1/2 inches and the wall shall be con-
provided for vertical support of the veneer. he tructed so as to preserve an unobstructed vertical
maximum vertical distance between horizontal sup- Alignment of the grout space. Cleanout openings
ports shall not exceed 25 feet above the adjacent ihall be provided at the bottom of each pour. The
ground and 12 feet maximum spacing above the 25 openings shall be of sufficient size and location to
6-Is
TM 609-10
NAVFAC P-M5
AFM -3,Chap. 13
AOO.9 St.AS
MA7 "L.
CAVITY
.F~
NJ _5l<;+47AL TIE
PIWLL
I
ORz. oiwr
Amt/A CdAJ.v
NOr P" UTMi
_. fSIRf K U
'4' P:-0LAN@
TIN Yomosit
PJ^X. NA.
'THIIM - .8TRUCT.UAL
loJIAX
O 7A U*
,no if wwf W *
_ P- _
*,&ACKE,= ' I
. AWA. LATM.- PLANS
(. ,o r.,____
-l Z rD0iJ~
Mi E. -
84i
TM 5--10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
24"/I/Z. RUfN'
l;."Witt I OND
enAR, 1 .fTl
ACK
ie" V6IC~T. J i~o~n
PROVI.f VUIAICAL.
CRAOUT ^AstihR
e AO' MAX.`
GR&O'or,
rMLU17JINE
*APP..IE$ O MIGH,
Lur- CoNiJ7ocroN
7rm
me ON4Lr
GRkourer MAJOWNRY
Fism 8-9. Retf2ce laonry WaZ~s
u He _~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
F-It
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
allow flushing away of mortar droppings and debris. hollow masonry units are laid to full height of J
All mortar droppings and overhangs shall be re wall with horizontal bars and joint reinforcemei.,
moved from the foundation or bearing surface and being placed as the masonry work progresses; the
reinforcing. A sand bed or plastic filma will prevent vertical bars may be either erected first or dropped
mortar droppings from bonding to the foundation into position after the wall is erected. Finally, all
wall. Dislodge any hardened mortar from the collar cores and voids are grouted solidly by the high-lift
joint wall surfaces and reinforcing with a pole or rod grouting method. Use of open end units is preferred
and remove the mortar debris prior to cleanup and and bond-beam units are required at all horizontal
grouting. All cleanout closures, reinforcing, bolts, bar locations. Both horizontal and vertical reinforce-
and embedded connection items shall be in position ment shall be held in position by wire ties or spacing
before grouting is started. Grout shall be handled devices near each end and at intervals not exceeding
from the mixer to the point of deposit in the grout 160-bar diameters. The contact surface of all foun-
space as rapidly as practical by pumping and dations and floors that are to receive masonry work
placing methods which will prevent segregation of shall be cleaned and roughened before start of
the mix and cause a minimum of grout splatter on laying. It shall be protected during construction to
... reinforcing and masonry unit surfaces not being insure a good bond between the grout fill and con-
immediately encased in the grout lift. Use of the crete surfaces. Cleanout openings shall be provided
high-lift grouting methods should be restricted to through block faces at the bottom of each pour, of
walls where wall openings, arrangement of piers, sufficient size and location to allow flushing away of
special reinforcing details, or embedded items do mortar droppings and debris. After laying of ma-
not prevent the free flow of grout or inhibit the use sonry units is completed, the cells cleaned, rein-
of mechanical vibration to properly consolidate the forcing positioned, inspection completed, and
grout. A grout admixture is recommended to reduce cleanouts closed, the high-lift grout shall be placed
early water loss to the masonry units and to produce in one continuous pour by lifts which allow time for
a slight expansion sufficient to offset initial shrink- consolidation and loss of water, but placed at such a
age and promote bonding of the grout to the interior rate as not to form intermediate construction joints
surface of the units. or blowouts. The maximum height of any pour she"
(2)Low-lift grouting procedures contemplate be limited to 12 feet for 8-inch walls and 16 feet.
that: first, the vertical bars are erected; then, the 12-inch walls. Low-lift grouting procedures my-
horizontal bars are placed and grouted in as laying also be used for filled cell construction. See figure
of the masonry work progresses. The contact sur- 8-11. .
face of all foundations and floors that is to receive
masonry work shall be cleaned and roughened to in- 8-21. Control oints (crack control). Cracking
sure a good bond between the grout fill and the of walls constructed with concrete-masonry-units is
concrete surfaces. Width of collar joints shall be caused by the development of tensile stresses -within
such as to provide at least 1/2 inch grout coverage the wall assembly which exceed the tensile strength
around all reinforcement bars. of the materials comprising the assembly. Generally
it is due to tensile stresses which develop when wall
b. Reinforced hollow masonry is that type of con- movements accompanying temperature and mois-
struction made with a single wythe of hollow ture change as restrained by other elements, or
masonry units (concrete or clay blocks), reinforced when concrete masonry places restraint on the
vertically and horizontally with steel bars, and cores movements of adjoining elements. Moisture loss de-
and voids containing reinforcing bars or embedded pends on the shrinkage potential of the masonry
items are filled with grout as the work progresses. units and the drying conditions at the building site,
Construction procedures contemplate that the verti- expressed in terms of relative humidity. Major
cal bars are erected first; then, the horizontal bars methods employed to control cracking in masonry
and joint reinforcement, if required, are placed and structures are (1) materials specifications to limit
grouted in as laying of the hollow masonry work the drying-shrinkage potential, (2)reinforcement to
progresses. See figure 8-10. increase crack resistance, and (3)control joints to
c. Reinforced filled-cell masonry is that type of accommodate movement. Any crack control mea-
construction made with a single wythe of hollow ma- *sure taken must be compatible with the structural
sonry units, reinforced vertically and horizontally design for seismic forces. Control joints provide a
with deformed steel bars, and all cores and voids are complete separation of the masonry. Hence, locat'
filled solidly with grout after the wall is laid. Con- of control joints fixes the length of wall-panels
struction procedures contemplate that, first, the in turn, the rigidity of the walls, the distribution of
s-1l
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
seismic forces and the resulting unit stresses. There- welding steel reinforcement to structural steel
fore, adding, eliminating or relocating control joints members, by bolting, by dowels, by transfer of ten-
will not be permitted once the structural design is sile or compressive stresses by bond of reinforcing
complete. Control joints shall never be assumed to bars, or by use of key-type devices. The transfer of
transfer bending moments or diagonal tension shear may be accomplished by using reinforcing
across the joint. Joint reinforcement and bars in steel extended as dowels coupled with cast-in-place
nonstructural bond beams will be terminated at con- concrete placed between roughened concrete inter-
trol joints; deformed bars in structural bond beams faces, mechanical devices such as embedded plates
will be made continuous for length of the dia- or shapes. The entire shear should be considered as
phragm. Using quality controlled concrete-masonry- transferred through one type of device, even though
units and the prescribed minimum reinforcement of a combination of devices may be available at the
seismic design, cracking is not normally a problem joint or support being considered. Maximum spac-
when the maximum horizontal spacing of control ing of dowels or bolts will not exceed 4 feet. All
joints is limited to four times the diaphragm-to. significant combinations of loadings should be con-
diaphragm height or 100 feet on center, whichever is sidered, and the joints and connections should be
less. See figure 8-12. designed for forces consistent with all possible com-
binations of loadings. Details of the connections
8-22. Connections to other elements. The use shall admit to a rational analysis in accordance with
of joints and connections for the transmission of well-established principles of mechanics.
shears, axial loads, moments, and torsions from dia- c. The strength of connections, as a general rule,
phragms to walls and from walls to sub-structure is should be sufficient to develop the useful strength of
inherent in seismic design. Great care must be taken the structural elements connected, regardless of cal-
to properly design connections between the vertical culated stress. The design forces for joints and
resisting elements (shear wall-panels) and the connections between lateral force resisting elements
horizontal resisting elements (floor and roof dia- will be at least 2.0 times the calculated shear when
phragms) so as to make such walls an integral part using the prescribed lateral loads, except that the
of the structural system. Positive means will be pro- connection need not be required to develop forces
vided for transferring shear from the plane of the greater than the ultimate capacity of the connected
diaphragm into the shear wall-panels into the dia- elements, and in no case less than 200 pounds per
-*A phragms. In designing connections or ties, it is linear foot. The shear on every bolt shall not exceed
necessary to carry out the forces and their stress the values given in table 8-8.
paths according to relative rigidity) and also to
make each and every connection along each path d CutionaryNotes for Designers and Detailers.
adequate and consistent with the basic assumptions Avoid connection and joint details which would re-
and distribution of forces. Because joints and con- sult in stress concentrations that might result in
nections directly affect the integrity of the spalling or splitting of face shells at contact sur-
structure, their design and fabrication must be ade- faces. Liberal chamfers, adequate reinforcement,
quate for the functions intended. In designing and and cushioning materials are a few means by which
detailing, it is well to keep in mind that the lateral stress concentrations may be avoided or provided
forces are not static, as assumed for convenience, for. Avoid direct bearing of heavy concentrated
but dynamic and to a great extent unpredictable. loads on face shell of concrete masonry units. Avoid
a Forces to be considered in the design of joints welding to any embedded metal items which might
and connections are gravity loads; temporary erec- cause damage to the adjacent masonry by spalling,
tion loads differential settlements; horizontal loads in particular where the expansion of the heated
normal to wall; horizontal forces parallel to wall; and metal is restrained by masonry. All bolts and dowels
creep, shrinkage, and thermal forces-separately or which are embedded in masonry will be grouted sol-
combined as applicable. Bond beams acting as idly in place with not less than 1 inch of grout
flange (chord) for horizontal diaphragms will require between the bolt or dowel and the masonry. At tops
reinforcement to be continuous at dummy control of piers and columns, vertical bolts will be set inside
joints for tensile and compressive chord stresses in- the horizontal ties.
duced by the diaphragm beam action, and the S23. Fire walls. A fire wall is a fire-resistive bar-
marginal connections must be capable of resisting tier which must be able to withstand the temper-
the flexural and shear stresses developed. ature of uncontrolled fires without disintegration,
b. Joints and connections may be made by prevent passage of fire from either side to the other
6-19
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
HoRVZONTAL S0NO
(MUAM R6HINP
ROb 4SAM Uir
PoUNI)ATION rWNS
7O MATCH WALL
ReiNA. LAP 40b0A.
PLA N
6-20
TM S-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
-
CLEAN our PLZ6
I
OPEN e' ,
CF64LJ J0L /O
Wl7W bROUT .
f,,
6-21
TM 5-810
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
CON7904
JOI LiNTAK
l - u
A
.
CONTA.04 JOINTJ"
tCAU-K
FoAL-Jo/J8 UNITJ
rojR RAKS,
CONTROC.JTS.e WA U N7TfRSCTION
OP Lo f. U-JHAPeD AUI41INGS CA UK
WInMBOOT JAA UI'fW
Figure 8-12. C;?,troZ Jointsa
6-22
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
Table 8& Alowable Shewon Bos andDowels
Minimum
Edge Distance
Minimum Embedment in Loaded
Diameter and Spacing Shear Direction
(inches) (lnche)eM (pounds) (inches)
112 4 850 3
/8 4 500 3
3/4 a 750 4
7/8 6 1,000 4
1 7 1.250 5
1-118 6 1,600* 6
For load applied at the top of and paalle to wa the bolt values may be nceasd 60 percent
when vertical bolts are set between horizontal bond beam reinforcement.
Allowable shear may be increased IS when wind or aemic forces re included.
Permitted only with not lee than 2.500 psi units.
*An additional 2 inches of embedment will be provided for anchor bolts at top of columns.
side, confine fire from sweeping over or around the gap between Is based on requirements for seis-
either end (by use of parapet at roof line, and wing mic joints.
walls or fire wall returns at exterior walls), have b. Free-atandingfire wag as an alternative to a
insulating qualities to maintain low temperature on double fire wall, is entirely self-supporting without
the unexposed face of the wall, and remain standing any structural tie to adjacent framing. For stability
even when a portion of the building on either side against horizontal forces, it must rely on its own
collapses. Stability is one of the essential properties strength as a cantilever from the base. Horizontal
of a fire wall. Such a wall must remain standing forces may be caused by wind, earthquake, or by the
during a fire even when the building framing on one pull of flashing as the burning portion of the build-
-* side collapses. This stability requirement has led to ing collapses. Lateral strength of the wall shall be
several little-appreciated design problems in loca- obtained by providing reinforcing steel in the wall
tion of expansion (seismic) Joints and in selecting or and by adding reinforced pilasters, if necessary. A
adapting a seismic structural system which is com- double seismic joint is required and each portion of
patible with this fire wall requirement. A "Fire Cut- the building, adjacent to fire wall, will be designed
Off Partition" is a fire-resistive barrier used to delay as an independent structure.
the spread of a fire; but, unlike a fire wall, it is not
required to remain standing should a portion of the C One-way fire wall meets all requirements of a
building collapse. The most commonly used types of regular fire wall except that it is limited to remain
fire walls are described below (other types may be standing when the fire exposure is from one (prese-
used, provided they conform to the principles in the lected) side. Therefore, it is useful only to isolate a
foregoing text). (Refer to fig 8-13.) hazardous area from an ordinary or light hazardous
occupancy.
a Double fire wall Is a very reliable type of fire
separation. The separate walls are laterally sup- 8-24. Weatherproofing. Each job requires a
ported by their respective building structural separate decision as to the requirements for weath-
system, and each may be part of a seismic structural erproofing, damp-proofing, thermal insulation, and
system. In case of masonry, it may be used as two vapor control. Manuals and guide specifications of
shear walls back-to-back. If there is an uncontrolled applicable agency apply.
fire on either aide of the double wall, the building 8-25. Surfac, bonding of concrete masonry
frame will collapse and pull one wall with it. The units. This method of construction is not permitted
other wall, being supported by the framing on the id-Seismic Zones 2, 8, and 4. Use in Zone is re-
side away from the fire, will remain in place. A dou- ricted to design agency approval.
ble wall having two 3-hour one-way walls may be
considered as a 4-hour wall. The double wall serves 8-26. Drawings. The locations of control joints,
as an expansion joint in the building. The width of and the Identification of structural and nonstruc-
-23
TM 5-609-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 63, Chap. 13
naos
I..==.
seef I OFI
3
k.-."S.abFA
_SuP,$
.
.
nears
I EAr mo
Fig B 1-L
-IRIETAINDG FIRS WALL
DMMtI 7XR_ WALL
- .A, , , ., . ._. . . , - , .. -
.- -_
,
I_ a _ I
Hg. D 1Z1
FIRE CLIT-OF PARMITION
S-24
TM -89-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-, Chap. 13
tural walls and partitions for all masonry construc- 8-27. Overseas construction. In overseas con-
tion will be shown on preliminary and contract struction where local materials or grades other than
drawings. On contract drawings, show complete those herein are used, the working stresses, details,
details for masonry, reinroement, and connections and other requirements of this chapter will be
to other elements. Detailing procedures outlined in modified as required because of the characteristics
ACI-315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detail- of the materials.
ing Reinforced Concrete" are generally applicable to
reinforced masonry. 8-28. Additional details. See figures 8-14
through 8-17, and tables 8-9 and 8-10.
8-29. References.
a. Masonry Inatitute of America. 2560 Beverly Boulevard, g. Masonry Institute of America. 2550 Beverly Boulevard,
Los Angeles, California, 90057, "Masonry Desigm Manual." Los Angeles, Califa 90057, "1977 Masonry Codes and Sped.
(1969). fications.9
A National Concrete Masonry Association 845 Elm Street. b. American National Standards Institute ANSI), 1430
McLean, Virginia, 22101, "Technical Notes (TEK) Information BroadwaY, New York, New York4 10018, ANSI-A41.1,
Series 1970). "American Standard Building Code Requirement for Masonry."
a Brick Institute of America, 1750 Old Meadow Road. -National Concrete Masonry Association NCMA),
McLean, Virginia. 22101, TeIcal Notes On Brick and Tile 200914th Street, N., Arington, VIrginIa, 22202. "Specification
Construction." for Design and Construction of Load-Bearing Masonry." (1971).
& American Concrete Institute, P.O. Box 4754, Redford Sta- J. Structural Clay Products Institute (SCPI), 1760 Old
tion, Detroit, MichIgan, 48219, Report of ACI Commstte 631; Meadow Road, Mean Virginia. 2101. "Building Code Re-
'Concrete Masonry Structures-Design and Construction," quirements for Engineered Brick Masonry." (1969).
(1970). (Also refer to ACI Journal papers No. 7-42. August . Plummer, Harry C., and Blume, John A., "Reinforced Brick
1978 and No. 75-60. September 197&) Masonry and Lateral Farce Dedgn" Structural Clay Products
& Amriein James E., "Reinforced Masonry Engineering Institute, 1760 Old Meadow Road. Mclan Virginia. 22101
Handbook," 3rd edition. (1978); Masonry Institute of America, (1953).
I Los Angeles, California. L Applied Technology Counc "Tentative Provisions for the
f Portland Cment Association. 6420 Old Orchard Road. Development of Seism Regulations for Buildings," ATC -06,
Skokie. Illinois. 60076, "COnCrete Masonry Handbook for Arch- July 1978 (avaable from Government Printing Office, NBS
tects. Engineers. Builders." (1976). SP-10).
,...
8-25
I
rob
o V1a
lra
(
( C
P'peMoLtFeo 7 ~UL*VCoN7oL^
exp. JOIT/
MA7EIA I. I. JOrT POltJTRCICT.
tsARt-rfONS(Je6 A);
14"S0L4 1ON- JONt
FOR NVON*A 7W (C.
o
'-
tv
f
0
U AA AT tONS CORe AS
RMQUI*ED AYDRIFi)
t
i-:
I'
AA 44C. C.
,..s ,.
lpmRAOM
C T&
EITr 4
L Le VAT ION
MAs ON/ Y WAC. TO MrtA L r3 /APIRAGM
..
8-28
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
CAG/NG ~E VICE
DUA X CEA'R/HN CP
__
tSAR CAGEC
f &- 3 to54
5" 5"~~~~~a1
- WALL WA7'eIJroj FoR
GROUTING 7/6 CONr9ROL JOIN7
Figure 8-17. Acfessories
tI
.29
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
TabZe 8-9. Average Weight of Concrete Masonry Unit
(2-CeZt Unit, 8" x 8" x 1")
.9 1* I. Y
6 8 12 6 8 12 9 9-1/2 10 11 12
Solid
Grouled
Wall
Spacing of 16 46 60
Vertical -
56 77
- -
11
90 58 75
-
68 92
- -
140
111
68
71
__
90
I9zr~
95 100 110 120
Grouted 24 42 53 79 53 68 99 64
Cores - - - -
(inches) 32 40 50 73 51 65 93 61
40 38 47 70 50 62 89 58
48 37 46 68 49 61 87 55
1Asand-gravel aggregate has been assumed for the grout and mortar.
The above weights include an assumed average for bond beams and rein-
forcement.
k
.5J
s-so
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
CHAPTER 9
ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENTS
9-1. Purpose and scope. This chapter defines given by the formula 3-8 in chapter 3, paragraph
architectural elements, discusses their participation 3-3(G),
and importance in relation to the seismic design of Fp-ZCpWp 13-8)
the structural system, and prescribes the criteria for
their design to resist damage from seismic lateral where the direction of the force Fp and the value of
forces. The fundamental principle and underlying the coefficient Cp are prescribed in table 3-4. In gen-
criterion of this chapter are that (a)the design of ar- eral, the value of CD is 0.30; however, for ornamenta-
chitectural elements will be such that they will not tion, parapets, and other appendages, where the po-
collapse and cause personal injury due to the accel- tential for collapse and injury is greater, Cp is 0.80.
erations and displacements induced by severe seis- For exterior wall panels, Cp is 0.30; however, the
mic disturbances, and (b)the architectural elements special provisions of chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(J)3d
.... apply.
will withstand more frequent but less severe seismic
.. ,d
disturbance without excessive damage and eco- b. Deflections. For the design of the structure,
nomic loss (refer to chap 2, para 2-9k). Mechanical lateral deflections or drift of a story relative to its
and electrical elements are considered separately in adjacent story is limited to 0.005 times the story
chapter 10. height unless it can be demonstrated that greater
drift can be tolerated (chap , para 3-3(H)1). The
9-2. Definition. Architectural elements are gen- drift is calculated from the application of the re-
erally defined as all elements of a building shown quired lateral forces multiplied by I/K (1/K not less
only in the architectural contract drawings (i.e., not than 1.0).
detailed in the structural or mechanical/electrical (1) Architectural elements will be designed and
drawings), such as nonstructural walls, partitions, detailed to conform to these drift requirements
windows, suspended ceilings, ornamentation, and without damage.
A appendages. A nonstructural architectural element (2) Exterior elements are required to allow for
is usually isolated or is so flexible such that it does relative movement equal to 31K times the calculated
not participate in the lateral shear resistance of the elastic story displacement caused by required
". I
W. structure. For example, a wall which is isolated at seismic forces or 112-inch per story, whichever is
the top and both ends, so as not to resist inplane de- greater (chap 3, para 3-3(J)3d).
formations, is classified as a nonparticipating, non- (3) The effects of adjoining rigid elements on
structural, architectural element. Note that such a the structural system will also be investigated (chap
wall must be braced laterally at the top or else it 3, para 3-30J)le).
must cantilever from the floor (fig 9-1). A rigid non-
bearing curtain or filler wall (e.g., concrete or ma- 9-4. Detailed requirements. a. Partitions.
sonry) that is not isolated, although generally con- Partitions are classified into two general categories:
sidered as a nonstructural element, will obviously (1)rigid and (2)nonrigid. Reference is also made to
participate in shear resistance to horizontal forces chapter 6, paragraph 6-2.
parallel to the wall because it tends to deflect and be (1) Rigid Partitions.This category generally re-
stressed when the building deforms under lateral fers to nonstructural masonry walls. Where such a
forces. The degree of participation is dependent on wall is unable to resist the lateral forces (parallel to
the relative rigidities of such elements relative to its plane) that it is subjected to, based on relative
the overall structure. rigidities, it will be isolated. Typical details for isola-
tion of these walls are shown in figure 9-1. These
9-3. Design criteria. Architectural elements (1) walls will be designed for the prescribed forces nor-
must safely resist horizontal forces equal to a force mal to their plane.
coefficient times their own weight, and (21 must be (2) NonrigidPartitions.This category generally
capable of conforming (accommodating) to the lat- refers to nonstructural partitions such as stud-and-
eral deflections that they will be subjected to during drywall, stud and plaster, and movable partitions.
the lateral deformation of the building in which they Mlen constructed according to standard recom-
are located. mended practice, it is assumed that the partitions
a. Lateral Forces. The equivalent static lateral can withstand the design inplane drift of 0.005
force that is applied to architectural elements is times the story height (i.e., 1/16 inch per foot of
9-'
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
- - -1
y
.. . b ..
J4WN4861 wies
Ce/LamsC
sIDes
9-2
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
height) without damage. Therefore, if the structure not less than 4 pounds per square foot shall be used
is designed to control drift within the prescribed (reference table 8-4, footnote 6). The support of the
limits, these partitions do not require special ceiling systems will be by a positive means of sup-
isolation details. They will be designed for the port such as wire or an approved seismic clip sys-
prescribed seismic force acting normal to flat sur- tem. Typical details of suspended acoustical tile ceil-
faces. However, wind or the normal 10 pounds per ings are shown in figure 9-3.
square foot partition load will usually govern. If the
structural design drift is not controlled within the d Parapets, Ornamentation, and Appendages.
prescribed limits, isolation of partitions will be re- These elements will be designed for forces resulting
quired for reduction of nonstructural damage. from Cp equal to 0.8 as prescribed in chapter 3, para-
Economic justification between potential damage graph 3-3(G) and table 3-4. For the design of para-
and costs of isolation will be considered. Decision pets refer to chapter 6, paragraph 6-2c.
needs to be made for each project as to the role, if
any, such partitions will contribute to damping and e. Window Frames. Window frames will be de-
response of the structure, and the effect of seismic signed to accommodate deflections of the structure
forces parallel to the partition resulting from the without imposing a load on the glass. As glass is a
structural system as a whole. Usually, it may be as- brittle material, a considerable hazard of falling
sumed that this type of partition is subject to future glass may be present. It is particularly serious if the
alterations in layout location. The structural role of glass is above and adjacent to a public way. This
partitions may be controlled by height of partitions hazard can be eliminated by proper isolation be-
and methods of support. tween glass and its enclosing frame. It is obvious
that the magnitude of isolation required depends
b. Connections of Exterior Wall Panels. Precast, upon the drift and the size of the individual pane or
nonbearing, nonshear wall panels of other elements enclosing frame. Thus a pane of glass in a full story
which are attached to, or enclose the exterior, will height frame should have an isolation or movement
accommodate movements of the structure resulting capability as great as the maximum possible drift
from lateral forces or-temperature changes. The con- (e.g., 3/K times the calculated elastic story dis-
crete panels or other elements will be supported by placement prescribed in chap 3, para 3-3(J)ld and
means of cast-in-place concrete or by mechanical de- 3-S)3d). The actual isolation clearance will depend
vices. Connections and panel joints will be designed on the geometry and deformation characteristics of
iv p .- l to allow for the relative movement between stories enclosing frame, frame support, and structural sys-
and will be designed for the forces specified in chap- tem. Special care will be exercised in the field to see
ter 3, paragraph 3-3(J)3d. Connections shall have that such isolation is actually obtained.
sufficient ductility and rotation capacity so as to f. Stairways The rigidity of the stairway, relative
preclude fracture of the concrete or brittle failures at to the structure, will be considered. In some cases
or near welds. Inserts in concrete shall be attached the stairway will be isolated from the structure for
to, or hooked around reinforcing steel or otherwise lateral force considerations. Refer to chapter 4, para-
terminated so as to effectively transfer forces to the graph 4-7d, for special seismic detailing.
reinforcing steel. Connections to permit movement
in the plane of the panel for story drift may be prop- g. Storage Racks. Chapter 8, paragraph 3-3(G),
erly designed sliding connections using slotted or and table 3-4 prescribe the seismic design forces for
oversize holes, or may be connections which permit storage racks. However, two alternative methods
movement by bending of steel components without for determining the seismic design forces are per-
failure. Typical design forces are shown in figure mitted under certain conditions.
9-2. (1) Table -4. Lateral forces are determined
from the formula Fp = ZICpWp (formula 3-8) where
c Suspended Ceiling Systems. Earthquake dam- Cp is equal to 0.30 and Wp is equal to the weight of
age to suspended ceiling systems can be limited by the racks plus contents. If the racks are self-sup
proper support and detailing. Suspended ceiling porting and located on the ground level of the build-
framing systems in Seismic Zones 2, 3, and 4 will be ing, Cp is reduced to a value of 0.20 (footnote 1 of
designed for the prescribed forces in chapter 3, para- table 3-4). If the racks are over two storage support
graph 3-3, table 3-4. The ceiling weight. Wp, shall le6ls in height, the Cp value for the storage levels
include all light fixtures and other equipment which b-elow the top two levels is reduced by 20 percent
are laterally supported by the ceiling. For purposes (.e., Cp equals 0.24, or 0.16 if self-supporting on the
of determining the lateral force, a ceiling weight of ground level).
94
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
12) Atternate No. L Where a number of storage provisions of Uniform Building Code Standard
rack units are interconnected so that there are a mi- 27-11 may be used. This standard is based on"
nimum of four vertical elements in each direction on terim Specifications for the Design, Testing, a
each column line designed to resist horizontal Utilization of Industrial Steel Storage Racks,"
forces, the design coefficients may be as for a build- 1972, and "Supplement No. 1 to the Specification,"
ing with K values from table 3-3, CS = 0.20 for use June 18, 1973, by the Rack Manufacturers Institute
in the formula V = ZIKCSW (formula 3-1) and W (1326 Freeport Rd., Pittsburgh, PA 15238). These
equal to the total dead load plus 50 percent of the provisions are based on the formula V = ZIKCSW
rack rated capacity. formula 3-1), with the coefficients determined in a
(3) AlternateNo. I For pallet racks, drive-in and manner consistent with the provisions of chapter 3,
drive through racks, and stacker racks made of cold. paragraph 3-3, of this manual. W is equal to the
formed or hot-rolled steel structurarmembers which weight of the racks plus contents.
are located on the ground level of the building, the
$4
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Cspz 0.5P
F S = 4; ~~FZ.ICpW
TYP. JECTION
bETA4I (z:i.o)
ior-3eJS OF CONN6C7tONJ
PA 4 L
*lGRT
I.jj*
..
2
., ,(4Cp)W
&OLT$ JHA LL
roA /ff..RACrIO
DE$16ND
()
OP
TENSION I JHER $ORCEJ
OSOLTJ q INjeAR
£eUL~GN'7' C0WA'GC77NS 7Hff S0MD
TO HE PAN5 LJ O 7/i4 JtnC7UkR
JEg PARAAAAPH - (J)9d, FO*UI. 1* i T446 - 4
FOft LAMRI4L LOAD AC-qU~1J16MGENT
9-
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
76UNNGI
TYP. SP44AY ~ttACING I3C-A4-/'EdViM,0>5r CILINGfYJTM
LOCKING
PIN--,,
I >E HANGS6/
wI~e
I
IF,,,, ' I
AUNNCjt_" MAIN ) ACOUJTCSA
RUNNE PAWFL ,WA
Lockino Clip to Fasten Cross CONr. HoilZ. STArT TO PREVI N T r!IM
Runner to MaIn Runner JPRA/INC OPf: RUCNNC-
Splices and intersections of JUSPEN,0bU) C6IiNG bETAIL ATWALL
runners shall be attached with
mechanical interlocking connec-
tors such as pop rivets, screws, WANG ER NWAe ALLOW.75NJION
pins, plates with bent tabs, or 170#
other approved connectors. De- aiZ
sign connectors for 2 x design
load or ultimate axial tension I0 300*
or compression (minimum 60
pounds).
}
9?,
9-
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
CHAPTER 10
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ELEMENTS
10-1. Purpose and scope. This chapter pre- or to the ground will be designed for seismic forces
scribes the criteria for structural design of anchor- prescribed by chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(G), of this
ages and supports for mechanical and electrical manual. Limitations, exceptions, and commentary
equipment in seismic areas. Mechanical and electri- are stated in paragraphs 10-3 and 10-5 below.
cal equipment have been classified as being either b. Flexible Equipment or Equipment on Flexible
ongrade or supported by the building and as being Supports. For flexible and flexibly mounted equip-
rigid or flexible. The principles and concepts given ment and machinery, chapter 3, paragraph S-3(G)
herein are intended to illustrate principles and con- and table 3-4, footnote 3. state that the appropriate
cepts involved in seismic design of mechanical and values of Cp, shall be determined with consideration
electrical elements of buildings. The fundamental given to both the dynamic properties of the equip-
principle and underlying criterion of this chapter ment and machinery and to the building or structure
are that the design of mechanical and electrical ele- in which t is placed. As an alternative to a rigorous
ment supports will be such that they will withstand analysis, a procedure is outlined in paragraph 10-4
(1)the accelerations induced by severe seismic dis- to obtain horizontal design seismic forces for flexi-
turbances without collapse or excessive deflection, ble or flexibly mounted equipment (and machinery)
and (2)the accelerations induced by less severe seis- located in the building. Paragraph 10-5 discusses
mic disturbances without exceeding yield stresses. the criterion for locations on the ground.
The design of the equipment Itself is beyond the
scope of this manual. c. Weight Limitations. Equipment in buildings
will be considered to be within the scope of this
a. Modification to SEAOCApproach.The seismic chapter if:
force criteria for rigid and rigidly mounted equip- -(1) The maximum weight of the individual item
ment are generally covered by the SEAOC provi- of equipment does not exceed 10 percent of the total
sions in chapter 3, paragraph 3-S(G), and table 3-4. building weight.
In order to fulfill the requirements of mechanical (2) The maximum weight of the individual item
and electrical elements not specifically covered by of equipment does not exceed 20 percent of the total
chapter 3, a modification to the SEAOC approach is weight of the floor at the equipment level.
s presented in this chapter. Particular attention is
given to criteria for the estimation of horizontal The response of equipment is dependent upon the
force factors on flexible and flexibly mounted equip- response of the building in which it is housed. If the
ment. weight of the equipment is appreciable, relative to
the weight of the building, the interaction of the
b. Seismic Forces. The design forces applied to equipment with the building (i.e., coupling effect)
equipment supports are generally higher than the will change the building response characteristics. It
forces used in the design of buildings. One reason is is assumed that equipment within the above weight
the amplification of the ground motion acceleration limitations has a negligible effect on the response of
transmitted to elements in the elevated stories of a the building. Equipment that is not within the
building due to dynamic response. Another reason is above limitations is outside the scope of this manual
equipment supports often lack the extra margin of and must be designed using a more rigorous method
safety provided by reserve strength mechanisms, of analysis.
such as participation of architectural elements, in-
elastic behavior of structural elements, and redun- d Rigorous Analysis. No portion of this chapter
dancy in the structural system, that are characteris- will be construed to prohibit a rigorous analysis of
tic of buildings. equipment and the supporting mechanism by estab-
lished principles of structural dynamics. Such an
10-2. General requirements. All equipment analysis will demonstrate that the fundamental
supports designed under the provisions of this principle and underlying criterion of paragraph 10-1
chapter, for either equipment on the ground or in are satisfied. In no case will the design result in
buildings, will conform to the following require- capacities less than 80 percent of those required by
ments: chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(G).
a. Rigid Equipment awd Rigid Supports. Rigid e. Combined States of Stress. Combined states of
equipment that is rigidly attached to the structure stress, such as tension and shear on anchor bolts,
10-1
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
will be investigated in accordance with established attached to the building (see para 10-5 for eq
principles of structural engineering. Refer to chap- ment on the ground). For cantilevered portion
ter 4, paragraph 4-6d chimneys and smokestacks, Cp is 0.80; howevr
f. Securing Equipment. Use of friction as a these items must also be investigated for the crite-
method of resisting seismic forces is not acceptable rion stated in paragraph 10-8.
and will not be allowed. Both vertical and horizontal 10-4. Flexible equipment or flexibly mounted
accelerations are possible during an earthquake. equipment In buildings. Equipment that does
Under vertical acceleration, the normal force re- not satisfy the rigidity requirements of paragraph
quired to maintain friction can be greatly dimin- 10-3 will be considered to be flexible or flexibly
ished. This could result in a reduction of the friction mounted. For flexible and flexibly mounted equip-
force available to resist horizontal seismic loads as ment (and machinery), the appropriate seismic
both simultaneous vertical and horizontal accelera- design forces will be determined with consideration
tions are possible. Thus, equipment will be secured given to both the dynamic properties of the equip-
by bolts, embedment, or other acceptable positive ment (and machinery) and to the building or
means of resisting horizontal forces. Rvefer to para- structure in which it is placed (chap 3, table 3-4,
graph 10-11 for example of typical details. footnote 3). An approximate procedure, which
g. Special Requirements. Additional require- considers these dynamic properties within certain
ments for lighting fixtures and supports, piping, limits, is presented below. Flexible or flexibly
stacks, bridge cranes and monorails, and elevator mounted equipment that does not qualify within the
systems are covered in paragraphs 10-6 through limits of this chapter is outside the scope of this
10-10, respectively. manual and will be designed using a more rigorous
method of analysis.
10-3. RIgId and rigidly mounted equipment a Single Mass System. The approximate-proce-
In buildings. Rigid and rigidly mounted dure is based on the equipment responding as a
equipment will be considered to be those equipment single-degree-of-freedom system to the motion of
units and equipment supporting systems for which one of the predominant modes of vibration of te
the period of vibration as defined in paragraph building at the floor level in which the equipme
10-4b is estimated to be less than 0.05 second (i.e., placed. Therefore, if the equipment and its supp,
frequency of vibration greater than 20 Hz). Compact ing system cannot be approximated by a single-
equipment directly attached to a concrete pad or a degree-of-freedom system (i.e., a simple oscillator
footing will be considered rigidly supported. This represented by a single mass and a simple spring), a
type of equipment-supporting system is very stiff, more rigorous analysis is required. Some examples
and the period of vibration is very short (i.e., high of systems that do qualify under this procedure fol-
frequency of vibration). Equipment not satisfying low:
the rigidity requirement will be designed according (1) Rigid equipment attached to the floor slab
to the criteria of paragraph 10-4. with a spring isolation system.
a. ExamplesofRigidlyMountedEquipment. (2) Rigid equipment, rigidly attached to a flex-
11) A boiler bolted or otherwise securely at- ible supporting system that is rigidly attached to
tached to a concrete pad or directly to the floor of a the floor slab.
structure. 13) Rigid equipment attached by a cantilever
(2) An electrical panel board securely attached support from the structure.
to solid walls or to the studs of stud walls. (4) Flexible equipment, which can be repro-
(3) An electric motor bolted to a concrete floor. sented as a single mass system, rigidly attached to
(4) A floodlight having a short stem bolted to a the structure.
wall.
(5) A rigidly anchored heat exchanger. EXCEPTIONS Equipment that can be considered to
have uniformly distributed mass will be designed for seismic
b. Equivalent Static Force. The equivalent static forces in manner similar to stacks (par. 10-8). Lighting fix-
lateral force is given by formula (3-8) in chapter 3, tures, piping, stacks, bridge cranes and monorail, and elevator
paragraph 3-3(G). systems will be designed specified in paragraphs 10-8
through
t 10-10. respectively.
Fp Z I C W 3-8) b. Equipment PeriodEstimation. For equipmorit
Cp, as prescribed in table 3-4, is equal to 0.30 for all responding as a single-degree-of-freedom syt
equipment and machinery that are rigid and rigidly the period of vibration, T., is equal to 2 VPm-a' __
10-2
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
stiffness. In terms of inch and pound units, this (d) In some cases, the vertical modes of vibra-
formula becomes tion should be considered. This applies to floor sys-
tems that are flexible in the vertical direction and
T,-2r g By 2 1 t 0.32 J 110-1) equipment sensitive to vertical accelerations.
where d Appendage MagnificationFactor.The append-
T --Fundamental period (sec). age magnification factor M.F.) is the ratio of the
k - Stiffness of supporting mechanism in terms of load peak motion of the appendage (in this case, equip-
per unit deflection of the center of gravity lblin.j.
W - Weight of equipment andlor equipment supports ment) to the peak motion of the floor level that it is
Obl. which Is equal to the mass times the accelera- mounted on. A theoretical value of the M.F. is gen-
tion of gravity. erally based on steady-state motion due to the floor
g - Acceleration of gravity at 586 InJsec 2. responding as a uniform sine wave. However, build-
In lieu of calculating the period of vibration using ings that are responding to earthquakes move in a
Equation 10-1, a properly substantiated experimen- somewhat random fashion and thereby do not gener-
tal determination will be allowed. ate magnification factors as large as calculated by
c. Building Period Estimation. If a building has theoretical steady-state responses. Following are
more than one story it is considered to be a multi- discussions on the steady-state response and on an
degree-of-freedom system with more than one mode approximate method for estimating appendage
of vibration. Flexible equipment located in the magnification factors.
building can be excited to respond to any of the pre- (1) The magnification factor for an idealized
dominant modes of the building vibration. There- single mass oscillator, with a period T. and damping
fore, when investigating the response of equipment characteristics at 2 percent of critical damping, re-
to the floor motion response, all predominant modes sponding to a steady-state sinusoidal acceleration
of vibration must be considered. The building peri- having a period T. is plotted on figure 10-1. If Ta is
ods will be based on realistic estimations that are essentially equal to T. M.F. equals 25. In other
not restricted to limitations used in building design words, at a condition of resonance, the maximun ac-
criteria. celeration of the oscillator mass will be 25 times the
(1) Findamentalmode of vibration. The funda- peak acceleration of the forcing motion. This ideal-
mental period of the building vibration T1 corre- ized condition depends on (a) fine tuning of the two
sponds to the period T used in the design of the periods, (b)linearity of the oscillator spring, (c)uni-
building. A realistic estimation of Ti will probably formity of the input sinusoidal motion, and d)
lie somewhere between the value used to determine length of time of the input motion (at least 25 cy-
the force coefficients (chap 4, para 4-3d) and the cles).
value used to determine the drift compliance (chap (2) If the oscillator represents the equipment,
4, para 4-5c). the floor response represents the steady-state input
(2) Higher modes of vibration. In addition to motion, and the Cp value of 0.30 is assumed to be
the fundamental mode of vibration, the predomi- the floor acceleration, the peak acceleration for the
nant higher modes of vibration must be considered. equipment is 25 times 0.30g = 7.5g. In other words,
i- ~ (a) For regular structures (section 3-3(E)}, the horizontal force on the equipment is seven and
with fundamental periods less than 2 seconds, in- one-half times its own weight. However, due to the
clude the second and third modes of vibration actual nonlinear characteristics of equipment and
(translational modes in the direction under consider- buildings and particularly the finite duration of
ation). In lieu of a detailed analysis, the second mode earthquake motion, it is highly unlikely that such a
period of vibration may be assumed to equal 0.30 magnification could actually occur to a 2 percent
times the fundamental period of vibration (i.e., T2 = damped equipment appendage.
0.30 Ti) and the third mode period of vibration may (3) In order to approximate a realistic value for
be assumed to equal 0.18 times the fundamental pe- a design M.F. factor, it is assumed that (a) the peri-
riod of vibration (i.e., Ts = 0.18 Ti). ods Ta and T will differ by at least percent; (b)
(b) For buildings with fundamental periods buildings are not perfectly linear elastic, especially
greater than 2 seconds, the fourth mode and possi- at high amplitudes of response; (c) the floor response
bly the fifth mode should also be included. is not an exact, uniform sine wave; and d) the num-
(c) For irregular buildings the dynamic char- ber of high amplitude floor response cycles is sub-
acteristics of the structure must be Investigated to stintially less than 25.
determine other nontranslational or torsional) pre- [A' (4) The design M.F. factor curve shown in fig-
dominant modes. ure 10-2 is presented as an aid to estimating the de-
10-3
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
sign response of single-degree-of-freedom append- (1) A standard anchorage system is to be
ages, in lieu of more rigorous analysis methods. The signed for some flexible equipment that will.
peak M.F. of 25 is reduced to 7.5 by reducing the ef- placed in several buildings. In order to have one um-
fectiveness of the period tuning, the peak floor re- versal anchorage system that will apply to all build-
sponse amplitude, and the number of continuous cy- ings, use Ap equal to 5.0.
cles to roughly two-thirds of the idealized values (2) An anchorage system is to be designed for
(i.e., 25 X 213 X 23 X 2/3 2 7.5). The width of the some flexible equipment that will be placed in a
magnification factor is broadened to account for un- builing with a fundamentalperiod of less than as
certainty of actual period ratios. seconds. Because the period of the equipment is not
e. Equivalent Static Force. The equivalent static given, use table 10-1. AP - 5.0.
force for the anchorage of flexible and flexibly (3) An anchorage system is to be designed for
mounted equipment is given by the formula some flexible equipment that will be placed in a
Fj.- Z I AP CP Wp (10-2) building with a fundamental period of roughly 1.4
which is a modification of the rigid equipment for- seconds. Because the period of the equipment is not
mula 3-8, where Ap is the amplification factor for given, use table 10-1. Interpolate between 1.0
the coefficient Cp. The value of Ap is related to the second and 2.0 seconds. AP - 3.7.
M.F. values of figure 10-2; however, the maximum (4) An anchorage system is to be designed for
value of 7.5 is reduced to a value of 5.0 to account equipment with a period T. equal to 0.2 second
for multimode effects that are assumed to be in- (a) In a builng with T -0.5second Because
cluded in the C, values of table 3-4 (i.e., the C, for both the building period and equipment period are
rigid equipment considers the peak floor accelera- known, use figure 10-3(a). TaIT =0.2/0.5 0.4 and
tion for a combination of modes; however, only one Ap = 2.7.
of these modes will excite the single resonance fre- (bi In a building with T = 1.4 seconds. Use
quency of the flexibly mounted equipment). The figure 10-3(b). Ta/T = 0.2/1.4 - 0.14 < 1.2. Thus, Al
value of A will be determined by one of the alterna- is equal to the value in Table 10-1; Ap = 3.7.
tives listedbelow. (5) An anchorage system is to be designed flr
(1) If the periods of the building and equipment equipment with a periodT. equal to 20 seconds.
are not known, AP = 5.0. (a) In a building with T = 0.5 second <,
(2) If the fundamental period of the building is figure 10-3(a). T.IT = 2.010.5 = 4.0; Ap = 1.0.
known (see para 10-4c(1)), but the period of the (JoIn a building with T 1.4 seconds. Use
equipment is not known, Ap is determined by table figure 10-3(b). T - 2.0/1.4 = 1.4. Interpolate
10-1. between the curves for T = 1.0 seconds and T = 2.0
(3) If building and equipment periods are both seconds. Ap = 3.0.
known, Ap may be approximated by the graph in g. Lateral Bracing. Stiffening of the equipment
figure 10-3. supports by lateral bracing may be used to reduce
f Use of the Equivalent Static ForceProcedure. the appendage period; thus, possibly reducing the
The force Fp of formula 10-2 will be applied in the design seismic loads. Lateral bracing for compres-
same manner as the force Fp for rigid equipment in sion members expressly designed for seismic forces
chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(G). As an aid to determin- will not exceed the slenderness limitation of Jr <
ing the Ap value, the following examples are given. 200 in any direction. L is the unbraced length in
10-4
TM -809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
,M?.W"'.0,0.
-.
10-
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
0.a 1,
6
co
uz 4
2
0
0 0.5 /o 1. 2,4 A.0
7:
7
10-
TM 6-609-10
NAVFAC P-3S5
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
4.0
k 4.o
.0
*; .0
1.0
0
0 0.1 0.6 1.0 le CO
To / 7
... ;.~
i2!.* XS
(a) When the fundamental period of the building is equal or less
than 0.5 seconds (T < 0.5).
0 .O It E.0'
7,/T
(b)When the fundamental period of the building s greater than 0.5
seconds (T > 0.5). (Note: If T/T < 1.2, Ap is equal to value
obtained from Table 10-1.)
10-7
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chop. 13
inches in the direction considered and r is the or by Formula 10-3 in paragraph a, abo
corresponding radius of gyration in inches. whichever is larger. C and S will be determined
h Storage Tank Hydrodynamic Effects Storage prescribed in chapter 3, paragraph 3-3, except that
tanks in which the liquid is rigidly contained need the equipment period Ta (para 10-4b) will be used in
not have hydrodynamic effects included in the lieu of the building period T. When the periods are
seismic design when using the equivalent static unknown. (2 CS) will be equal to the maximum value
force procedure. However, when the sloshing effects of 0.28.
of the liquid could be detrimental to the function of c. Equipment Classified as Structures Other
the tank, the hydrodynamic effects will be Than Buildings. For large or complex equipment, or
considered. Refer to chapter 11, paragraph 11-4, for when equipment is supported by a large or complex
guidance in utilizing established principles of fluid structure, the equipment and support system are
mechanics and structural dynamics. classified as structures other than buildings and
their seismic design is governed by the provisions in
10-5. Equipment on the ground. Equipment chapter 11, Structures Other Than Buildings.
classified as equipment on the ground will be that Example of equipment that are classified in this
equipment in contact with or buried in the soil; that category are large pole mounted transformers
equipment supported by means of a slab, footing, or (Design Example F-2), a missile tracking device
pedestal directly supported by the soil or on piles situated on a truss tower Design Example F-3) and
embedded in the soil; or equipment which Is large stacks or chimneys supported on the ground.
mounted on a tower, pole, or other similar structure The equivalent static lateral force criteria is given
that is soil-supported. Such equipment may be clas- by formula 3-1 in chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(D).
sified in one of three general categories, depending
on its size, shape, and dynamic characteristics. The Fp VZIKCSW (3-1)
general categories are: (a)rigid and rigidly mounted where K is equal to 2.0 or 2.5 as prescribed in table
equipment; (b) flexible or flexibly mounted 3-3 and in chapter 11. Distribution of lateral forces
equipment; and c) large complex equipment or will be in accordance with chapter 3, paragraph
equipment on large or complex supports that are 3-3(E). For systems with uniform mass distribe'
classified as structures other than buildings tion, such as stacks and chimneys. refer
(chapter 11). paragraph 10-8 for distribution of lateral forces.
a Rigid and Rigidly Mounted Rigid and rigidly
mounted equipment located on the ground are de- 10-6. Lighting fixtures in buildings. In ddi-
fined in the same manner as equipment considered tion to the requirements of the preceding para-
in paragraph 10-3 except that the weight limitation graphs, lighting fixtures and supports will conform
need not be considered. The equivalent static lateral to the Standards for Safety UL-57 and require-
force is given by the formula ments given hereinafter.
iFp-Z I 23 Cp) W 110-31 a. Materialsand Construction.
as prescribed by chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(G). Cp is 11) Fixture supports will employ materials
prescribed in table 3-4. The two-thirds reduction which are suitable for the purpose. Cast metal parts,
factor applies for equipment and machinery sup other than those of malleable iron, and cast or rolled
ported at ground level that is rigid and is rigidly threads will be subject to special investigation to as-
attached (table 3-4, footnote 1). sure structural adequacy.
12) Loop and hook or swivel hanger assemblies
b. Flexible or Fkxibly Mounted Flexible or for pendent fixtures shall be fitted with a restrain-
flexibly mounted equipment located on the ground ing device to hold the stem in the support position
responds to seismic motion in a similar manner that during earthquake motions. Pendent supported
a structure responds to seismic motion. Such equip fluorescent fixtures shall also be provided with a
ment is generally not subjected to the additional flexible hanger device at the attachment to the fix-
magnification factors of similar equipment located ture channel to preclude breaking of the support.
in the elevated stories of buildings. Equipment con- The motion of swivels or hinged joints shall not
sidered in this paragraph is limited to that which cause sharp bends in conductors or damage to insu-
can be approximated by a single degreeof-freedom lAtion.
system (para 10-4a). The equivalent static lateral 5; 13) Each recessed fluorescent individual
force is given by the formula continuous row of fixtures shall be supported b
Fp'Z I (2 CS} W, 10-4) seismic resistant suspended ceiling support systemw-
10-s
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
and shall be fastened thereto at each comer of the fire protection. Designers of fire protection systems
fixture; or shall be provided with fixture support will thus obtain a more unified approach to seismic
wires attached to the building structural members design; one which will be consistent with all NFPA
using two wires for individual fixtures and one wire requirements.
per unit of continuous row fixtures. These suppor b. Pipes andDucts That Do Not Require Special
wires (minimum No. 12 ga. wire) will be capable of Seismic Restraints. Seismic restraints may be omit-
supporting four times the support load. ted from the following installations: (Exception: For
(4) A supporting assembly which is intended to essential fcilities, critical piping will be designed In
be mounted on an outlet box will be designed to ac- accordance with para c.)
commodate mounting features =foakr-In boxes. Ti) Gas piping less than 1-inch inside diameter.
threeinch plaster rings, and fixture studs. (2) Piping in boiler and mechanical equipment
(5) Each surface mounted fluorescent individ-
ual or continuous row of fixtures shall be attached rooms less than 1-1/4 inches Inside diameter.
(3) All other piping less than 2-1/2 inches inside
to a seismic resistant ceiling support system.
Fixture support devices for attaching to suspended diameter.
ceilings shall be a locking type scissor clamp or a full 4) All electrical conduit less than 2-1/2 inches
loop band which will securely attach to the ceiling inside diameter.
(5) All rectangular air handling ducts less than
support. Fixtures attached to underside of a 6 square feet In cross sectional area.
structural slab shall be properly anchored to the (6) AR round air handling ducts less than 28
slab at each corner of the fixture. inches in diameter.
(6) Each wall mounted emergency light unit (7) Al piping suspended by individual hangers
shall be secured in a manner to hold the unit in place 12 inches or less in length from the top of pipe to the
during a seismic disturbance. bottom of the support for the hanger.
b. Tests. h lieu of the requirements for equip- (8) Al ducts suspended by hangers 12 inches or
ment supports given In paragraph 10-4, lighting less in length from the top of the duct to the bottom
fixtures and the complete fixture supporting of the support for the hanger.
assembly may be accepted by passing shaking table
k tests approved by the using agency. Such tests will c. Pipes Not Related to Fire Protection. Piping
be conducted by an approved and Independent not governed by paragraph a. or b. above will be
testing laboratory, and the results of such test will designed in accordance with the applicable following
specifically state whether or not the lighting fixture provisins.
supports satisfy the requirements of the approved (1) General The provisions of this paragraph
tests. Suspension systems for light fixtures as apply to the following.
Installed, that are free to swing a minimum of 45' (a} Risers. Al risers and riser connections.
from the vertical in all directions and will withstand, See paragraph 10-7c(2) for design provisions and
without failure, a force of not less than four times design example figure 9, Water Risers.
the weight it Is inteded to support wi be (bi Horizontalpipe. All horizontal pipes and
acceptable. attached valves. For the seismic analysis of
horizoifld pipes, the equivalent static force will be
10-7. Piping In buildings. Pipes are categorized considered to act concurrently with the full dead
as either (a) pipes related to fire protection. {b pipes load of the pipe, including contents.
not requiring seismic restraints, or M ervice pipes (c) Connections. All connections and brackets
not related to fire protection. for pipe will be designed to resist concurrent dead
a. Are Protection Systems. All water pipes for .end equivalent static forces. The seismic forces will
fire protection systems will be designed under the be determined from the appropriate provisions be-
provisions of the current issue of the "tandard for low. Supports will be provided at all pipe joints
the Installation of Sprinkler Systems" ce the Na- unless continuity is maintained. See figure 10-8 for
tional Fire Protection Association NFPA No. 1). acceptable sway bracing details.
(1) Justification. Pipes designed under WFPA (dJ Flexib. couplings ad expansion joints.
No. 1 have performed satisfactorily during earth- Flexible couplings will be provided at the bottoms of
quakes. To avoid possible conflict in some areas FUmers for pipes larger than 3-1/2 inches in diameter.
with the NFPA recommendations, the criteria es- 'lexible couplings and expansion joints will be
tablished In the following paragraphs will not be braced laterally unless such lateral bracing will in-
made applicable to piping expressly designed for terfere with the action of the flexible coupling or
10-9
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
expansion joint. See figure 10-9 for typical details sidered in figure 10-7. If temperature stresses a-
of pipe entrance to buildings. See figures 12-4 and appreciable, substantiating calculations are
12-7 (chap 12, Utility Systems) for some typical quired.
flexible couplings. (aJ Use of Figure 10-. The maximum spans
(el Spreaders. Spreaders will be provided at and design forces were developed for Z I Ap Op =
appropriate intervals to separate adjacent pipe lines 1.50. For lower Z I ADCD values the spans and
unless the pipe spans and the clear distance between forces may be adjusted y the values in table 10-2.
pipes are sufficient to prevent contact between the Table 10-2 Muldp~ectoa Fwtors
pipes during an earthquake. for Figure 20-7, in Seismic Zones 1.2 andS
(2) Rigid and rigidly attached piping systems o0 When ZIA C NotEqualto L5
Rigid and rigidly attached pipes will be designed in L ~F
accordance with paragraph 10-3. The equivalent Zone feet) (pmdsl ZIA.C.
static lateral force Is given by the formula 3-8 in 3 rr I I 1.12
chapter 3, paragraph 3-3(G), 2 1.260.5 0.58
1 1.36 0.3 0.28
F.-Z 1 %Wp (3-8-
(bi Separationbetween pipes Separation will
where Cp is equal to 0.30, and Wp is the weight of be a rnimmum of four times the calculated maxi-
the pipes, the contents of the pipes, and attach- mum displacement due to F., but not less than 4
ments. The forces will be distributed in proportion inches clear between parallel pipes, unless spreaders-
to the weight of the pipes, contents, and attach- are provided (para 10-7c(1)(e)).
ments. A piping system is assumed rigid if the (c) Clearance from walls or rigid elements will
maximum period of vibration is 0.05 second (for be a minimum of three times the calculated displace-
pipes that are not rigid see para (3)below). Figures ment due to F., but not less than 3 inches clear from
10-4, 10-5, and 10-6, which are based on water- rigid elements.
filled pipes with periods equal to 0.05 second, are to (4) Alternative method for flexible piping sys-
be used to determine the allowable span-diameter tem& If the provisions in the above paragraphs
relationship for Zones 1, 2, 3, and 4 for standard appear to be too severe for an economical design, al-
(40S) pipe; extra strong (80S) pipe; Types K, L, and ternative methods based on the rationale describ-
M copper tubing; and 85 red brass or SPS copper in paragraph 10-4, Flexible and Flexibly Moun.
pipe. Equipment, and paragraph 10-8, Stacks tn-
(3) Flexible piping systems. Piping systems Buildings, may be applied to flexible piping sys-
that are not in accordance with the rigidity require- tems.
ments of paragraph 10-7c2) (i.e., period less than
0.05 seconds) will be considered to be flexible I.e., 10-8. Stacks. Stacks are actually beams with
period greater than 0.05 seconds). Flexible piping distributed mass and, as such, cannot be approxi-
systems will be designed for seismic forces with con- mated accurately by single-mass systems. The
sideration given to both the dynamic properties of design criteria presented herein apply to either can-
the piping system and the building or structure in tilever or singly-guyed stacks. All stacks designed
which it is placed. In lieu of a more detailed analysis, under the provisions of this paragraph must have a
the equivalent static lateral force is given by for- constant moment of inertia or must be approxi-
mula 10-2 of paragraph 10-4e, mated as having a constant moment of inertia.
Stacks having a slightly varying moment of inertia
Fp-ZI ApCWp (10-2)
will be treated as having a uniform moment of
where A = .0, Cp 0.30, and W is the weight of inertia with a value equal to the average moment of
the pipes, the contents of the pipes, and attach inertia.
ments. The forces will be distributed in proportion a. Stacks on Buildings. Stacks that extend more
to the wpight of the pipes, contents, and attach- than 15 feet above a rigid attachment to the
ments. Figure 10-7 may be used to determine maxi building will be designed according to the criteria
mum spans between lateral supports for flexible prescribed below. Stacks that extend less than 15
piping systems. The values are based on Zone 4 feet will be designed for the forces prescribed in
water-filled pipes with no attachments. If the jrphapter 3, paragraph 3-3(G), table 3-4, with Cp =
weight of the attachments is greater than 10 percent ^O.80.
of the weight of the pipe, the attachments will be (1) Cantileverstacks
separately braced or substantiating calculations are (a) The fundamental period of the stack
required. Temperature stresses have not been con- be determined from the period coefficient (i.e., (-
10-10
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P45S
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
3. 7- /67_
9K/"V-rol at.gr
ls4 /i0' o/I"'0o 8'-3' 8"'' 6'-0" ____3"
I1-
rol //'o-9" 9q'0o 6I, 9, 6-6 ,
' ,
4 x,/ q4' 5i1-q" 9 oIoQf el- 8,-r /0191
_ ..
£)
,
10-11
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
I1
OI
I0
I0
I0 - - --- -- 4
10-12
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P45
AFM 883, Chap. 13
d0 le
- -_
17 1
0IAMIE S wr cwRMo
EX. COPeR CoPPdR COcPMQ 86S*0 &aS
INCHES MEL PIN S e-LPIPS
SEE
40$ 60Se TYPE T4 TYPf VM TK PS COPP
Pipe t. M
4'e qI'- ' l 'G IV
' 7'_ al 7' W 75 .'1-e
1
114/ ' I '-'?" Jifl'.',-O
co#
S ke / Cd. GN /6 - , e!f a i e _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 0_ _ __-
llll
4 /7'- II / 7 '69 /3 " - / 0 /3'-O ' _______?_
/e 026e'G-9 6'
I8 e7i F- 6 Co
10-13
TM 5-609-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
I.0 R
The assumed maximum stress s 20,000 p.s.i. for steel and 7,000 p.s.l.
for copper. Simple spans (pinned-pinned) are assumed. The calculated
maximum lateral displacements are 3.5 nches for steel (E 29 x 106 p.s.1.)
and 0.6 inch for copper (E * 15 x 106 p.s.i.).
tThe horizontal force (F)on the brace is based on 1.5 w L for the maximum
span. For shorter spans, design (Ldesign/L)F
1044
o
.aa
U.
Z if
I)
)
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
,$TSIEL PIPE
K PplOOT PIECE
WR9EN T1N PL CE EXCEES el. ..... a....
UNGROUTED pipe
10-16
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
0.0909) provided on figure 10-10 unless actually with long anchor bolts than with short ones. The use
computed. of these long anchor bolts has been demonstrated to
(bhThe equivalent static force will be dis- give stacks better earthquake performance. In some
tributed as an inverted triangle per unit length as cases, a pipe sleeve is used in the upper portion of
shown on figure 10-11. the anchor bolt to assure a length of unbonded bolt
(c) The static force per unit length at the top for strain energy absorption. When this type of de-
of the stack will be determined from the following: tail is used, provisions will be made for shear trans-
f 1.6 Z I Ap C w 110-6) fer (e.g., shear keys, etc.). The use of two nuts on
Where anchor bolts is also recommended to provide an ad-
Z and I are defined In chapter
Cp - 0.30 for rigid stacks In Table 3-4
ditional factor of safety.
A, Amplification factor for coefficient Cp, determined
In accordance with paragraph 10-4e 10-9. Bridge cranes and monorails. In addi-
w Weight per unit length of stack tion to the normal horizontal loads prescribed by the
In no case will the product of ApCp be less than 0.8. various other applicable government criteria, the de-
(d) If Ta is greater than 0.7 second, an addi- sign of bridge cranes and monorails will also include
tional concentrated force Ft will be applied to the an investigation of lateral seismic force as set forth
top of the stack. Ft will be determined by Formula in this paragraph.
8-6, where T. is used in lieu of T and V is the sum of a Equivalent Static Force. A lateral force equal
the static forces in paragraph b). The product of to Z Cp times the weight of the bridge crane or
0.07T need not exceed 0.25. monorail will be statically applied at the center of
Ft - 007TV (3-6) gravity of the equipment. This equivalent static
- 007T, f 025 f force will be considered to be applied in any direc-
(2) Guyed Stacks. The analysis of a guyed stack tion. Cp will be equal to 0.60.
depends on the relative rigidities of the cantilever b. Weight of Equipment. The weight of such
resistance and the guy wire support systems. If the equipment need not include any live load; and the
wires are very flexible, the stack will respond in the equivalent static force so computed will be assumed
manner of the fundamental mode of vibration of a to act nonconcurrently with other prescribed non-
cantilever (para (1) above). If the wires are very seismic horizontal forces when considering the
..1"
rigid, the stack will respond in a manner similar to design of the crane and monorails. When consid-
the higher modes of vibration of a cantilever with ering the design of the building, the weight of
periods and mode shapes similar to those shown in equipment will be included with the weight of the
figure 10-10. The fundamental period of vibration of building.
the guyed system will be somewhere between the
values for the fundamental and the appropriate 10-10. Elevators. Power-cable driven elevators
higher mode of a similar cantilever stack. An illus- and hydraulic elevators with lifts over 5 feet will be
tration for a single-guyed stack is shown in figure designed for lateral forces set forth in this chapter.
10-12. The design of guyed stacks is beyond the a. Elements of the ElevatorSupport System. All
scope of this manual. elements that are part of the elevator support
b. Stacks on the Ground For stacks where the system, such as the car and counterweight frames,
stack foundations are in contact with the gr3und guides, guide rails, supporting brackets and
and the stack is not supported by the building, for- framing, driving machinery, operating devices, and
mula 10-6 will be used in lieu of formula 10-5. control equipment, will be investigated for the
f - 16ZI(2CS)w (10-6) prescribed lateral seismic forces. See figure 10-13.
where C and S are defined in chapter 3. The product b. Equivalent Static Forces. The lateral seismic
of 2 CS will not be less than 0.20. In the loading dia- forces will conform to the applicable provisions of
gram of figure 10-11, 2 CS will be substituted for paragraphs 10-3 and 10-4 and chapter 3, paragraph
the coefficients Ap Cp. If the period of the stack is 3-31G).
greater than 0.7 seconds, the additional concen- 11) The car and counterweight frames, roller
trated force Ft will be applied in accordance with guide assembly, retainer plates, guide rails, and sup-
paragraph 10-8aUlld). porting brackets and framing will be designed for Cp
p0.30 in Formula 3-8
a Anchor Bolts. Anchor bolts for moment-
resisting stack bases should be as long as possible. F,- ZICpWp 13-8)
A great deal more strain energy can be absorbed where Wp for the elevator cars is the weight of the
10-17
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
If
C -. OqOq - .0110
2 C . 054 C: .oq4oe
L qft L 140-
, 0\ G-
I *
(
. _
8, WV I .446 LL
t . OO-
C z.0149 Gu .00G4' Cu
U.0061 C .,.00Q+
.646 L
I.tL .CIC L
.600 L
)0 .30BL(,
T-
/Z77x7
C.=.OO 'L C .00507 C:O0030
1. (*
.1G L .Oj L C
.G44L a-
.SQ L .471 L11.
.ItR+L'
.OSO'LG
______________________________________________________________ a
C -. OOQ0e C .00179
Ta: FUNOAMEtTAL PERIOD (SEC)
w WEIGIIT PER. UNIT LCNGTH OF bEAM (Mb/N)
u LV L = TOTAL bS4hM LENGTI4 (IN.)
Ta C
EE: T= MOMENT OF INERTIA (IN. 4 )
E MODULUS OF eLN.ATICIT'/ (PS)
C= PEWlZ0o CONSTANT
*ARROWS rAWOT6 NODAL POINTS OX OINTS OF No OISPACMNT
10-18
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
ieCouRioN
TeJ~cT JN FUNFMMEMMrAC
D ODMS1.6$IGW
eAL CTeaD SNAPS JrG/JMIC
LCOAMING
C ~PERJ0A Tt f .
I~~F~
I GIACM
4
;7
10-19
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
. 4 ~~ ~ ~ I
,I
7 / GUY
10-20
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P455
ARM 88-3, Chap. 13
,'
NK.&ua-
pI
10-21
TM 5-8O-10
NAVFAC P-455
AFM 83, Chap. 13
car plus 0.4 times its rated load. The lateral forceq, members of the car frame comply with the lateral re-
acting on the guide raiLs will be assumed to be dis'q straint requirements, a retainer plate Is not required
trbuted 1/3 to the top guide rollers and 2/3 to they for the bottom of the car.
bottom guide rollers of elevator cars and counter. 0) In Seismic Zones 3 and 4, the maimum
weights. ho elevator car and/or counterweight will spacing of the counterweight rail tie brackets tied to
be assumed to be located at its most adverse posi- the building structure shall not exceed 1 feet. An
tion in relation to the guide rails and support intermediate spreader bracket, not required to be
brackets. Horizontal deflections of guide rails will tied to the building structure, shall be provided for
not exceed.1/2 inch between supports and horizontal tie brackets spaced greater than 10 feet and two
deflections of the brackets will not exceed 114 Inch. intermediate spreader brackets are required for tie
(a) In Seismic Zones 3 and 4. a retainer plate brackets greater than 14 feet.
(auxliary guide plate) will be provided at top and (2) Machinery and equipment will be designed
bottom of both car and co t. The clear- for CD 0.30 in Formula 3-8 when rigid and rigidly
ances between the machined faces of the rail and the attal. Flexible or flexibly mounted equipment
retain plate shall not be more than 3116 inc and will be designed in accordance with paragraph 10-4.
the t of the rail shalnot be less than the 1011 Typcl detlhs for securing eulpmnt. See fig
dimension of the machined side face of the rail. ures 10-14 and 10-15 for examples of seismic re-
When a car safety device attached to the lower straints for equipment.
O-
10-22
TM 6-809-1o
NAVFAC P455
AIM 88-3. Chap. 13
ROD RAC/NG 1/A GONAL ItACe
ANCHOR
&oLT-- I
(7Yp. 4 J.1Es Typ. 4, JPC$
I
_ .
- -
I ~\
ALTANAte
,Loc4r/o0N\\
\ \ ZEN
EQUIPMO1NT rYP. CokeS . \>
VusurION MOINT ' ;&I
%.1
Wfe~f A"PPUcAS4O4
A I
MUM,~d
JCIPUMN&3. 4WltPMENr iCRAMtIN C
DE7AIL A il I..De~
m
mi
1i-ISOLAT
'N
_ D'1(ANGE
P RACING
.Ii-i
'V
I.
TY. 4
L.0OK N
_ 2, RA CE 'PAMING
;tGAP
II -7
F-, - - -Tli-- - -- - -
JIIJP{eND(1 QU/PM&NT
W/ VIRArtON mo WIr
aerAH.L C
10-23
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
,LS'QUlMGNr
PAD0 WSRA
HiM <SQI*
Ii
II 'g-oANCHOP SOLr
Me TA I A DeUTA1L
m . -
10-24
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
CHAPTER 11
STRUCTURES OTHER THAN BUILDINGS
11-1. Purpose and scope. This chapter pre- b. Hydrodynamic Effects. In general, W will in-
scribes the seismic design criteria for structures clude the total weight of the contents of an elevated
other than buildings e.g., chap 3, table 3-3, tank. However, properly substantiated procedures
categories 7 and 8). This includes structures, inde- that account for the reduction of the effective
pendent of buildings, that are located on the ground. weight of the liquid due to sloshing may be used.
Refer to chapter 10, Mechanical and Electrical Ele- Such procedures usually result in a mathematical
ments, for seismic design criteria for equipment. In model that represents a two-degree-of-freedom sys-
some cases, equipment qualifies under this chapter tem consisting of an effective rigid mass of liquid
(chap 10, para 10-Sc). For stacks on the ground refer and an effective sloshing mass of liquid. The proce-
to chapter 10, paragraph 10-8b. dure is similar to that used for vertical tanks on the
ground (para 11-4) and some of the technical publi-
11-2. General requirements. Structures other cations referenced in paragraph 11-4 are applica-
than buildings are designed in accordance with ble.* In addition to designing the tower to resist the
chapter S.paragraph 3-3D, formula 3-1 equivalent static eismic forces, the effects of the
V-ZIKCSW (3-1) sloshing liquid on the interior of the tank will be
where K is equal to 2.5 for certain elevated tanks considered.
and inverted pendulums (category 7, table 3-3) and
K is equal to 2.0 for other structures (category 8, c. Elevated Tanks, Pedestal Types. Pedestal type
table 3-3). Structures that have uniformly distrib- elevated water tanks will not be permitted is Seis-
uted mas may have the lateral force distributed in mic Zone Nos. 3 and 4. In Seismic Zone Nos. 1 and 2,
a manner similar to cantilever stacks (see chap 10, K will be equal to .0.
para 10-8b and fig 10-11). Structures that can be 11-4. Vertical tanks (on ground). The basic
approximated by lumped mass systems will have formula V = ZIKCSW will be used for tanks in
the lateral force distributed in a manner similar to which the liquid is rigidly contained (i.e., sloshing
buildings (chap 3, para 3-3(E)). Single degree of free- prevented), for tanks holding highly viscous materi-
"'Om.ft .
dom systems will have the lateral force applied at als, and for pressure tanks. The value of K is equal
the center of gravity of the mass of the structure. to 2.0 (chap S, table 3-3), W is the weight plus con-
11-3. Elevated tanks and other Inverted tents, and for calculating C and S the period T will
pendulum structures. Structures that represent be assumed less than 0.3 seconds unless substan-
inverted pendulums, such as an elevated tank sup- tiated to be longer (i.e., CS = 0.133 to 0.140 per
ported by a tower structure that is light in weight table 4-3 in chap 4). For tanks where the liquid is
relative to the tank and contents, will use the basic not rigidly contained, the hydrodynamic effects of
formula V = ZIKCSW with the value of K equal to the sloshing liquid may be considered in order to re-
2.5. The minimum value of KC is 0.12. The value for duce the effective mass and determine the effective
W will include the effective weight of the contents. centroid of the liquid.
The accidental torsion will be computed as for build- a. Hydrodynamic Effects. During an earthquake
ings. Stresses will be computed for the earthquake there is a complex redistribution of pressures in a
forces in any horizontal direction. tank. The design procedure for considering these
hydrodynamic effects is based on a simplified pro-
a. Elevated Tanks on Cross-Braced Columns. cedure described aqd modified in several technical
Foundation piers shall be interconnected by steel or publicationsg. -7 The effective force distribution is
reinforced concrete struts. When supported by piles illustrated in figure 11-1. The liquid is divided into a
or caissons, diagonal struts will also be required. constrained portion and an in-motion portion. (If h is
For most four-legged tanks, uplift and column de- less than 1.5R there is no contrained liquid.) Part of
sign is critical when the horizontal force is applied at the in-motion liquid, combined with the constrained
450 to the major axes (see chap 4, para 4-4c(lb)). liquid, forms the effective mass of the impulsive
Example G-1 in appendix G illustrates the method frce PI (P1 + P2 = PI). The remaining portion of
of obtaining the seismic forces on a four-legged LA.
water tank, including a method for computing the *Reference -4 in paragraph 11-8.
period of vibration required to determine the values
*References lited in paragraph 11-8.
for the C and S coefficients.
11-1
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-345
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
A,,,, .4
P
-sh; )*Zh, +,,
(a) W6ALIleD JUI$AI1C PORC&S (b)lMPu4LStV (c)coNjveCr, y
POXc es Po/ace$
11-2
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
in-motion liquid forms the mass for the convective where Z, I, and K are the same as used in formula
force Pc. PI and Pc are the resultant forces of the 10-1. C and S are dependent on the sloshing period
horizontal pressures on the sides of the tank. PI rep- T para b) below) and the site period Ts (refer to
resents the force of the effective mass of liquid that chap 3). Wc, the weight of the convective liquid, is
moves rigidly with the tank and Pc represents the determined from the effective weight ratio, Wc/W,
force of the effective mass of the sloshing liquid. In in figure 11-8 or table 11-1, where W is the total
addition to PI and Pc, there is a vertical couple, Mb, weight of the liquid.
acting on the bottom of the tank due to the unbal- (6) The sloshing period is determined by
anced vertical pressures (Pb). Bending and overturn- formula 11-4,
ing moments are determined by multiplying PI and T - kT-ih (11-4)
Pc by the effective heights hi and ho, respectively. where kT is determined from figure 11-4 or table
In order to include the effects of Mb below the tank 11-3.
base, modified effective heights h and h are ci The moments at the base of the tank are
-given. determined by formula 11-5,
(1) Rigid body forces. The rigid body forces (fig ML-ZIKC8Wch, (114)
11-&) include the seismic forces due to the impul-
sive liquid, the walls of the tank and the roof. The where b, is the effective height of the convective li-
term rigid body is used to denote the impulsive li- quid. h is determined from the effective height
quid moving rigidly with the tank. Actually, the ratio, h/h, in figure 11-3 or table 11-2, where h is
tank does have some flexibility depending on the the height of the water level (at rest). To calculate
size and shape. For calculating C and S it will be as- stresses in the tank wall, where Mb is not effective,
sumed that the period of the tank and contents is use h. Below the tank base, where Mb is effective,
less than 0.3 second unless substantiated to be use h.
longer. (d: The maximum design height of the slosh-
(a) 'Mne total horizontal rigid body force, VRB. ing wave is determined from formula 11-6 for cylin-
will be determined by formula 11-1, drical tanks O.76(ZI KC SJ R
m x I1-kd(Z I KC S) I11-SI
VRB=Z IK Cs (W,+W,+W) (11-1)
'11_ and from formula 11-7 for rectangular tanks
where Z and I are prescribed in chapter 8, K equals 0.8331ZIKCS)R 11-7)
2.0, and CS equals 0.14 unless a lower value is sub- d m' 1-kd(ZIKCS)
stantiated. W. is the weight of the roof (if any), W,, where kd is obtained from figure 11-5 or table 11-4.
is the weight of the tank walls, and Wl is the weight R is the radius of a cylindrical tank or one-half the
of the impulsive liquid. WI is determined from the plan dimension of a rectangular tank.
effective weight ratio, Wi/W, in figure 11-3 or table (3) Combining the rigid body forces and the
11-1, where W is the total weight of the liquid. sloshing liquid forces. The rigid body forces and the
(b) The moments at the base of the tank are sloshing forces will. be combined by the square root
determined by formula 11-2, of the sum of the squares as shown in formulas 11-8
and 11-9.
MRB'Z I KC S IWh+WKhs+Wjhl 411-2)
Vwe&XV+VIL 11 1-8)
where hr is the height of the roof, E,' is the height to Mta^4iii; i7 111-9)
the center of mass of the tank walls, and hl is the ef- This is consistent with modal analysis procedures
fective height of the impulsive liquid. h1 is deter- where spectral responses of the predominant modes
mined from the effective height ratio, hI/h, in figure are combined in such a manner.
11-3 or table 11-2, where h is the height of the (4) Sloshing wave height d,, The value of
water level fat rest). To calculate stresses in the tank du= must be less than the freeboard height (he-h)
wall, where Mb is not effective, use hi. Below the for the simplified hydrodynamic procedure to be
tank base, where Mb is effective, use bl. valid. If do is greater than (hr-h), liquid will over-
(2) Sloshing liquidforces (Figure 11-2b). flow the top of the tank when there is no roof or will
(a) The sloshing liquid forces VSL are equal to e confined by the roof if a roof exists. When there
the convective force, Pc, and will be determined by .are interior elements, such as baffles or roof sup-
formula 11-3, ports, the effects of sloshing liquid on these ele-
VSL=ZIKCSWC (11-3) ments will be considered.
114
--
TM 65-09-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFMSS-3, Chap. 13
'i
3d
A-
4 dMax.
4 AlRC
_ -Z p
,......
Ad en
_ta
JswZZKC$W,.
a ZIXCJww PCaZIKCjWc
4 :ZZK C Wl
VJA Pc
I
M,,(4se w 4As) Mjj,.(AO4W SAM) c4c OXEN
a/Dt hc
up., h fAwSv # PA, 4w
13
I
Ii
a
iZ.
1%
'9
C.
4 C OwE
l.
0.8 C
far A OhMpul.S/ V&)
U
it
IL
wl
0 1.0 2.0 5.0 4.0 . 5.
Ak
i>:
'14
TM 5609-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
TabUe 11-1. fffeotive Weight Ratio "--,/ m
k.
(See Pigur?11-3(a) for Ptot)
3 10.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 13.5 4.0 5.0
W1W, impulsive 0.29 0.42 0.54 0.71 0.79 0.83 0.86 0.88 0.89 0.91
W /WI |Cylindrical 0.66 0.53 0.43 0.30 0.23 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.11 0.09
convectivej Rectangular 0.69 0.5 0.48 0.34 0.26 0.21 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.11
a 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 12.5 3.0 13.5 4.0 5.0
hj/h, Impulsive 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.41 0.42 0.44 0.45 0.45 0.46
hi/h. mpulsive 1.6 1.0 0.80 0.58 0.51 0.49 0.48 0.48 0.47 0.47
hC/hq Cylindrical 0.63 0.57 0.60 0.68 0.74 0.79 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.89
convective Rectangular 0.53 0.55 0.58 0.65 0.71 0.76 0.79 0.82 0.84 0.87
hi/h, Cylindrical 1.6 0.96 0.79 0.73 0.75 0.79 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.89
convective Rectangular 2.0 1.11 0.86 0.73 0.74 0.77 .80 0.82 0.84 0.87
11-i
TM 409-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM SS4. Chap. 13
4
£4
LANI
CY1.04MRJCAL
I
0 A. I.0 fo0 5.0 ' 5.0
:*:
11-7
- -
TM 6-809-10
NAVIfAC Post
AM 8-3, Chap. 13
TabZe 11-3. Period Constant kid
(See FipL % 11-4 for PZot)
kT, rectangular 1.5 1.1 0.92 0.73 0.63 0.56 0.51 0.44 0.39
_
m 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 4.0 5.0
kd. cylindrical 1.33 1.62 1.75 1.83 1.84 1.84 1.84 1.84 1.84
kd, rectangular 1.04 1.31 1.45 1.55 1.57 1.58 1.58 1.58 1.58
it-$
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC Pa5
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
,cCyLIjMDRlCAL
!.& I -
14
I.e
1.0 -I
Ad
0.6
0.;
A ui.64 +
Act P7i ( 8 4 ) CYL INRICAL
kt si*,58 iph (I. COX) , R6CTANGL/4
A
0.E
0.2
I... I .. I .
. . . . I
. .
. . . .
. I
. . . .
. . I
.
1.0 5.0
to .oA/R
11-9
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
b. Designof Tank The critical items of concern in tion will be given to the wave shape resulting from
the seismic design of the tank are (1) horizontalu the seismic ground motion. Where changes in the
shear at the base, (2)overturning and uplift forces ate support system, configuration, or soil condition
foundations, (3) compression buckling of the tani occur, flexible couplings will be provided as dis-
shell, and (4)when tie-downs are used, the resulting cussed in chapter 12.
additional stresses at the attachment of the anchors
(e.g., possibility of tearing the shell). The stresses 11-8. References.
resulting from the seismic forces will be combined a. Housner, G. W., "Dynamic Pressures on Ac-
with other applicable stresses. Procedures for the celerated Fluid Containers," Bulletin of the Seismo-
design of vertical tanks are beyond the scope of this logical Society of America, VoL 47, January 1957,
manual. Industry standards (at the time of this pp. 15-35.
writing) are developing seismic criteria for supple- . U.S. Atomic Energy Commission, "Nuclear
ments for the general design criteria Fle0 (e.g., Reactors and Earthquakes," TID-7024, Washing-
AWWA and API). Procedures used for the design of ton, DC, 1963 (corrected 1969), pp. 183-195 and
tanks will be substantiated by means of rational 367-390.
analysis, tests, or past experience. c. U.S. Atomic Energy Commission, "Summary
of Current Seismic Design Practice for Nuclear Re
11-5. Horizontal tanks (on ground). The basic actor Facilities," TID-25021, Washington, DC,
formula V = ZIKCSW will be used. For this type of 1967, pp. 124-137.
tank, the value of K will be 2.0. The critical items of d Blume, J. A., et al., Earthquake Engineering
concern in the seismic design are the stresses in the for NuclearReactorPacilties, John A. Blume & As.
saddles and in the base footing. The soil pressure in sociates, Engineers, JAB-101, San Francisco, 1971.
the transverse direction due to overturning may be pp.111-123.
critical. The resultant of forces must always fall . Veletsos. A. , "Seismic Effects in Flexible
within the middle third of the footing pad. Liquid Storage Tanks, "'Proceedings of the FRfth
11-6. Retaining walls. The design. of retaining World Conference on Earthquake Engineering,
walls for seismic forces in Seismic Zone 4 will use an Rome, Italy, 1973.
additive seismic factor of 20 percent'of the total f Veletaos, A. S., and J. Y. Yang, "Earthquake
earth pressure forces plus 20 percent of the weight Response of Liquid-Storage Tanks," Advances in
of the wall at a point 2/3 the fill height above the Civil Engineering Through Engineering Mechanics,
base of the retaining wall. It is obvious that the ProceedingsSecond Annual EngineeringMechanics
stresses in the concrete and reinforcing steel will not Division Specialty Conference, ASCE, May 1977,
be critical as the increase in stresses or decrease in pp. 1-24.
load factor is greater than the increase due to seis- g. Clough, D. P., Experimental Evaluation of
mic load. The overturning effect on the footing may Seismic Design Methods for Broad Tanks, Univer-
be critical in some cases. The footing will be sized so sity of California Earthquake Engineering Research
that there is no theoretical net tension between Center, Report Number UCBIEERC-77/10, May
footing and the supporting ground. Refer to chapter 1977.
4. paragraph 4-8, for design of foundations. In h. American Water Works Association. "AWWA
Seismic Zones 1, 2, and 3, the Z factor wll be applied Standard D100 for Welded Steel Tanks for Water
to the 20 percent factor used in Seismic Zone 4. Storage" appendix A, Seismic Design of Water
Storage Tanks, ANSI/AWWA D100-79,1979d. '
11-7. Burled structures. Buried tanks and pipes i American Petroleum Institute, "API Standard
of moderate size, or smaller, generally do not require 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage" Seismic
special seismic design considerations if applicable Design of Storage Tanks, 7th Edition-1980, ap-
nonseismic design criteria are satisfied. However, pendix E.
tanks, tunnels, pipes, etc., which have large cross- j. Wozniak, R. S., and W. W. Mitchell, "Basis of
sections, or are classified for critical or important Seismic Design Provislins for Welded Steel Oil
usage, will require special considerations for seismic Storage Tanks." API, Refining, 43rd midyear meet-
design that are not included In the scope of this ing, CBT-,5W Toronto, Canada, May 197&
manual. In the design of long structures, considera-
'11-10
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
CHAPTER 12
UTILITY SYSTEMS
12-1. Purpose and scope. This chapter pre- the seismic resistance of utility systems are site ge-
scribes the criteria for utility systems and compo- ology and structural configuration.
nents 5 feet or farther beyond buildings in seismic 6. Site Geology. The geology beneath a facility
areas. Utility systems have been classified as being exerts considerable influence on the magnitude of
either above grade or underground. Principles, fac- the surface accelerations experienced during an
tors, and concepts involved in seismic design are il- earthquake. Current seismic building codes gener-
lustrated. These are not mandatory, therefore, other ally recognize this by taking soil type into account
equivalent methods or schemes complying with in seismic design (e.g., S factor In chap 3). The best
applicable agency guide specifications and the in- material on which to construct a utility system,
tent of this manual may be used. from a strictly seismic standpoint, is sound rock.
Unconsolidated sand or soft clay present the
12-2. General requirements. Utility systems greatest hazards. Unconsolidated materials, either
will be planned and designed in accordance with the native soil or fill, present hazards of uncontrolled or
provisions given in this chapter, except as follows: differential settlements. Even when utilities are
a. Systems Above Grad Utility system compo- built on good soils, considerable structural difficul-
nents and equipment supports above grade will be ties can develop. The interface between native soil
designed in accordance with the applicable provi- and engineered fill can present serious earthquake
sions of chapter 10, Mechanical and Electrical Ele- hazards if the fill is improperly compacted or is im-
ments. properly benched or terraced. Seismically induced
6. Rigorous Analysis. No part of this chapter will relative movement of the fill with respect to the na-
be construed to prohibit a rigorous analysis of an tive material can, through settlement or through
exterior utility system either above or below grade slippage at the fill-native material interface, shear
by established principles of structural dynamics and off an underground utility pipe.
soil mechanics. Such an analysis must demonstrate c. Structural Configuration. Structurally flexible
that the exterior utility system will withstand. underground systems have better earthquake re-
4- without disrupting service, the ground accelerations sistance than rigid systems. Underground utilities
induced in the system by a major seismic event. The can often be displaced during an earthquake, despite
effect of such an event on the system will be deter- the relatively large-magnitude forces that may be
mined using either acceleration-time history records required to initiate movement. A flexible system.
or equivalent response spectra of major seismic designed to permit some relative movement, Will be
events such as the May 18, 1940, El Centro earth- less apt to fail during a major earthquake. Utility
quake. Te actual earthquake record or response pipes, rigidly attached to appurtenances, can be
spectra used, including artificially generated sheared off by seismicallyinduced differential set-
spectra, will be seismologically appropriate to the tlements between the appurtenance structure and
site and may be scaled in amplitude for maximum the adjoining pipes. Flexibility should be provided
base acceleration as determined by the earthquake in utility pipes at entrances and exits to heavy, rigid
history of the area and by the principles of engineer- appurtenances, and especially in systems dependent
ing sesmology. upon sound, uncracked pipe and connections for
satisfactory performance. The same is true for pipes
12-3. Earthquake considerations for utility passing from native material into engineered fill.
systems. a Earthquake-ResistantFacilities. A While it is not feasible to design the utility pipe to
fundamental precept of seismic design is that it is support some portion of the fill, the pipe can be
virtually impossible to design facilities to resist made flexible at the interface to thus accommodate
every earthquake. Some damage must always be some relative movement.
expected. The proper emphasis for good seismic
design of exterior utility systems should then be on 12-4. General planning consideratlons. The
the development of earthquake-resistant facilities considerations presented herein are guidelines for
for which measures have been taken to limit damage tO planning of earthquake-resistant facilities. Since
and to provide for expedient restoration of service. some damage should always be expected with major
The two most important parameters in evaluating seismic activity, the considerations given here
12-1
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chop. 13
stress procedures to be followed to lessen the effects ice lines in buildings should be kept available for
of seismic activity on utility systems and service.2. emergencies.
a. Municipal-size facilities should be planned and 12-5. Specific planning considerations. The
designed with due regard for possible seismic requirements given here are intended to be used in
emergencies; disaster plans and equipment which the planning of a utility system of either a major
may be required should be anticipated. Examples of facility of municipal size or an individual facility of
emergency provisions and policies which may be high priority in seismic areas. These requirements
anticipated in the planning stage are as follows: supplement applicable agency manuals.
(1) Specialized emergency equipment, such as
mobile flame ionization detectors necessary for the a. GeneraL Whenever practical, utility piping
detection of gas leaks, should be available. should avoid unstable ground or known earthquake
(2) Structures that may be used as emergency faults, should not traverse native soil structures
operation centers should be equipped with battery having widely varying degrees of consolidation, and
or other standby power supply systems for com- should not pass from natural ground to unstable fill.
munication with emergency vehicles by two-way b. Water. Where possible it is preferable to have
radio. at least two independent sources of water supply for
(3) Provision should'be made for the procure- municipal-size facilities in Zones 2, 3, and 4 (refer to
ment of gasoline for emergency vehicles. Manually chap 3. parn 3-4 for seismic zone maps). When water
operated fuel pumps should be provided for use in is furnished by a public utility company, a second-
pumping gasoline in the event of power failure. ary supply may be provided from onsite wells or
(4) Emergency battery and/or gasoline driven from an onsite reservoir. When the water source con-
generator-powered lights should be provided for use sists of an onsite well, an additional well should be
in restoring utility service in the event of a power drilled at a point as widely separated as is practical
failure. from the first well. Decentralization of municipal- "ftwi
(5) The engineering staff responsible for the size waterworks will provide a more flexible water J
utility system should, from time to time, bring the supply network and thus promote a more depend-
emergency seismic disaster plans up to date. able water supply during a disruptive earthquake.
(6) Seismic disaster plans should include con- Where practicable, onsite water distribution sys-
tingency plans defining procedures for dealing with tems in Zones 2, 3, and 4 should be laid out in a grid
fires, landslides, and possible health hazards result- pattern. In the event service is disrupted in one sec-
ing from disrupted sanitary facilities. tion of the grid, water may be drawn from any of
b. Individual Facilities. Examples of earthquake several adjacent sections. The grid will be valved to
disaster procedures that may be implemented into permit the isolation of breaks and to facilitate the
the design in the planning stage are as follows: emergency distribution of water (e.g., fig 12-8).
(1) Persons having responsibility for the super- a. Gas. Provisions will be made such that installa-
vision and maintenance of critical facilities should tions normally supplied by public utility systems in
establish earthquake disaster plans. Such plans will Zones 2, 3 or 4 for which a gas outage would be criti-
be subject to the approval of the utility authority. cal can be supplied by a liquid petroleum gas (LPG)
(2) The utility authority should emphasize the standby system. Gas distribution networks in
importance of seismic disaster plans to the super- Zones 1, 2, 3, and 4 will be valved so that breaks in
visory personnel of critical facilities such as hospit- gas lines may be isolated.
als. Seismic disaster plans should be emphasized to d Power. Two independent sources of support are
the same extent as fire protection plans. less likely to be available for electrical distribution
(3) Capability should be established in critical systems than for water and gas supply systems. For
facilities for water to be supplied from emergency
reservoirs or wells. Zones 2, 3, and 4, standby power generating facili-
(4) Personnel should be organized to shut off ties should be maintained for use in critical areas
gas service when necessary and instructed not to re- such as essential systems for hospitals, computer
centers, communication systems, etc., in the event
store service until advised to do so by the utility
authority. For essential facilities in seismic zones 3 of normal power supply disruption. Such standby
and 4, an approved earthquake actuated gas shut off systems may consist of diesel or gasoline engine
valve should be provided. driven electric generators located within the
(5) Plans showing the locations of utility serv- building.
12-2
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
e. Sanitary Sewers. The design of sewer systems estimated pipe movements. Flexibility will be
for municipal-size facilities located in Zones 2, 3, and provided by the use of flexible joints or couplings
4 will incorporate provisions to eliminate as much as (e.g., fig 12-1 through 12-7) at the following points:
practicable the possibilities of wastewater flooding, (1) Immediately adjacent to both sides of the
contamination of groundwater, and contamination surface separating different types of soil having
of open water storage reservoirs, should rupture oc- widely differing degrees of consolidation.
cur to sewers and sewage disposal structures. The (2) At all points that can be considered to act as
design of sewage treatment facilities in Zones 2, 3, anchors.
and 4 will consider the possibility of decentralizing (3) At all points of abrupt change in direction,
treatment facilities to minimize possible damage. and at all tees.
The practicability of decentralization will be c Water. Buildings housing critical functions,
weighed against increased operating, maintenance, such as hospitals, will be provided with two or more
and initial costs. In Zones 2, 3, and 4 a means will be service lines. The service lines will be connected to
provided to rapidly empty and bypass sewage separate sections of the grid so as to provide contin-
treatment and sewage pumping plant facilities. ued service in the event one section of the grid is
Should it be impossible to dump raw sewage into isolated. Services will be interconnected in the
emergency outfalls, some simple method of treating building with check valves to prevent backflow.
the raw sewage should be provided to safeguard Flexible couplings or flexible connections will be
health and prevent a nuisance. Mobile pumping used between valves and lines for valve installations
equipment should be available for pumping raw on pipes 3 inches or larger in diameter. In remote
sewage into the nearest sewer collector in the event areas, auxiliary storage would be an acceptable al-
of a pumping plant breakdown. ternative.
f. Storm Sewers. More damage to storm sewers d! Gas. When secondary or standby gas supply
and storm sewer facilities can be tolerated than for
sanitary sewers and sewage disposal facilities. systems cannot be justified for a site, gas distribu-
Cracked or damaged storm sewers in most instances tion networks.for buildings in Zones 2, 3, or 4 hous-
present little danger to health or property. In ing critical functions dependent upon gas will
certain areas where damage to equipment can result include an aboveground valved and capped stub.
Provision will be made for attachment of a portable,
from flooding or from infiltration and settlement of commercial-sized gas cylinder system to this stub.
fill, care in the design of the storm sewer system
must be taken in order to minimize the possibility of For essential facilities in seismic zones 3 and 4, an
cracked or broken pipes. earthquake-actuated valve will be provided. Provi-
sions will be made for the expedient restoration of
g. Miscellaneous Systems. It is not feasible to service and for the prevention of pilot light leaks
provide secondary distribution systems for central when service is restored. If an earthquake actuated
steam, motor vehicle fuel, air, and imilar utility shutoff valve presents the possibility of disrupted
systems, but all planning considerations given service in buildings where the fire hazard is small, a
above, where applicable, will apply to these sys- manually operated shutoff -valve will be installed.
tems. The location and operation of such a valve will be
12-6. Design considerations. The provisions of made known to the supervisory personnel of the
this paragraph are intended to supplement rather building.
than supersede the provisions of the various mili- e. Power. Individual aboveground components of
tary design manuals and other applicable govern- electrical utility systems will be designed for seis-
ment criteria. mic forces under the provisions of chapter 10. Slack
a. Materialsand Construction. Specifications for will be provided in underground cables whenever
materials and construction will be governed by the such cables enter or exit rigid appurtenances. The
applicable government criteria. provisions of paragraph 12-6b will not be held appli-
cable to underground electrical utility conduits.
b. Pipe Flexibility. No section of a pipe in Zones 2,
3, or 4 will be held fixed while an adjoining section is f. Storm Sewer Facilities. While it is desirable to
free to move, without provisions being made to re- have flexibility in storm sewer pipe, such flexibility
lieve strains resulting from differential movement, catuiot, in most instances, be provided without in-
unless approved calculations show that the pipeline ordinate cost. The provisions of paragraph 12-6b
can resist the stresses caused by the predicted or will not be held applicable to storm sewer pipes.
12-3
*Lz* A..
(-
F (
OO: PRA4CTICE
.
a
,
POOP PACTICE
,~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
SEWER S^EweQ
I
6I-A
PPOV/DE'
FLEXII6tL TY
NELL NOT ENCASED
IAI CONCRETE
AT MANHOLE
__________________________________________________________________________________ i
COMMENr:
PROWVDE P/PE FLEXI8IL7Y AS CLOSE AS
PO$5t8LE TO 4ANHOLF FO0QTIAG. AVOlO
LONG Stt/8 - OUTS . tONG. $TUD - OUTS ARE
MORE SUSCEPT*LPE m EARTH QUAKE
DAMAGE.
'I
r >Z
1.4
SEISMIC DETAILS
GoC
n o
..6OOD
02ACTICE -POOR PPACTCde
IF
be
Ina
be R~rINI16W4LL &/IC*01N RfINIVG WALL,
WALL OR S/M/4.AiR A/LOINO WALL OR
57WCrU4qe SIMllAR SrRUC/ZCRe
COM MeNT:
ALLOW T48 piPe ro PAS5 r#VRU WA44 W/7WVoUr RSJ7ZA/lN
APrICIPAT7 pO$55144& STTLeMet& OF WA4.4 YAROV/O/NG
JUFPIC8N' CLSAR4NCS 4RO /No 1ie.
SEISMIC DETAILS
... .}.
1 .
(N
I I (.
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Every attempt, however, should be made to provide 12-8. STsmIc dtals. Figures 12-1 through
flexibility in the connection of storm sewer pipea# 12-8 are provided to show acceptable seismic de-
rigid appurtenances in Zones 2.3, and 4. -,5 tails. Some of the plates show examples of good and
poor seismic details. Other plates merely illustrate
12-7. As-built drawings. Complete as-built details that have exhibited good seismic details and
drawings will be required under all contracts for new resistance. Where required by the provisions of this
work for water and gas line installations. Such chapter, these recommended eismic details or simi-
drawings will show the location of valves and pipe- lar equivalent details will be incorporated in the util-
lines referenced to permanent structures and exist- ity design.
ing survey monuments.
1<.
:S .' -
12-4
'A, ..
4'
(
I
v tffEC NIXCAL JIT MECHANICAL JOINT
db
, kC./.
Q PPS ANCHOR
7Z CPtPE
mExrJO, 2/~
I. - - A -- I
TTEE q510o1END
COMME-NT:
SHOWN AWOVE ARE 7WO YIOC$ OF ACCEPrAlSLE FLEXIZIE
JOINT5. SNCE ANCHOR j9LOCK6 ARE NOT ReQ'O, PLEX134E
CONNVC.T/ONS ARe NOT NeCeSSARY - POt A NOS OR n Y
THE TEG.
SEISMIC DETAILS
. ,
. _a
JI
,t z 4
)>
0 ><
nz a
CA
I.
I
.
CD
( I (
EI
3k (
p
- / fl,'., r .- ,, m ..
I CFLEXtlL i NE -- OAlCRETE
COUPLING ANCHOR ANCHOR
&LOCK ISLOCK
to-
t)
I COMMEN 7:
GOOO SW/SU/4C ,OS/GH PIC7Ce R/RqU/ S re use
OS PVRECd treo6Le COfP/NGS 7 4N ANCWORED EE .
7Y8 cNCeME ANCAOR AN-OCK /SEo ro PeVNr we #/G0-
I/c'?SSURe WAMER L/NE ^20M SAeA7*fNG ASO , V 707H7S
440tVCeNoT #YA/NESS /S PROv/COE oSr
I/E)/e/t7r
,=L4X/./ . COL4LNGS
.I"
.0
SEISMIC DETAILS _ a_
A >Zp,
40
-6000 PPACTICE POOR PCr/Cff
L n k
oa °
v
-7~~ ',
A4770e. .. . ... ''
-, -
S.d COUPLING-
Ir
ab
COMMAEM
5ETRE PLEXlbILrTr I. PRO IDED Y ME USE OF 7W0
. FLEXlbLa COUPYiNs5; ONE CW ACH SE Of THE SURFACE
SAP RAT/0. THE .iLL AND NATVE O51L..
eW
SeE f44re /0-4-7 AOR 50/4E AD0/TONA4 7YP/ cAL
SEISMIC DETAILS
( I (
(
-1?1 ;
,:z
I
SEISMIC
SEISMIC DETAILS
DETAILS
-' 0
S
:1
. . w L ~ ~I CDI37T UT
SIC7Hf
TY IN I VA
OU~~~~~~~~~~~~~F4CT
TEJ
1*
I-
- a ~~~~.
- - - .~~~
IM4UMIPLXI&L-
( a
(
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
APPENDIX A
STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS
A-1. Purpose and scope. This appendix gives il- walls) will be made flexible or isolated so as not to
lustrative examples for designing various types of affect the distribution of lateral loads or to act as
lateral systems. Generally, the calculations deter- shear walls.
mine earthquake lateral forces and their distribu- e. Metal-deck roofs are considered to form flexible
tion to the resisting elements of the buildings. Some diaphragms, and roof loads are distributed accord-
examples are essentially complete, covering frames, ing to tributary area rather than relative rigidity of
walls, diaphragms, and foundations. Examples that walls below.
are not complete include references to other appen-
dices for examples of shear walls, frames, and
diaphragms. Calculations are not given where ordin- A-4. Design examples.
arily accepted design procedures are involved, such Desion
as sizing and detailing members once forces are Example Description
*S ,! determined.
A-2. Use of appendixes. The appendixes are A-1 Box System. A two-story building with
purely advisory; they are not intended to place bearing walls in concrete using a series
super-restrictions on the manual. The appendixes of interior, vertical load-carrying col-
are not a handbook for the inexperienced designer. umn and girder bents.
Neither the manual nor the manual supplemented A-2 Concrete Ductile Moment Resisting
by the appendixes, can replace good engineering Space Frame. A three-story building
judgment in specific situations. Designers are urged with a complete ductile moment resist-
to study the entire manual Ing space frame in concrete without
shear walls.
A-3. Commentary. a. Unless otherwise indi- A-3 Steel Ductile Moment Resisting Space
cated, all design examples in this appendix are Frame and Steel Braced Frame. A
Of"'- based on Zone 4, where Z = 1.00. But the principles three story building with transverse
and methods for determining lateral forces are alike ductile moment resisting frames and
for all zones. For instance, lateral forces can be con- longitudinal frames with K-bracing.
verted for use in other zones simply by multiplying A-4 Dual Bracing System. A two-story
by the value of "Z" required for the applicable zone building in concrete with a ductile
(viz. 8/4 for Zone 8, 8/8 for Zone 2, and 3116 for Zone moment resisting space frame and
1). with shear walls.
b. Examples A-l, A-2, A-3, and A-5 are for the A-5 Dual Bracing System. A three-story
same basic building, using (1)bearing walls, (2)con- building with a ductile moment resist-
crete frames, (3) steel frames, and (4) frames in ing space frame in structural steel and
combination with shear walls (a dual bracing sys- with shear walls in concrete.
tem) respectively. These examples tend to illustrate A-6 Wood Box System A two-story wood
the relationship between architectural features (fen- framed building, using wood floor and
estration and materials of construction) and roof decks, and wood stud walls with
structural design. plywood sheathing.
A-7 Special Configuration. A one-story
c. A 10-pound-per-square-foot weight is added to building with concrete bearing walls on
the roof for the seismic effect of the upper half of the three sides and open on one side.
top-story partitions. A-8 L-Shaped Building. A three-story
d It is assumed that stairs are detailed so as not building with bearing walls in concrete,
to transmit shears from floor to floor. Also, remov- using a series of interior vertical load-
able and special partitions (such as utility room carrying columns and girder bents.
A-1
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
Construction Outline.
Roof: Exterior Walls:
Built-up, 5-ply. Bearing walls in concrete,
Metal decking with furred with GWB finish
insulation board. Partitions:
Suspended ceiling. Non-structural removable dry-
2nd - Floor : wall, except concrete as
Metal decking with concrete fill. structurally required.
Asphalt tile.
Suspended ceiling.
1st Floor:
Concrete slab-on-grade.
A-3
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 83, Chap. 13
. J.f
Loads.
Roof: ,,., 2nd Floor :
5-ply roofing - 6.0 p.s.f. Finish - 1.0 p.s.f.
1" insulation a 1.5 Steel deck * 3.1
Steel deck a 2.3 Concrete fill - 32.0
Steel purlins a 3.7 Steel beams - 5.9
Steol girders Steel girders &
columis - 1.2 columns a 1.5
Clling - 10.0 Partition - 20.0
Miscellaneous - 1.0 Ceiling - 10.0
Dead Load 25.7 p.s.f. Miscellaneous a 1.0
Dead Load - 74.5 p.s.f.*
Add for seismic:
Partitions 10.0 .s.f. Liv,a Load * 50.0 p.s.f.
Total for'selsmic 35.7 p.s.f.*
Live Load' 20 p.s.f. (no snow)
Materials.
Structural steel .......... F - 36 k. s. i.
Concrete ................. =- 4,000 p.i,.l., E 3.6 x 106 psi
Reinforcing steel ......... fr ' 40,000 p.i.i.
Allowable soil pressure ... - 3,000 p.i ,.f. Vertical Load
. . w~
Allowable soil pressure ... - 4,000 p.,.f. Vertical plus Seismic
*Weight of shear walls are not included here. The weight of the concrete
shear walls are calculated on pages 4 and 5. The weights of the exterior
windows and architectural,.wall panels are included in the partition weights.
A-4
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
I I
'111
A4
TM 5-809-10
NAYFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
A-6
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-M5
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
A-7
TM 5-80-10
NAVFAC P-M
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Jo/fCTrION. O ' 00 -C CS
,NfiWO.Sic ?or,7
5s1o Nor es sRaATg rH AN 0 14
Z to W I.o 300
=
_
#?S0
Vs idto X 614 I 0 IX
/WwF /a^ t56
A-$
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
LATIAL FaR0C
cfNs - -U OlscTN
V ZZKCSW (#tMULA -)
Z 1.0 (ON 4YrA L 3 -)
I .0 ( JAbLE - 2 )
K a 1.33 (8OX SYSreM, rTA 3-3)
C I/
i /5 (PORMULA 3-2)
/es ( 7 UNWOWN, * J: MAX. VALUe)
h e T.
*-TcrION re __6 _ a Cs
N - S 46 . / C . /,4 . 24
o jiNCeCr<0.7
4
LEVEL
SIVEL 1- r.f
Fv Pr. Rr
k £/4 Al"r-JZolh
ifth Pg V K-"'I K-r
A 4or
5Jf .SJ 1B
534 J5'
12 I11 l00 11,880 Oft 147
Jt /6/4 30 300
GRO O
,fORce
,
L %MEA
I
_ _
,
A60 K
_
A1MON T
1,S 1 3KI
A-9
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-35S
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
WA.S PISR HF n W*
-1
_
(CORM
_ =PIX . PIER
0 L1i4 It~12ŽP~L~J(V , 2,3, C' 4' 1.5 0.22 346A!
Lt e.v04cd ~R'351
WALL 1-
I N/, STORY 04o2
UD
WALL It' 48' 0S 0.019
CN Ae
CANrT
A(w4L.)z0.0I&.0.O06+o.028 zwa4c G 48' 0.52 0
(COMER CANT
R (WALL): w(.L)' t4 * 3 *o.0I
I OiAL2AVG ou.,qToao44A.7
(Ccu RCA i.
L js ot ' J 2 IZ' 116.5 0.C10.065 1.+
WAL 3 ZwN Sro&Y JZ .
(W44t S JIM-) CORN R CA r.) i 38.1 *9_t
FOA TUIS 5XAMPr.ffCoN7*LoJT. Is
PROVIOC M MAI WALC A0Rf
F.eXub(d, IeReaoDTSruurIm
MOM 4OAD TO Wf. 7 I
NOT: SINce A. WALL.S ARG TG ZAMO 7H/C/Q/tS5 (i.e. to") Twe V4(IS
R'OM AIG.4-11 R It" W4CS MAY JS UJeD P0R 96?.A71TtW
RIGI0 r/1S wlrT4Ur AAINJ4MdN7-.
Example A-1 8 of 44 Box System
A.10
( (
mz
ftn>.D
:r :.E1
_ _
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 83, Chap. 13
WA p fN n N/n .aw I R
. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - -- 18
1 __1i*
AVd
48 oJ5 0.01.5 5s.5
I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~pf
A-12
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
I
.~~~~~~~
I~~~~~~~~
u
mk
,*--.-
V-,*& . . .
.
WA LL. 7 Js. 4toAy
srp~ ~~~(CUGACAr. S
r,
A-13
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
OP RIGJTirTY
CENTR OF MAX5 ANO C7GRop
ROOP 13/APHRAGM
C6A7IR MASS
CenrTGRIOX MAS 0 I( oo
;?m : szoza a 7,5 5 3 4 z~
CeNmrc Op AiGJi7'Y:
CA4CU;4rl0NJ NOT ReQuito s/iCe ROOP
DlAPHRAGM S 46Xt/44 A3 XSdlJMIC PORCS
4AS /ST7R/13&T/Ue SY 7RtThlJARY AREA.
CONT6f 0 MAS O OP IWOe 0/40HRAGM IS AfgUIR6(
JSINCE ?J4S CCFNrA/ClTY Or 7HIS MASS OPCCT 7d8
70/?JIONA(. OICO ON 714~.c R6110 ?A*
Z fPOO(
IDIAPJ4 6AM P&SLOW.
A-14
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
. ~~~~~MASS R JGrTy
.0-m
WAL% A 147.58 5+0 T6SC09 S.4OtN:S
MS Iq4
WA(t C __ n 1227 of '.40NE 15
_____ *1080 'Z6?2O 74.,[ 170'
A TO 74 WJ. f)O /07 COA1SEP0ND JE 70 AO4,NZING O .
CeAr1e1I MASS RJ): l Z : q7, CENrER RIG0lT7Y: , , fl'3
its 6 20 170q
rn 8 - 4Yr
ECCfNRJIJCIrY Or ROO MASS w/JFpsPcr To EO4/Z CNE' V6I'fl7Y
exK- 11.3 -77.6 16.8 y -f ,- z O
A-15
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
IFAAGAM
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
SHOWING fAf
JNp#r 4 ao TORJONA1e
JHOAlt FOACGS
NOTE4 J,
C.R.a CENTErf OF IUGIOIty
C.M. CGNTe O MASS
7 a TORJJONA JNA POG6
PA S
A-16
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
rOrAl JWR4
.3 41.84 _4 _ _ 4___
_
ftow Ro 6 .. _ / .,
153t 7 ____ /___ _
(>.7 ) Js_4___
(P -co) _ _ _ _ oO M _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
A-17
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
____ ___a__ _ 3
_(_ PC_
__ 71.Z BC.4103
4AmPci CACCUAriON: oJRmCT gOnCe (wAc i): R3 V aus3003 SO
NOT S:
da r1J7AvCd OA WA( PROM CW51? RJ6JO17Y
-Mr THa AS IG5( 0. CA4CUA?6ri '7OI/OJ 0/A
'ACC44 ACL 7ASVON
A-fS
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
WALL SHEAR V ta r
WALL I
-
WALL 4 6
M1344 K 350.4"C
, ,,I
7. . - (jrI')
JL A . .
.
o
1828.8'K
WALL 7
A-19
-- -
TM q-809-10
N4VFAC P-56
AFM 883, Chap. 13
VE/ZT/CAL .LOA13OES/GN
TrNES CALCULATIONS ARC WXTRACTre ngOM THm Ylit/ciL
LOAt CALCUWATaJ WH/CH ARE AJRil61R/ 0R COM4AIMN2
WITH A QRAL LOA/ S.
WA U. AO L.0AID LIVG LOAM
I(P.2)
I R0op 1L4.s Ao'
, a 391/, ioo to -vi a 300 '
(LESS' GIA06A
#co..)
WALL 125/O'1XI'AVzl 1500
Le.S WALL OP6E4
19' 5'IX
. *I.'. <-117 >
4~~~~~
1774*/'
5SD6_I-
2toFL*. 73 ^/I' IG - I/N8 Zmo FLR. 50*'(fr 00So
(LESS GJARC
* COL.)
WALL 12S /o' xI 375
<-117>
4200 /'
FO.WALL 2 5 Y.5 ' /88
F rG.(ASSUMG 2.5;WIA)s SC3
7JoAL nMAO - 49 S/ TOMA IVf M II'20f
a .: . :
A-20
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
&
t 2NY,
9T 18'
coNzT F.
A-21
TM 5-80-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
(WALL.
SIM) WALL 13' 024 V). a 1 500
L6SS WALL OPWG
(-312)
11972
(P. 2)
2 o PLA 7 % ' X 3' .2A,*FLR 0;Sd-X3i's/C0/
5.371 "
FDN
WALL _ 180*1
Is5%'4.S'
FT&(AUWM3'W fJ) a 75/'
62-344 2240
fOOtING wJ1rmT1 £Rd.o 2 zI
30001o4f
rAty al3",K la,,
CONT /: Tt3 .
A-22
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
a- i.
A-2S
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
WAUL PJIGN
WA C.
L I
aqu: 6e-
EQU: 6-2 U3OX93 +1.45
Uau: 6-. :t 3 -ZWa lXI-a bI
I MOMN
THe tND3VI3UAL 1lRtS IN WAILLI JOLILI JIG D!e'Nel) FOR rHg
Ae NJOIN MOMeN7 i/ 70 7WocEATIAL LOAO (M: VX h1/,) Palj
rTI AXIAL 1O4W PROM DOA AD LIV LOAn (XCIPT *ooeL.L.)
PLUS 7HR AXIAL LOAD AM1 70 WA4( oveR7VRNvRN .>L
UMOSS AXIAL
OAIDS A'& EXCePTIONALLY 44LR iTIS U$UALLY COwj4VVATlvC ro
NewLACT AXIAL CO4J. 7W/$ PAO4LSA P6Rocleab ON r/IS JIM P(YIN6
ASSuMPrtION. (M5 PCA Axil4TIN 54 004.065, P0R AXIAL PLUS
4NJO3NG INMTRAC7/1ON MGTIo0)
Sfa NMaXr J. POR SAMPLA' CALCLILATIOCA
I V#s' hj A#
A l,
-1 Pi 5* W i'o ifi ) 4R#D7HIP./)
Y AC - 1A A5NP
_ g~
~~ 1 *1 O O7~ 1.150a" 2- f7
ce~O4
__ , _. ____ ____
i5 .72Z
I 11 70 1 6 5.4oj 1
09.^1 0.73 ___
_ t35.7 X9 3 _7
A-24
AFM 83, Chap. 13
PLAN-PIER 2 e.4
Ajj c.4Atrf.4xS4?.4 (Eq: -)
REQ'D A's M" 0.40
WHERE t tr SAUM AS' 1.0
CHICK ASSUMPTIoN:
Olt4 6fA
6 t0.47c/.OASSUMED
O4
0-86f ,4xiO..o
8
OK
OvERTURNJIH MOMENT OP ENTIRe W4L4.
TIIE ENTiRE WALL I 4SUME6 Al A "RYlZAL iviT FOR
MTIOMINN6 Re1NPOJhCEMEKT 70 RESIST oVERTUNI/k
7#1I RUMPA IJAbr3)E OT EA CH ENO0.
OiftTHE W4 C.
All a 4 SlK (.t)
A-2
TM *-UU-EU
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 83. Chap. 13
Ji WA
WALL 3 (WALl.
L eJI6N
JIM.)
1
ASSUME Tr? NlW AC7AS "I
I IIS I
t4f. i l-cvv
, _
PICA WlTf V AC vstV IA,* REINP.
Qi!I. - - 4,--- -
WALL 7
I
1S4.4)
- |
I ,
I I
.' .
A-l
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
WALL DE SIGN
WALL A (WALL C SIM.)
'75 P'
Iset.&'
sA ff (d. , Y
.9 s oi(- = 136 8"
AS 1.33 1.36 1.StD INCREASE PEA ACtIt 10. 5.2
A-27
TM 609-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
/W 1 l* Mec
37.5 lt16,12 (7hes 540 j3j(7'cc.
f' 2 DEJIGN Co0fN.-
POA PA44L6L
=809sto JNA L4 -*4 MQr.
LO A NOA.
ASSUMe a = o." ri 4iJ1ON #/AZ £JL.
A_ . 8-09,811/ JOEAIE A
As a w
WE/se (is8)
a C4'
o a
4(Asi's
W,:6001')C4BaJ u23oo0 "/"
GAA) /A '8T00 P
K> ,11~),
Z 2 .~ 4+ G3 .a 3 '4 12 h
IO
s 02;
XoJWb 4 4~ 73 OO
t3<5 . Dt) <~
A-29
TM 6409-10
NAVFAC P-US
A 66-, Chap. 13
SEISaiCd 7t2
FORw 12
*
a aVL FT I
:,:.. -:,i;i
:: ., .
: ..'!' .1 1%.$.:
W/IGWm(p./9)
W, =(Z543Afs4+8' -i210406440)
o= (800 1/ c48' - 36400 (LYG W/.AOOF(.
WTC(80 Oi¶.i8' 3*72*
£"
(n)= I6074
1W (Live) 38400
OVERrTUNING mOMeNT AT AJE OrF ra.
Mto,.Ia8a.a 4 t+.4# x 3 1
32k
1
MorC 22-3227
* "q? -699
t 866212
1-2041 +364
3040 o uP jFr
A-"
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355.
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Ddr
77t00 " 4
r %
AREA OFfrG, 8X54'CI2S 2
I~ I
e: -2000 = -l56'(LIE)
76600
A1
TM S-809-10
NAVFAC P-353
AFM 3. Chap. 13
tu d 485MO X
va- -rr' =Z
an -rs = 345-126 _ 2I~ps; (PRv'Oit 5rThRs)
MAX (, -Vc 8Vf~ _ 5 0 4 A' (ACI 4 116)
OV6,RMANIN6 CLOCPWA( vO
A-32
TM 6409-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM S-, Chap. 13
MOMENT AT pt a
M = 0 i1 - r 3'WIDlE)(19'Kj f67t
- [%8 )%7.5'jC.'JK z3
6]B 8.f. IURJ--I-
r*,b
1.4 IcKJ8.t
AS- au
Mg
AU = 0.860 2- 7 TOP Kr .OTT
f.q96 Y.Ot
A-=
TM 5-09-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 663, Chap. 13
SPAIN(3ReL 10 SIGN
WALL Ia
t
40
AS A JIMPLYPYING APPROXIMATION
ASSUMS THATVSANDAELS a.l 6 ANI3
;OUINDATON WALL. C SNARC Y II
PROPORTION 710 flk* RGLA lIVE
AlshibTPS
240 t ,0i0'A'=
+eq9 17' 0YE 52883I S fEAA _
T IOE .S
jD/5, To SIaSMIC SOILtasn (55Q}eis1mic)
e42f4i J0' 5tZ'70X1aI9%*4G (P.'si)
VYft 4(z.f+2qo9O~0 802*
b
J.68 6' 1.45 0.31 817 35 8.8 2G.4 131f 7.76'9 34?.Z' 1
rJL' 3.31 6' 2t.2 0.47 1 53 13.4 40.,11701/ 35 ' 43.7 ';t
A-U
TM 5-80-10
NAVFAC P45
AFM 83. Chap. 13
TM 5-0-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM Se. Chap. 13
! P,7
TOAW. WA 4 OVeMrURV 4aMQMNV7 za25O6.8
OvepJIuN ' MomeNT r i'PJifR WI
- R. Xt {6tC's *4
a1g.3 M05.8*134.2'
CL A 986
~('P.1)
. _ . - _ _- _-_ _,e
SHE R V 571 #N J*
CPoO
-
I a
WggHrTS L.-+ - -- s
a
W. a 588 O 6(D9AI) (P21 4L . .J
:* ( r
. a Bo0 "(UV# EcC.. P00P C..L.) (p.&) .
I Co. !~f
W. * 571 9 )14.7'45.2VO00#MAO) c.OSS ' Sec. IV SIMPO°
We 140OOV/ X4.17'41847?"2 ( ) W2A.LS C i
iW, (OfMO) S.c0# (0) PLAN
£1, C Lv) Irf 72
mra; ?'x 15
/o 300 /o t f f I i
0.9
(OI
Arm A
/401, 3'It Jc Z 345/a r)
I
*(0+0
Jo . PA6SJU&r6 AAX M.
es, (a1&;s~uIC)
P/A (Or 't SoIL) 645 PSf +4S PM
4i Nr
P/A ( DOA) 4 3 +328 . . . . . . . .
s..
P/A (VO) 1.47j + 4C
clo*'of) (6#.u)
Pto
M/S (4,1SMIC)Y?.j700 53- - 53
IU26
; iqtj Pj + to Psp
NO Jpup?
A-36
TM 49-10
NAVFAC PSSS
AFM 68-, Chap. 13
smwm'l (P.fl)
TOTAL WALL OV8ArURT( M ENIT'eS06. i
OVeD7TUQN MOM. TO ql'piut we
-R-v260.&u- @%.-KOu89G.7"* I
(P.',? *
SH#AR a 9.8 (At4) .9
m9 _
V
PLA N
A-37
TM 5-0-o10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-. Chap. 13
P/A
Pe/s
NOr/
77 PF
A-N1
TM6-8-10
NAVFAC P355
AFM 88, Chap. 13
, I o.0AW. 1,, I
04'
q' efeI
1t fu2-
",--I
IJAGRAM
I.Z A--
CqIAVWN (¶):F a ( ) )x C,
A-"~
TM 809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 683. Chap. 13
.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
11APH. Va 335*/.
TENSIONJ 4--o ^n
'~COMiet.
(sR.WA L -------
001A , R*.r RI/fi Z. A 35
(5as pArre ?)
0. C,6
$714A/,ST fR:
. .
c T 3 /, x' Co " LEA6JA X _ _ _ _ = /, 5/4 *
A-0
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 884, Chap. 13
"!
1;k,. , , . : ,. -
I I
SHAA
IA GAAM
(E-ky) 87IO0
O e 54 /,
A-41
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
P W*~~~~~~~~
V 0o z IAPHAGM JHOAR
PWALL. S S.MfC
t AORCG F/OM Wr OF /t/IUCRY WA..
F(IAPMa zfff1t/1C PO9C4 PROM _? OA (APHRASM
Example A-i 40 ofI44 Box System
ne
A-42
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
-0.0.0. sftftft.I
SI4EAA!
'~OAPA
rIAPR SUM
WALL (BELOW (IDAPM.
~0.,65 ~ ~8t.arPt93
tatspX~ L38 "#K
V (EST)
'% J '44
?UQ
51.64- 27.9"
sX lel
~/ij5.8
Cr."')
t
W P2S31
SHEARTR6ESS
(413a-JV)=
-
4AO O
425'7
t irw oiwG,
(p5)
WA LL 7
SUEAR I WALL AWOE I)/APVJ. -9.z (P-16)
W464AINWALL3ALOJW /)1APH. c I344 (t.)
(3IAP SJYR. V 134k.. Kq12*4.
1 gA92.ak
A-43
TM S-9-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 83, Chap. 13
fiTS1ON OP 2N 0it
LOO APH. (CON7)
NOA7'HWSOTH
EAST-vs8rr
WAtL + C
A'-
;a _/
A-4
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P45
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
DIAPHRAGM rdECw/ON 40
CHECK AEPLECrION 00JPROO4
314PH. ,eErTSGNU AI),/W3)
Lto 8ENIL f
OJU# PV JN
ASSUME Le tS OECPLECIO OF
A SIMPLY SUPPOAMTI APM, A
?8=^ Z . +2
AUERE I IS ASUMD tO AL"
SASSO 6N I*4 U26 CtOAO(A ,7)
k 27, 7 ( 4 7 ,' 2 fZ^ 3O1A2Y' -- -
X , Oo
P* 7)
AV6.SEP/r OP IWAPM gAY&w 2 0° oo
wFr =(8t)lxmfasL08
J X 44 XALC xrwaem
1 000 8.6
ALLOWASL Dt x.O00.fwO.OOj24X12 0,71#50-OVMX!PAMAt)
-45
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883. Chap. 13
f3IAPHQAGM 06PLCflO1N
-
rNS.AMRAde RIFr
0. 00071 f'0. 000&, ,,
OF WALL 0 0 A _ a0.0008
A-46
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Construction Outline.
Roof: Exterior Walls:
Built-up 5-ply. Non-bearing, non-shear,
Concrete joists insulated metal panels.
and girders.
Suspended ceiling. Partitions:
2nd & 3rd Floors: Non-structural removable
Concrete joists drywall.
and girders.
Asphalt tile.
Suspended ceiling.
lst Floor:
Concrete slab-on-grade.
Loads.
Roof: 5-ply roofing 6.0 Floors: Floor covering 1
1" insulation 1.5 Conc. frame 129
Conc. frame 115 .0 Partitions 20
Ceiling 5.0 Ceiling 5
Miscellaneous 3.5 Mech. & Elect. 5
Miscellaneous 4
Dead Load 131 pf
Dead Load 164 psf
Add for seismic loading:
Partitions 10
Live Load 50 psf
141 psf
L Ive Load 20 psf Exterior Wall 4 psf
Materials.
Concrete: f 4 ksi Ee - 3.6 x 106 psi
Steel: fy = 60,000 psi
A-47
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 83, Chap. 13
DESIGN P OCEDURR
Sheet No.
Frame Analysis 9, 10
7
Colu Forces 15
. - .1
Ig
W- Slenderness 16
Capacity 17
Shear 18
Special Transverse Reinforcement 19 - 21
Beam-Column Joint 22 - 24
Summary of Design 25
A-U
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 83, Chap. 13
CU
%1
*-j 7,
4 II w 1
..
T , . . T.- T
19
04 xi ~,
-
. I,1
I I
0,41
I 4 I-- a I
" I
a
AW~- - I .1- t_-
I ILofe Co AYS SV'-0" ailgtdw I
4'
b4_
_,,
_
__
-1 -
P A N
R
B
11 L - 11 - 11 I
C "t! -11 11 11 11 II 11 1I-
I 54 *^,*.*.
,I 1-1
11-H
A-49
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 86-3, Chap. 13
.1/
DISCUSSION O MEMBER SIMES
1. The example is intended to illustrate the procedure for designing a con-
crete ductile moment resisting frame. The design work is complex, and
several trials are required in order to achieve the optimum design.
2. The building configuration was arbitrarily made the same as that of the
steel frame of example A-3.
3. Frame B will be analyzed in this example and members between grid lines
1 & 2 will be designed to illustrate the design procedure.
c. For the min or ax Pu and the required H. (on the basis of column
No _ beam Hp), a suitable column was estimated to be 24" x 24", with
12 - #10 or 10 - Ill. (Note: Biaxial loading must be considered
for column forces in the transverse direction:)
4. Results of a frame analysis are given, and the example continues with
representative beam, column and joint design, using sizes and design
forces from this analysis. The frame analysis itself is not shown
since values can be obtained by computer or by any of the various
approximate methods.
A-50
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
...
ll
A-51
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 83,Chap. 13
IBUJLDING WIOS7J
AT ItOOP 4Ve4..
d J fO.O0)KSS x SO'* I4'
RooF A>L: O.M ISCOSK
UXT. WALL e "P
0 'AP0r
_~(PA IE.
N4J xMI4D,(L#D)Mx0.004 a 11
B
@V /Q'/7')A 5 6
: /coI 6S9
rOAlr W ' W 36t+IMOI5AI.IS v 4 CO Z
A-52
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 8-, Chap. 13
-. - 120400 - -goo
w V
&AE4TIVe jt61JJrJ/TG OF P*tAMeJ
THl P04LOWIN& AJJWPTIONJ ARE AIAOE I/V OD I
0
TO 5J77MA7T THU F0Ac6J- 70 S APP4J(ED IN 7w
PfRAMS AWALYJlI.
LON6Tu(INA L FRAMeJ
A#SC SCOLUMNJE I/ 6.01 gJeeM
2 COLUMNS e 94 : 1J
a 3 ,e 65: ___5
TRAANJVERJE FRAMES
LINES I 7 COLUMNfe/ + 2e LO 2.
A a St/$ FOR JHORTEt SEAMS JA a r ':, .4fa
JAY /. Wt~5 g
At3JUJr iaOt .
NAIRAtOW IMAM'(e672sqJ oivic
XA Y ot. O 2. -
LINES 20 c C04UMN eI te' :e .s
A /)ji/ T O& JHorrXAMA6 l /./* X e. .:Z
AoJUsT PoR jHAzC0we& iseAm j (z4L3fi0)3:o. /;
JAY O. 7SJ.2. ? 2.Z
A-=
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883 Chap. 13
A a RL
. e TOR'aO O/-C7
A4 S R $0IRC6 ___ jI7 0CE TFOVWON
1. 2.7 .14 1 SIC5+IG gIZG ?4,83 . 312 to3 f4 .
2 ?.2 . I #4 .3J3 40
OC,O/t .1,r
I o .44* .
5 2.2 .134 . 134 +53 1024 Z 253 . 028 .. oo8 .142e
4 2.2 *134 .134.
0 0 0 O
S 2 .2 134 .1.3+ - t 1024 z, 253 . o28 _. oo8 *1Z&
c 2.2 .13+ .134 -a4 40c ,oII . 13 -. o- .1/1
7 2.1 *14S ,1( -G q2VG 4,863 .3t2 -. 031 .134.
6C.7 I.oo0 1.000
T P.4NSV _ _ _ _ _ _ _
A-54
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
z e wil -V IIg
'3 tit
IA
m
tS
itt o
a
1* 0
SQ- i
42 4§
(Je 'I
IS
0®I .
..
I
0l 'a 2to
0 W~
le l.Jr Q W
%I ,L
I. 11
_, - . - 'e
iz
. ... It 'a 0 U,
0 W
utj
0a,
)- I -- $ 0'
'1 q-. -: _,.
gO
.t; *;
'S lb
Q) -D I - 1
'b 4 *b
iIc1C? 2i
4i &>w Q
_ , - , ." +
AL V '4', a0 o
'I,
"S
a QJ
1 0o
sO t-
Q
A 5)' 1 .-
4 e I,, IL
O
L(3 IL Iq
- a- I. - i -
0 of
Z
It. a to I~- leb0
0 O Ql 0 c iltQj
0 Wa
I 4
A-56
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Siv /M 1P '7
.^ 9 '3 - -
03
l+ eSMaG a gqq Z qq zq8
la 0 580 50 a
X 0 ~_0&00r
., -..
, , IO
VVE/tCA4 LOA1
s0 45 41 42 42 '-1
* )
%9
en, O_
98 12
* BCa BC 87*
3
I
Is 13 •4 103 t0 + 2 /Os I::t O
L4
$i -
I A
Q/S 7 sA T
mLC
LA 76RA L LOAD3
-
,48-aw- i SFomy Imc .
4,W,., : . ,ar+. y,,t7
= . r-n °,. - .
A464 IL '0
t~f4) CJ = * arc
_}teab 'sAX-(E; f.9011- 4Aleow..ao6rgr . . to. .
Example A-2 10 of-, 25 Concrete Frames
:.4
.1
TM 5-80-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
41
1. Obtain end 'e and V's at face of support. These are given on
p. 10 for Frame B.
W 4 t - +M producew tension on
the bottom
= M+ V2 (t > V O)
A-P7
TM 809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM #1-3, Chap. 3
R.6AM FORCUS
.?A"PIAM
ISRAMO
®pv3*e
PWOZR RM
gQ
d t e719 O I CLeA/t JPAN a 30,0' EN0 2
I'M &7 NS A
OTOM v
Y Lr
wt -. M+ M v
10)0 -e21A' + SS 3.96'54 119j( 1 4. 820 + Z
. -47 +10.6 0.72 CZ 31 Gs +15
a±±'12 T8a __ MLL. ;IIS ±
1.4+1.7L -417 +917 -555 +104
-:" ,i., ;: -, , .-
,-, -.
4".
_~ _ _
7
X.NGG -'576 _
A-5
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-M
AFM 88-3, Chop. 13
K* 176
elm 4.57
Rtnq"a 4j2S&
7"P A, .48 .S.0
407t. RS 3 -# 4.t? - *
ACTUAL. Ai 8.00 4.00 8.00
.00sqO .005' .Oojqo
A-59
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-35
AFM S, Chap. 13
iO/A Ag
JIO8UJA' P
97
/I
P
I
V J139100 a 14
-10 0 6b0 - .86x) xt7.5 1
253
MIN. J71RmUi1s
Asr - %c a's 10?
8.03",
4
(u - AfC) b* 8I R O 8"
MAX. PACIN6 7" a e 24 T7'IEI .aq"
(WITHIN e au
S'-0 PROM COE. A44t(K S a1% 0C
A-40
TM 50-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
A AO.
z I e., N
s C
:077
IMENlONAL LIMITATION:
W//bTN:24 it" K Ec ip/qtooo p, 9
Pr
rN:WM. I >4O1.
1.a 't0,OO
g rT
A-61
TM 5-809-10
NAYFAC P-355
AFM 883. Chap. 13
M .isB 40 *Z-5
d: % ~190,000 70, 800 Er - I*
C '< I 87Go se Go
A42
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P4!S
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
COL. 0OA1CA4EPACITrHc~
Ae ITEEL@
IZ /.Z.f 7
(SwTicA />E~ 6e UppoK/t0XOX.fcJ b> ,rW AC0.2 W .o
(4 /.3z)x .o0If No.174 e 71 I. A)
Co.7X'A
__________ 'w:~ iOn4L 4A o.71 p-s'
CWECk COL.CAPI'Y > AM CAP 'Y e j z1Xtre4@ e fS
CO. Mu SOUWO EXC6eO COC.. M &4ROULO excesO
(8
4 7 4CS/g r. SZ22
9
BSAM Mp
aS1 9) soJ
~~C
(P.
13)
-el It:'le (SCAM u, .CZI a " (£ a M mu)
COZ.M ;U#fO>a/'t OC c0c 4ef s .7B> S OX°
A - I _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __K _
A-63
----- - ------ --------
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
VA . x 4 70 J z3 o-
a s 2t.42
*
35*.ilc :.224 KSI *S -. IC ,*454KSt
. "
U5S 8~~e C
LU
*4 8 "4e5
( ac A
7z .
;
. ..
:-""t
.
0.30 o (a 0.f00xre.SK~
4 ,7.20
°s°X°'SGO j
-i)
LAR (
,70VERNJ
*8
a- 0.- a . - : 4.
re WI
O.2 . le X2 X -60
GyA :;
BAR JIZe As A ,,
C.6S7A' ",
*3 0.11 0.44 12.81
0.0 0.60 5. 2 6-u.Se # GR 60 e+'
#S 0-jI 1.24 a. /S
CONTINUEi6(
I Example A-2 19 o0,25 Concrete Frames
----------- -- -
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-35S
AFM 883. Chap. 13
VU gu. L Id V4p.3I
4 3. AT TH S COUMuN IN QUESTiON,
CALCUL4re TUMAX. mOMUNT
RTiAN$F4tRREn TO 7W CUMN :
SY Tf4 Y16.401N6 Ae4M.
4. i:oJe: Te6 COLUMN HAv 7W
CAPACITY TO CARAV0Y V,, WITW
I tf fA4M MOMEN ?
vu$: NO .4O/' RUINF. RUQ'O.
NO: iroV/OE THEf 4j@C/AG
70RANS . R e//P
CAIXMIUArea/ ov 0./,l
A-6
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
ROOF I3EAM
xMp/i.
t.J to67
V,
MP/I. ~ ASSUS
94t4.1J5AME AS 20
Z4 VA. 7 co 12)ao
t~Vi = / 71/29.
£ V AOVe 334
Mp fAOM8 37
89 M
-SPC.TRANSPK bi
A-67
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3i Chap. 13
, v . , i
T AS,. fy 11 "I IL
A68
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P45S
AFM 88-3 Chap. 13
b CAM-COLUMIJO/Mr-CON7 9RAM
2No StORY ColuM&
i -I COLU-t/ 8
HOOPS /N VL
JOINT
. s | AJAM Mpu7?4
P Aoj5
&4x2 4 054tSi
Wmi
4 0.<2 A 46°70 . it Fcf
V
C 0aI
O
ANCHORACG O A
4ON¢GI T. FR, teo=(RC') O.'SGld z .50 xc8
4 2 3
e.~~A*A.1
x5X i j
2k(AICZ - 5 2)*
4
-% l / ' 8 = o.o4 Ab1(crf-fh)fr
.3~
~ ~ ~~~Az7OIO3br~
700(4 0.3dt.
0^2j
,+Ji5, 3
CSO6' !No
./iG, O04 o 0 &Si
3,#,
f-x/03.
0 < S. 4 S (t
A-70
AADM:
7"CCOLMW
4~~~~~PE#I~~~~~~~~~
77~~~~~~~S.P. I
N O&A 'I)~~~~~v
fMIW40. %
'U 0 'U~~#.P26x
~~~~
M~~~m'C4~~~~~) ~~~ 9~
'. S~C AO M P9 9
N ___________~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~liO
U' - _________________~~~~~~~A
C~~~~~~~~~~Ap-WvsbO o-
E. F. A .04COWM7?rl~dD .". C.
a t4 co 6UMN rTIG3@4 It a.c.
'X 04 COWMAI IsIM a" C.
e10
BUILDING WITH STEEL MOMENT-RESISTING SPACE FRAMES AND STEEL BRACED FRAMES:
Construction Outline.
Roof: Exterior Walls:
Built-up 5 ply. Non-bearing, non shear,
Metal decking with insulated metal panels.
insulation board.
Suspended ceiling. Partitions:
2nd & 3rd Floors: Non-structural removable
Metal decking with concrete fill. drywall.
Asphalt tile.
Suspended ceiling.
1st Floor:
Concrete slab-on-grade.
Stel Items J
Example A-3 I of 34. Steel Bras_8 -1
A-n
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
LOAOn.
Roor: ZAA) i SRQ ZOORS,
6- PLY ROo/?NG - 6.a0S. FINISH = oOSE
J/HSUf/LA TiON = /.S DrTsE AFCK =
s$9tt JoC1i = .LB CONcREEr s/Uf = ZO
SAWZ PIr vHs = 3.7 5rTE( iS!AMS = V,
sr'e GRs = J2? srer GIRI.)ERS
C6Y'iNr ' 10.0 f CO4t
&NS = .6
.PARrTIONS = o
M/SCUZANCEOVS = L0 C4E/Z/N - Ao
OCAP COA O = 25.7R.5 MISCEZIANfOUS = 1.0
. .1,
DEAD O.CA = 74.G R$
ADD FR SEISMI:
PAR r/ONS = 10.0 VW ZOAD = 5o.o rqR
roTAi AOR St/SM/C = 3S 7 P.S
-buLL-0-
.__ EC
1
_'W . A;'WI o
I
-1 k
_- ..
LIES , 4,/7
TRANtS vewsE ouCTILE mo/4NT RESST/v6 FRAAfES
SEE SliT 7
A-7"
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
A-74
TM -9-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 8-3, Chap. 13
I,
DESIGN PROCEDURE
AL GENERAL PORMHATION
1. Building Layout 1 -3
2. Loads for Diaphragms 5, 6
1. Lateral Forces 25
2. Vertical Forces in Hebers 26
3. Lateral Forces in Members 27
4. Member Design 28, 29
5. Connections 30, 31
6. Deflections 32, 33
7. Stiffness 33
D. FINAL PROPERTIES 34
A-75
ir
TM 5-80910
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
r
_____________ si'.--
------ _____ - i--
No
@< t~s 4RACOD
2a SL%3
b-
W.
I fIA@S i m ki
z a 1 MP
i7tA1.
I.2 gOMes
I
"-oI I2. wao I 4..'
1 i! 1. / ,
_*._*-1 _. II. _ -- *
AJ-.S LOADS
RZOOff; i-57 :52-"1,6SC.
WALLS f.l*%
/B98.2 *%
G--W LA)S..
R.00r .35 .7x94 a997.2
WALLS.S_ 48. 0*/,
7045.2 IF.
A-76
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
,76 7-ti
LOAICf7eI07. 9
W . 707" -
LOAS r-OR 3 f-LOORDIAPRI-gAGM ,<O POOM SA C-)
l-S LOA/O
PLOOR ' 74.SK 46'c 357C.O
WALL * 84.0
3GGO.O ¶8/1
C - W LOA QS
f-LOOIZ 6.74.5 x 9e"e 14304
WALL 8!3 8.
143,d. /
A-77
- - --------------------
TM 5409-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
! 4 If AOOF
I.Ac6
,%01%.
THE COLUMN
ABASE /S
::3 C4
4. -,..
ASSUM9r3 FX&O,
TRIl5 /S AOT ALWAYJ
I P~AsI93L&. ACTUAL
0 FOUN(IA 7/ON CONI10 Tb/S
q p~~~~3e b AL S-OULI: e C.4REFULLY
STU0/1/) ANO REAUSr1C
wWJW~~ 71 .1 ATSUM1ZPV1 o0S
. '. , , .00
-
1:
92 qoIjW
t - 1A MA/OG FO0
1-% ANALYSIS.
! . ~ Is
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
k;
'Lo
f"I/v-7 zzAzz
-- , ,,,-.....
PaRAMe cAmACrTSaSrTCS' . i.,
/aUILIIN P/OI
9INZb/IN 7Rd FLNOAMENTAL PeRIfOn O A /ULIJNG
Al/TM ONE 0 MORS FLGEXlLE OIZAPHAAGM5 /5 A
COMPLEX POCetUR6.
FOi D RMIIJIG (3ESIGA LAreRAL. FORCES 1 7ave
P8J13/D IM)LL 13S CALCLJLATEn Y SIMPLE
Me/40o5s WICM ASSUME ALL ODIAPHRA45MS ReI3.
T1413 IS CNSERVATIV& P9dCAUSE 714 EJRA
R1GI/fi7Y ReILU7S IN A SLIGUTLY SWOs.MAP EA1Oi
AV3 SLIGM7TLY LARGER aE.SIGN FORices.
A-78
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
Assuming the average drift for the building is 2/3 the maximum inter-
story drift, which is limited to 0.005, the roof deflection is
en = 2/3 (0.005h,), and the formula above becomes
A-79
- ---------- - -
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
%9~~~~~~~~'
U)
.'~ ~ ~ N'$,<..
I
h.
A-8O
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
4
Since the roof-diaphragm is relatively flexible, the roof forces are distrib-
uted by tributary area.
The 2nd and 3rd floor diaphragms distribute the floor forces to the frames
according to their relative rigidities.
The transverse frames on lines 1, 4 and 7 are alike, and for preliminary
design we may take their rigidity proportio"a to
see page 9
1/3(BASE SHEAR) 1/3(143) =
I
4XI
I- IV*.
KTE
K 1 DRMF) 'i I -
2/3 0. 0051 ( 34 ' J
Resee page 8
a.; : ...1: : , .
.", """
. _' .-"Z,I- The longitudinal frames on lines A and C have a rigidity based on prelim-
4n - ti 4 . _i
.
i6^&
%.&
4 see page 25
1/2(BASE SEAR) j1/2W 5360 k/ft
KA Am = -
DRITP
'w-- prelim calcs (not shown)
$5360 12.7, say 13
Use Rel.* = and Rel. KA =
421
Because of symmetry there is no "calculated" torsi&n. The "accidental"
torsion is the story force, F times the nominal eccentricity of 5 of the
max. building dimension:
Torsional Shear 9. 6f
ad2
A-1
- ----- -- -- F~. . . . .
TM 5-809-1 0
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
FAAME
AEL Kd-a
dR C/
O1R.CCT RSMAL DESIGAM
AR SUAI
A-82
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
I a.
a
-_ S.O
1-°10.4
FfAME FoRcEs
~ ~-. .4 22.4
L
",' '
1178
= 1S.5 = 9.64K
\/~~~~~~~~ = fs
X ESTIMATED LOCATION OF
IPfLECrION CON/S JIP&RINO
FJIXTY OF FSASE.
-. - I
lxample A-3 12 of 3 Steel Frames
A-83
-- - -------------w - - ...... ... ....
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
1N'6RAJ0 COL.UMN
a%. VORrJCAL. RAAMe
OAO ON CONTER
'QOOF OL O.OeA7Ali i'
30 ,FLA. DLILL a (o074 + . o/) m 24 3Z' a 73. 3
2N0 PLR. ReI3. LL-a ' 76.3
SY SYMMETRY A -0
h S6iSMIC L0OAO, PROM P ii
,: .... . .
M =.I%
.17.qa(4.00-475)= qO.7k A7 JRAC O 6IADM
G V&SArCAL. + JE/AtiC '
P =0 4 O rag
Ao5 0 qO7 qO7t
USE A SC 7 f5J,/T0iN, p. 3.6
TgRY WI4s 68, . -& Jx m- 0/915
IGo-gi o.,96(qo7 X/2%/) 8f t
PauJV. - .83a
L6XTOR OR OLUMN
VORrICAL + I/JM/C
0 5 xW 4
M 50 (e:#)+ 9o.7/g:
4LLOW$J* Qv14 . zM
144d
F43
LI/J 14" CPo&MNJ POX CcONt2Ot OP
,26PLECTION$ ANO QJE 7E rAMa
J6CTION Pu~4 ~/W/0H7.
A-U
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
S/SM/c M = 116.3
VeR7* SES/MC M e 6
USE A/SC obe6M CNARIr pA 2-9 t, 7 r/ J09 wIrv
w a S jt? IJ??K'C 94-4
UMcZ 46N Ar' Of &
3 OR NCG. /J V*l/NG6
W/ lx C0 AL.OW a k
$ ANSJ AS.4
A-US
---------------......
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 8-3, Chap. 13
GIR/,R - AOOf
Vd`RICA( LOAM
ROOF nL&L 3Pa'(0.05740.020)z 0a82*0.44=1 a
W,* 08atZ4 " /9.7 t iX97 ei'
SU/SM/C
TA
a2.S0/?aOsR s.o 37.
VJ4r1?SgdRM/C : Mu 39.4 3.8 a 7. - 1.33 fl56.o81
Wif.%L AOW S8 O/,9* ST57R4SS
USt W/4^30 A4SOW 3 USS W/4JRPANGS
P0* 4S776R 13CM1 S
A-S6
:
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P45
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
f
A~roRSroRY DEX ECIr/O 70K Rq P.
Mc ,IX //,C = j./X
79.,Ik v ~fjj xz7.9 =4.6'6
2 V.. ft
.4 h =I0.'-1.so' = 9./7'
h (CAWR) 1 1 IA?
f
/WrN'/0 1 COWMAN
EXA a V/
7 _ Ma- 48 1t7 f T -Z
r. 3 7- 4i7 = 207 t.
= e Z07ic 1t
29.000 af/# = 0.0171.FT.
A-P
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
b. S Z W44 44e
4
A . '- *,..
1
74.0' Z 00234 0.0309
~ , %¾'.
i
I Z4.O i
1
A 0.0979 0. 243
Aw 0.0 3 ag 0.0365
..
AU
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 8-3. Chap. 13
CoMfleA outPUr
'aw &of 'U
RVI 0.10f.t. 40
I.
0 ?st -v- 1
a
t ~~~~067 .
I' 2~ WIS x o
-f-- ~ .& _ t.
,00
i*.
U 14 F 00
I.
, - <0!
.
, -:" .4
,1.,1 I I'..
I
. .,..
.;:
- ______ 2.0'
~ ~ ~ '
3c
, on
%S
!%0 - 6 1* %9% oo
10 qQ
A
4JY LA
-06A,0 f.*A
F IC f*
31 S7
-- * Z. 0 0.1062
'1-1 ! I
I (0.0o90>
tI I..
in 106 _ .
-20.3 0.0657
4
( .O8z>
,\Z! JNeas-arY bE.PL.
9,
s .?7
VYu
Je/JM I c
A-ff
:- - .. . I. i 1. I I I .I . .I I- I I I . . "I 0. .1:1:1.,....,.,1:1.1.." ,.:..,.,;,..,,:; . .1. - ,- '. , . I - I I .
TM 5-09-10
NAVFAC P-35
AFM 88-3 Chap. 13
A-"
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
PIAL DE JI G N CON
A. ERAM .
4
MeMfef * JT/ .eJ$E J
AT e)r.COC. 76 36 /17 // z 17 g
AT7INT.CO(. I se 1/0 17/ I
A-91
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
.
MMA XTIO
AC L J'I tJ NS 1 . -
+ /-fig vi~zF .,' .. 9,
.93 .97
At.L JU44MA W oN8
Example A-3 21 of 4 Steel Frames
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
1
_ ,
-I
JAMfO CALC. rOt JOINT A
II- :
I.PLAJrIC MOM, CAPACITY
OF 6rJt6It.*
2t * + < 8, 5 8
IGNOX6* JMALL HOR/Z. P JiN Gro(iU6:
S C 4/ 68.67 > 5.9
-O
Mp: G9^' Vs t, . :-- 138x (76 0 36() c 14'
VEItrT.40A: V:(t.8+0.Co7)y
1 71 it
- : 34.1K
DEV1ON V:
VORT. LOAO 1.3 x 34.1 44.5
JHOAf. PL: d0
76.1/0~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~1
7
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-35
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
OO&Ajr 4 /s
/s e'O VI
(ORA COZIMN W/JWA Jmtlexe W)
213
R(QQ t 7"*E x ..539 a 0. 77 70 T,4 L.
0.33 T, COL..WJ
USFe7/v X ,- 0.439 I004LE01
_I
S//fAR M~ANSIM,? XOR1Cg V ~~~~~~
o1. CAS rf
r# r t AA
w 4OPRf 01 S
I.,
=1a#(5x1.RS)mZ4
oLumA s r/reNff*. t
COMPR.e~AN4 t C a (s6 ) :.7S >33Y
RE' A CC, A - (tb+ sx)3 ca =
S S7.S6aam-33?(.95 5A/.SfI?9
,*c2 e 22 3.a'V 0./45 Uass 'A J 5
al2 _
lMumple A-3 23 of - 4 Steel Frn
A-94
TM54809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 86-3, Chap. 13
*,"1.,
. ..
..itls
1.
LCg Z8
'C.ro C.
'*CeCAR
L or= zo.P &o .Asr& oir
-A-
i
XW/8%40
_
S*1]
2_
, . . . . \.
.
1
ot ejc 4 w
I
,OEfVSOOP PlAfr/cAWAVEw
A r LAsT J0CT: v aSC 3& = 3 6k
3.Oa
AOCTr AT A C 0 CO4 _ 86*9Aee.6,;
I'
'1
0
( (
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-3SS
AFM 884, Chap. 13
Tr/A.AJteA AT COLUMN
TRANJV. Gft*E/: 9'xse2' a eh s
f,6" JSEAM ( SL' + /PS )GO jP
7T/f/o. ARA AT MuCE KDK 3'I jF
A-97
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AfM 88-3, Chap. 13
-I
.. .O
Ai.;,;-.-, IKflK'11
I Vl I VJ I
-- 0.59XI4U .26
7i
wv
im" .
v 13.8
q*5
23.1
I
I 0.8li
I Fog
30.8
WIL4I
DIRECTION 0
sTrRONG rJReCTlON:
GIR4E5 REACTCNZ (.0746#0.0B)x e8a 3 1.8
e H4LiF.c LfJot bePrH 7
1 5 :i
s1.age2
C0NVlNUrr7'2
AXIAL
P 99i. .b$C £f {t7K NO £#CiP'T
ROOF
we (.og +, O.OtO) x3'A 321: .4
W14 x 30 2
6-K~ ~0.586"
.3B4 X 2qooo,~V90: .8 qqS
J86'AM WIrH
7 RACO L3 MP
ARO 41SE W14x#O PCotIJ6N
P1O0iF UJE W 7/fA/LJ W/7H
b60
UNJ3ACE3 SAJ
VMMT. W: 0./83KSx3'xIro'' 8.78K
8.
_B78 J(/O'7 SK
17.Coxc12 3.oq
9si LOW
68.4
AXIAL P*4.61 43.8 u+4<?
a 3
49:~~~~~~
4-8 . 4. 488
°
0PXS s 4 oI?W
A-100
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
3.10 vAr.
4.51
An 25. SGIS1M.
-35.G
G.6.
_W
... i.t is~ -
I ..
-
JO/Nr lb
2 NO PLR .
E '4
a'4&-
A-101
TM -809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
I ...01,
,::.. ".- I-
: : 1; 43.6
:: :: J:'
A-102
. TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-3S
AFM 88-3 Chap. 13
£faLE CTOtN
/I VH
CUORIDS 10e zO
=t r
LWW1M
r-A (AJ:2 D
A: AtR64 o0 OE COcLM Al
tl vgA
- : .z.~;- ' QCOG - Is vo
2
0
F1IAGONAcLS: 2 COS10- f o
Ad' -
* A CO$ - 2e c-C$50
wmeRe f4 is r Me SrTess w THEJTUT
;.I
#50
&A
A *
t It wjHelte -f is 714 STRess N THE S7'TtJT
.1
it Vil
50 6A0t + eacot - 2 E
EA 15 A. N 3
Eco$j +E fj
0 1 A
IN CoMPUtArION OP **F@c.CT/ONJ G/SE JTERJJ
)bAJft0 0N o*1G"fiM4 #cORC6.I + l.LS
A-10
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
AT ROOP
e4 11U.
V 87.5 ("II
'3 )3. I -es 5S C31C
S 4 15' 10.0
AT 3R 0 NO, X :5.6 3(ass, 0.17) 3.10,
TIRUrS
MMejei 3
S70 IMY IF .4 n- 55
3 W14 30 13.86 8.86 I 1 KS
2 W18X40 53.8 .0ao 2.3
I W /8X40 4 38 35.0 11.80 3.0
A-104
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
eaIA L PPicRTIc'S
T/JAN$fVGIRS PARIO/- FORMUCA 093, S.3
Fat rrrNss uJ HE4 ,6 VALJeS r4OM THG
AMAL/YJ3 rOR .AM A (P. M.). OR MASS
W re xroley wiGuT$s ( P. q )
LGVEL A PA
7sk 2ozo.O1 o.1o02 FT. 4.15 S.G5
3 707 0.3 00G67 B.06 /.B3
707 10f. 0.0282 O.SG 0.2'q
7.7G .*Z
Pol WHO4
7W &UIW4ING (W'S A&Cv ) 7reWe
IARG TNIRGC PR.AMES S USG6 F - 7
T 2f | _ =7.7C P.a IL
s\32.a l'.76
/T/5EC
Z K'F J
- 0.8G S&C. (Aie fRAms)
STIFFNESS (-rce P. /0 4th
-IN i:IMAL ( 41SN 1 f<, 2 VCT (P. /8 ),RE4..c 1 L/
X4 Cott
C222Ir
t/rP(. 3 ) RG.. -A
RsL4 tKo4 ee Z4,1.6Srf
t /2gSr
see?
F.OR FRAME A O C,
lcoo rJ 12 4 288
ac9 a ZG
C £ Z-3,
7W0RS/ONAL ~ eaw qC# =0~.0669
n6SJIGN 4A$GO ON o.oq A S SI.LL 0,X.
A-1O5
- ~ ~ ~ _ ~ I . .s .. .. II *o . - . .I
+ .. S1I . .
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
DESIGN EXAMPLE: A-4
Construction Outline.
Roof: Exterior Walls:
Built-up, 5-ply. Bearing walls in concrete
Concrete joists and girders. and non-bearing, non-shear
Suspended ceiling. insulated metal panels.
1st Floor:
Concrete slab-on-grade.
Discussion. Vertical and lateral forces are pre-computed. (See Example A-5
for a typical computation.) The shear walls in the south wall (Line D) are
designed for the given lateral forces. The seismic frames would be designed
for 25% of these forces, using the methods of Example A-2. Deformation com-
patibility is investigated for the nonseismic frames.
Materials.
Concrete c = 3,000 psi.
Reinf. Steel f = 60,000 psi.
IExample I
A-4
~~~~~~~
1 o.I1 Concrete Frames, Concrete Walls,
1
A-106
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
.1lo:10-
I I
i I
l'
Ii I
I
I_. IIr---~ -i-- ~~-ir- ~ -
I
i ~-
I |_~ _- - _ __ -; ___ _ _
i
/- L44 2 J
___ ,---n~~.--
_J__
'. .: I '
IAt
I .110
r~
, - m
ern _ _
FLOOR PAN
- ,~~~~~~~~~~
I -- --7
XHOA k~n -J&OUSURYMEMS&
P0oA JMEA it W L
#VA '
.. .. ..
H .:
1*v~~~~~~
Jr
-APUNDARYME8NI
FOR SC-Ak WAL
ALSO COLWMN .
TA'SAiJE RAMB ;
.
- ---
.
if
I'
I.________
II
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~4,
- d
I
.4
ft
I.I
r1If- at 91, 1.
- _- - I JYM. A4.
I 20' ml
20'
I
I J°'#I
HALc eVAT/ON Op SOUTH WAtL aLIN8 a
Exasple A-4 2 of Concrete Frames, Concrete Walls
f' A
A-107
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
.0". . '3
-r
.1 ,; se
The two interior frqmes (Lines B and C) will, be designed as ductile moment
resisting space frames to carry 25% of the total required lateral force.
See Example A-2. This example will deal only with Lines A and D which have
shear walls that carry 100% of the lateral force. Deformation compatibil-
ity (para. 3-3(J)ld) must be investigated for the vertical load-carrying
frames on Lines A and D (see p. 11).
A-100
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
-IF
Irt f--
1I-
-
POR WACL.
_ I.1_Ip 7 .:-
_n
-1--*72
-
I
_
I
II
.
I
.
. _ .
ITOAA.LA7RANC
TOJO(J7H A44.
J041TW WALL 8LEVATIO. N SACH J/feA
- WALL 7AKIS HALF.
wi
I-I fiLOO :
_. 0.10 O.-So 1.0
DL Q 0, 7 S 3.75 7,6
LLI ./S 0.76 1.S
_40 it
LOA. TRI#rAAY lA*UC T&Y To WAL
RooFr OC, /0 Z ,8.5
,CLOOR 0.75f10 9 7.5
WALL IOY.24x0.Jt3- 27. 1
TOTACAC 43.Ir-
FLOOR UL. O.J5SX/O I K
8.0 14.0 LtMNE (n) O1AOC-R RACTrON
21.G 21.C Rtoo + PLoolt 13a. 31, 3 Ic
31.3 FLOOR L&. G. O I
qt. 45.9 v67r. L (M.OM TAIA. ARCA TO
GIRA(k
3 - 6
4r140PC t401 JE1fSMIC CA tCCLA7oN uf JHOWN)
(p. )
Example A-4 4 of Concrete Frames, Concrete Walls
I,
A-109
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
OvitruA N/N
A :o (60' x ?4') *"(SOxI/t /Z~4~
FOT (22 4a )(0K
8.76
UAL/Pr
,: :' .
.Y"ert /
-U/'M C 14o } 4
VSR7 L . .
tRT. LL
A-l10
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
°. 4~~~~~0N
86 X
60x0.6o:4 /< 0 fr
7 4cOt/A77'AP2
4.5Or° '0 °'<0r.Z71N
0e4N- 3 /Fr sC.
.: VIAe Ar*.
4v ¢t '60ss ? t "a. ,
A-1il
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883. Chap. 13
.
POR COMIDA4JION:
.12-4.36 03ss -
- a Z
.% Use V% 0.6oo
la e4oK
A M1/N. I FROM JP-17A (78)
eh z °. Io Mlh.
J CHART RS- GO. co
,ReQ P 0.0o
o
A. - . O (2 Zt) , 4 4 " < 3.1I3
TONXlON CON TrOS:
VPUoCv4z 4-4fM (3/ 01B
VgR/CA4 COLIWMIV COUF 96IMP/=0COM;C-Hr
f
Excample A-4 7 of Concrete Frames, Concrete WallsI
A-1 12
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
04 A A
.40
o~s~o L[x -1]
.40
00A Q : 7 "
O.12
l fa, 0.12(q) 63
A-113
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
HeAt WALA
4oISGN CON?'D
b
I Ii 1I I I
I. 14 4 II Id ON I
WALL .LSVATIONJ
A-114
TM 6409-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
SHEARZ WALL
r36e/GN - CObT'D
WALL JCTIONJ
'3'
i3
t! .-,., ., .. Q. &ld-.. .
f,d":i
-7=:=
. I - =
s-
.-.
A . ,.. . .. A
I
ig
I
14
.1
V
G 0/ j
Example A-4 10 of j1 Concrete Frames, Concrete Walls
A-1 15
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
The resulting member forces are combined with the forces due to vertical
gravity loads. In this example, the resulting stresses are within the elas-
tic capacity of the members and the P-A effects are negligible. Therefore,
the requirements for deformation compatibility are satisfied.
A-116
--
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
Construction Outline.
Roof: Exterior Walls:
Built-up, 5-ply. Bearing walls in concrete
Metal decking with and non-bearing, non-shear
insulation board. insulated metal panels.
Suspended ceiling.
X'"' . :; 2nd & 3rd Floors: Partitions:
Metal decking with concrete fill. Non-structural removable
Asphalt tile. drywall, except concrete
Suspended ceiling. as structurally required.
1st Floor:
Concrete slab-on-grade.
Design Concept. Since the structure is a dual bracing system with a ductile
moment-resisting space frame in structural steel cpable of resisting not
less than 25 percent of the required lateral force and concrete shear walls
capable of resisting the total required lateral force, the K-factor is 0.80.
I' The metal deck roof system forms a flexible diaphragm; therefore the roof
loads are distributed to the frames and/or shear walls by tributary area
rather than by stiffnesses. The metal deck with concrete fill systems for
the floors form rigid diaphragms and the seismic loads are proportioned to
the frames and/or shear walls by their stiffnesses.
4
Discussion. Portions of the exterior walls are insulated steel sandwich
walls, not capable of acting as shear walls. Other portions of the exterior
walls are of reinforced concrete. Two interior concrete shear walls are
provided to the roof to support the flexible roof diaphragm and to reduce
north and south wall deflections. The rigidity of the steel frame as com-
pared to the shear walls is insignificant; therefore, the analysis of the
total structure assumes that all lateral forces go to the shear walls using
a K-factor of 0.80. The calculations for distribution of forces to the
shear walls is not given here since these follow procedures given i Example
A-1. Calculations are given for the amount of shear to each floor for 100%
of the total base shear to the shear walls and the amount of shear to each
floor due to the requirement of 25X of the total base shear to the frame
alone.
A-i 17
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
edP -~~~~~~
0~
. ~ ~
6T~AAYS
.-- -
ec -, --
320
- t - -
T ___ __ I-.
, ! i I.
- I . _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
,o
o ds PZ.41
. i
,S76eLaEAMS AN i w
COLUMNS NOT SHOWN Z-.
J f 3'D fLOCA PLAN
LOAnS.
RZOOF: Zi4 4. 3*0 PLOOqS:
I S4o o
5 PLY RWOfI P9INISH
/0 INSULATION I's5 STEEL OG:CI 3D'
STEEL ECX 2.3 CONtCRTE FILL 3 2.0
STEEL PURLINS 3.7 STEEL (39AMS 5.9
STEEL GII/PS SrEEL GIR43S
AN13 COLUMNS 1.2 AN/m Co4tuMNS 1.5
PARTITION t .o
CGILING 10.0 CEILING I'0.0
MISC6LLAN9OUS 1.0 M1SCSLLANdOUS _ I .o
ifAD LOAO 25.7 dOIAIp LOAO 7' 0.0 I
,.s 1
A= FOR SSMIC LOA 1 L1VG LOAD Si
P'ARI7toms la 0
?f'A fA -CI-Uic a a. 7v°'
A-1 18
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
--&--
EXTUOA OVMNG
_
-
_
---- J-
_ ___
-- - r
II
B _ _. _z- s
EXJJOX ~Xwmma
ft
9
a a
T
1
~s
_ ____
-- N" I
_ . r
B - ~ M*
_ _
_ &- I
O~
4
WALL
-AL -(10 I -I
WALL ®&® .)
A-119
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
1
, 34'-O
I
T 9
Z '!I , b_
34:01
_ I
I
.
- -H I H H
I NoT76 eNIJSAYj
..1 1 IJS
T~N A-S& A CAAMMLMA
'IO
I
I-
I -- U .SEHhsaiH
-I--
-
iO+, m.
IJ3°
.+W~~~~~t64 q~~~~
,i
i jc5 r>
i
_Wt84S~I
+ _ I _~0
I5-0 c1
I o lo
I I -
.I .1II
g 5
A-120
TM S-809-10
NAVFAC P355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
i
IL
- V LOAIZS
ROOF I.7 19C. -Pqq
VA LLS )E) -
WALLS (9 A74O I
i080
to, IO3
AN-S LOA06
OOF =,7 2' t S t A PtOOF lasco
WALL5 ( s t37 EX7: WALL ZX Z2 = 44
CENTER AY v a9 3, / ENO AYS =1900 VI
Example A-5 5 ofP Steel Frame, Concrete Wallt
Z,
A-121
TM S-809-10
NAVfAC P455
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
:.iiA '.
;,
. . ,
W3 /O78A TOrAL
LOAf3ING @ oof% q
LOAMING ORJ 3O PLOOR OIAPHAAOM C N* PLOOR. SAM )-
5XTErOA WALLS (ACCOuJT .ap p6ACENTAGe OF SOL I
WALL - WUIMMW our)
MOZAL PANEL
WALL wr. *A&1'. A =44Ao8al Z,.7Aa g 52 2 d
10' CONC. WALL 833V 11 's/ /0a j8h3745
)137$x ,.O 1375 , 48 :66,000*
O ' , 13760 s48
l3746°=75
- AS
A1 37607 w /3/ ;$eo 63.
0/3 75 0. 15 a> n,4 qo
09g = 1375 .91 /S'>C3d3 = 7,470'$
II
M_ s LOaDS
CENTElz PAY 6-PV LOAD$S
PLOO 7$ 1d,3676 ALOO S 5
WALLS 4 __ _o__r WALL7 $492 ss 8750
ms& lof A9 a 6Co WALLS rk C'
A.Z"ft oonytl *Z 2 2 2. 'So?
ALOOA 74.5 4 357G ' 9.,556>
6X7: WA& 2jt44a O
a o 464*,
Example A-5 6 o 7 Steel Frames, Concrete Walls
A-122
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P.355
AFM 883. Chap. 13
LATEAAL FORCES
h o ts705= C = ,
A-123
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 8-3, Chap. 13
DESIGN EMPLB: A-6
Construction Outline.
Roof: Exterior Walls:
Composition & gravel. Wood stud bearing walls with
1" diagonal sheathing. exterior and interior
Wood rafters, wood girders, plaster.
and columns.
.'k;' ' !
Ceiling (drywall + acoustic Partitions:
tile). The stair enclosure walls
2nd Floor: are wood stud with plywood
3/4" plywood sheathing. Asheathing on one. Other
Asphalt tile. interior walls are-removable
Wood floor joists, steel drywall.
girders & columns.
Ceiling (drywall + acoustic
tile).
1st Floor: ..
Concrete slab-on-grade.
Discussion. The accompanying computations show the load diagrams and dis-
tribution of horizontal forces to the various shear walls and the unit shear
and chord stresses in the diaphragm. Attention is called to the two second-
floor struts which must transfer diaphragm shears to the shear walls on each
side of the stairs. Double joists are used for these struts. Plywood
sheathing is given for one of the stair walls. As this wall is short, it
will be provided with special tie-down fastenings. Shear in piers of each
wall are computed as proportional to the solid space between openings.
A-12
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-55
AFM 88-, Chap. 13
EL COL..
I
0 SrEEL
SEAM
166LOW|
_____W
I1sr
81_I_ ?
A
EeL COL
LOW
S--AR MU
&tsrftOOR
U
's _ _:
g w _ _ _ _ _--1
--
L--
Tfn
;c
_eS
.____.
-
-1YT~
-1 1
i o
$mtod
II ~P V A-I11
tv !~ ~~~~-Ii
~~ 0 Its!8-M#S'
s t i> | smar:St'~~~~~~~
t * $
IJ-t
6 Vt -i~crvA~cr
tj
a
2,ri - .5
4
elm "
2,fa-t
*
- - ______
e5-% MW"d
A-126
TM s-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 8-3. Chap. 13
. Z:,..
WA6LLC WALL t
A-126
TM 5-80-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 884, Chap. 13
'
A(
$-A =Ij5K
eLo O%
(N-s) LOAJZS
27#/p' s 4o' = 080//
i/ 7 V/, X 234
/314
WALL C oR /7 4 = 680
(E -tV) LOAI 5
27 0 = 2VGO
A7 CA /1/ 7 i'38
A-127
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
WALLS
6X;TERIOA: I98 f,
INTSRIOA: 18 $ .6
. -,
LOA0 NG I1 A AM - N FL O /6APHAAGM
10' 0t
rI . ,
-4..
i~
I
80'
4 63.3 10 1&7A.a Iro6 K e loo.g
I 52.5 sc.5 -- ,a-a
I t' . 1.1 I
l.1I
I K,, 75 1/
7.qK
. i. . I
(N-S) LOA09
33.q. 40= 135 WAL C OR a 9?6AcZ0 790
q9a x . 3=4? WALL & ag 9 s 20 I gol
17(5 2 #r'
t;-W) LOAS3$
33.9 80=Z7'. WAML 6 is a9 9, - 94
9 x 2 s= 39 WALL A x Aam1'6 4 aOlfi 4/4
310E
A-128
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
LAreRAL FOACES
= zz .i
V= ZZECCS9
ZoMe 3: Z4#; tm/.O; .O(AaLE 3-3)
T r.ao05h/y h= Zt.2' CE,%IVrf
n T C
LONGIT. 80' 0124 O8 NmO NOT
7tqANSV. 40 0.174 SeC. 0./i F G)XC6ro Odit
.sror P Yo osc
OAC£rA( - )
LEVL Wh wh- w Ps
ROOP 15y- 2,2;1 6 q 059 /7.0
-2gNbpR. IrVOK /10' 1760 O4 /1.8
Wm 279 43/9 1.0 28s
vm 0OtO5 V-2.1-Sf ea2.8
A-129
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
AOOP OPAACAM
LA7EXAL POACe S7AY PO*cU /7, o
t3JAPWR41 FO*4 (3- 36r)sdJ
MI. £ wP
044 Zip = -O.Ii01 6Op
MAC.Pp~ .OZApca .04a box~0.*b~,
JIJAPMARAGM 13re1ses w = 0,/=8 WR
8END1 A CM MO4 F qS'//UAA V ir
a JVL1/4 awA,41 sr v = /Ja
. s (1.1 O4J- I6 * .7.6t . 401 0OJ*f
: ...
.0".
, 4
---
uli.
, 4
SJJUATHINVG YMAA. 9 0 Vt i
A-130
Li
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 884, Chap. 13
2 FL00A rJAPlAAM
ILATEIAL FOACE SrO/LY FOzCf = //., 9 y8=0.0738
IAPHRAGM FORCE
tps = = 0.05
wpg =5 Wp, 4 IS0VEINS
MAJA. px, -.= 06 WPxc
DIAPtNPA GM SrE SS ES
J5 EN/J'3IG 4 CmOWz FORCE S/EAR V
a: M/1D = WI./ 2
S (. 75
-D i0,j;) 4b a8 = 82.7g . St 2 0 7/C
6.; z
,1 I " ,, -t
E-w(3rItz .103) <t/ =
ca ,5. +reo=0 .8 2b
WALL WALL.
L
L L* v ye I SOWUNTJAu
CASE _NAILS pANs(
PlAILS AoWm
Jr
A 80 650* a
3 6' C.C. CC Z/,1/
swasrof
o' 60' If 109
4N,0IIDFSTAA 24' 620 i3 ,;
I C
G uC.C.c cc. es5
E, PLUS S7UT 40' s 138
A-1 31
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
A-132
- - ------------------------- --- -
TM 6-809-1 0
NAYFAC P455
AFM 08-3. Chap. 13
S//FA R WALU
T~ PU ,...._~~~~~~~~W
-W,,..O . W
- I c ZO
4 50~ 18 PS-0
SU4DN
/ZUIU3/N6
'oSM1"f ./i
L.s'i
-? - rofw Di L 41 Olwt
:j9O
B
J{CT0N - 20' 4?tTOTAC DL 44IOw
A-133
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
SH AR A LLS cod/r7.).
NALL )
REAr AS 3 EQUAL C T/LEVR PIRS
ASSUAfd NO momNT aVfeOPaeo JA SPANDtLs.
ISPLICS POR PJW5bdg894k XZ3. aJ8
V(A7CAL E Ol
*__ r_____ o?#Jiw$mJ2 JOa 14
rYPICAL Ar
AL P4S.I
'I'- t - .:7 3. 2
Ire7-= .17
.., . ':
'. ,
",
141C..'O',
_M 203 C17.8
WALL SGCA
I/S5 Sa Ly; SX,7 LA J4WPiASr*E_ 20O
20 lAirf too
e9 u 360 t DIA S477NG - -- 3
WALL r/VI '0774 ALLOW. IL r60p'fr.
! '.
9
OVERTURNING: Z NO5
5Oqy S SpY
WT. O WAL ''1 aeOsf 1941" 9's(3'/8 = 3C3
DL OF A OOP J4'
1 A 7psf = J70 170
I0L CxLOOi J5 .'C34= 340
TOTAL I3LZ. TI123
0.7: MOMENT = 3aqgKRj.97 47.a4/PfER
.3
O.J. FORMS 'g, = _ 3.75~
7c = I7
A-IUA
TM 5--10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 68, Chap. 13
WAL
Z CON 7
A-1SS
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
NET
F V L.
ROOF O.1483 7.3 ; *S.- id.48A _v /o3I
SHGATAJ46
a O STORY fX r. I2N L P Soof*>/65
i 57 $7°oAY At*** 40 LGT-IM1 5R.AC6S
4 iooo(100
47.6 > 30/
A-136
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
SPECIAL CONFIGURATION:
Design Concept. The roof is a reinforced concrete beam and slab system
forming a relatively rigid diaphragm, even with a 6 to I length-width ratio.
The north, east, and west walls are concrete bearing walls. The south wall
is a rigid frame. The lateral forces are resisted by shear walls. The
building is a Box System with a K-factor of 1.33.
A-137
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chop. 13
!. UP.P''.'"
FJ.
P LOOR PLAJJ sCAL&:'sso*
A-138
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
..
.. . .?!.
-7ic' .24COJC.-J5A.A
- IŽ1 I L
0sourY &L-VA- rOJ CALE :r'3.o
A-139
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883, Chap. 13
$OO',Q-rA . S Z210A.WAL.S
COMPOI)ORAV. IZOO' 70 AA WA
a'COAA)C.T(C.AJ5 eGs.O .j- (1/D WALLS ieSSc Z88s 9P5 rS
-^aa J6~~~~~8.0'7,
10~ ~ ~ 0
1]Aez
4COc. A)Mal50 A.S8 237V.
COLtJV"JSSl A 4Z7c I-0Ait lia 7g2q
iT6sA5JJ-y
ROOPf; &4Jx
e4 e4O' ' 5JUD I4Ltd ?25,i ei4*eSAOC0KJ3JZs ;I/
W WALL , 945
,e6&A. : 37
co0_S. ___226 43 JUMMARY
144 2 MArWALL$cP415
. . .1.1
... 1.
.: -,
q, I",
* G.3
I
DOOR oX Y6R IOx7 70
(OIAPHIA6M 0.4Sx144 a 64.J
, .,1, 11
. ! , qx..;,
. 73 x 3PA 4 46W
sSfiuAC a6- W TOMT ffL IdJSMIC P/GIdHrT 7/1."
00F-d&a 144 =2, 400
WALLS 2x985' 1. 970
1J33AI4,3 70.191002
11, Wd.. 94514- 1~V
34,000Xc.733.1.2"
. WALL
J5&A e37g 144' 84 200
CotL /228e '5 6, 40
CO0C-VI. CO A 144 .69 650.
.x3 48990-0.5t
JEIJMIC OAfJX
A-140
TM S-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
RECA7e V */CAXGIIT/r
NORTH WALL
UWING CAr Po oR -PLecTo (C/e. 6 -tI)
bIEFLdC7IOb1 AAUwAreao 4#GCLOW PO / WAILLJ, AR
/Z//0 T/MEJ THE CHART VAL441 WHICH ARE PO /WALL$.
P/C- * d - w -_ 6PAC/Rs (J-s) e- P. .0038
-eC3.5.
..1 F¢- 3 8.5 .84 4N2 Jt.75
£ WAK4L z./0J0-.o e4to. MMs z0.oee -
ro 8 7.0 .43 Ose 2z4q
;OJze.
eu'c - . xesz
.. '240.0
.
Cc IbICA JES
';"': 4c'
;!
, "': . .
.. Co~Reit PI°atmcI
M" -55 144 .1077.0108 COM6U)I7' ION
flA 3
-8 144-. 024 AC MNtICATeJ
eA. _.
Aecr4N6e44, P'Z
'ANr6F1VIZ COMOMT/ON
I OUJ0
r wiALL CG/f3 FRA M LF)
beifc4#CT,/oN 0 P/s/t - 4eAM AvXEND
P1C6I'Z * d- hX- - _ _
7cF-t -1 4--- : Z..-- :
.. _ .. _* _- . _ . __
Q 1- 'a. I : CG./4
.0 , # ,1Io0
14PAWj 14_144 .097 _S
AwAL4:gooq5-,0of 4+.14 :.14t
DEOLEC0IN AlUe 70 R A07TION O JS6AM
.MO-
c_ -( - Q '--\
.. , ) CC-"MYZ
.C6 : ..r':;- OPES
.. AJ 0 __ AA F . t
A-141
TM 5609-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
1035~ O. e.f4 ~. ~ i 2 .0 7 q 4 : . 0 7 , :i
wAuw- .0604 -. 46- ,.41&9j0Sfa (voq P:aooo'9
XWACA.7U5 947 fA Rzoe 5r & a
- - 9 0~~~~~=.oo "a*
IOP At6C1G1tr'
CeNTSR
N-J oist3G. e4 y JIPeCtION
e-w: NOmrT 244L af. x 3.0 :a 0oro I loco
JO'JH AL K o.044.X 0 - X -j.-; 2
C6Nrep O MA JJ Ar N. W L
N. 5: ON &4D6 . e Y NJPeC7ION
e-W: NartH ALL a : 41.1 x 2.oa 949. &i. q48400 / 5,
XOUrPH W4I44 : f .4- 0 0 ' 70.6
70.7c a.co
131J7TAVSUTfON OP PORCU4 ACC/1I)NMAL e u 0.05(44)27.V'
a W: V v -01.J;? .4 7o.5 e a 3.o '-3.s : 9. W
M/ a 70.5cx 9.56' C 74 1c
WMALL )g dt X t~dt Z. d . C-P) R*3) ArJa -DS FACTOR8E COAA
WAL
W 'rRaf' K ds .3.-' S. OAO rWiZ. LOWD 1.4 .
-8 2
;, -O --.- ~-: 0f i 0. .......
0 .o. ..O 7a:.S 98.6 & 141
.'S. .0+ 3P.71 21.5 0.01 0 0.03 0.05 0.07 0.0
E-:? 9.475130 4&,581 . .-.. #7i5B t4.(s* 0 35.2 ta54 39.q 55.9 79.6
W-.::: 9.47 5130 ,5.16 4 71.51 #4 0 35.2 ;3.54 39.9 56.9 *79.8
= 14 = i7,184 d= = = = = =
e~w ;£: 742 0.0069 /iieCT JHfAA (K/X )V
Excamp 97,1-84 t: d (M 7 /ZXd) -OR.JHfA
Example A-7 6 of 9 h Special Configuration
A-142
TM -809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
E-W ARTQUAK6
NORT#4 WALL
FACTORED IDEJ/GN LOW4 = eZt 7O. g 440B6<
VM- 1401,800
JOuTH WALL
,R4VGf13YANALYJIJ FINA)$ NGL1GiSLE
:4 ; , , NC PORCS fOiR TW( JO4./7
. /
eJ WA4L.
.. O6J1N
t 7fe PR.AMS FoR VRr/CAL
LOA* ACUS IN12bCC-41 MOMENTS DU TO
o/K TrmeS 7MG r/3jror,/oA RESzL/NG
FReOM 7H AGTGRAL ORC6.
-J e- A / JlHCJAke
CH4ok F '/o.7'C" A: 0. 7 x .4 I 97
A-14
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
TR4NSVE16 PAM6-f
TNE4" WSRe N6L0C47EO N TH8 JGIf17MY ANALYJIJ.
CHECK rT rHEY CAN 4KE3/ 77Mej 7-He
eFC67"/0N C44CU4A40 -d 0t 7He Moog
HiAPHRA GM ACr1NCv w1tWO4 r THe F/eAme f
/3IAPHRAjvM ID"'eC"0 26"
i(LEXUAL M6OL SC7, J1.5 i- /1
ASSUMIEO JECrooN ROOP2;
G6 x 7T . 234- t
vouir 15 _ _C
1BA JSC C*5 CD FIXED-eNf> MOMENrVS
. f127 .873 .deZ .178
.7 XtF 0.12:oJ87 A
PGe.M. -187 :.Se
M -:SEIIlG7A
+.024 t.163 t.ze9 *.049
t.114 t.01 Mc,> /S-AIZ 7 0.2748 A
-. OI4 -. 100 -. 067 -. 01'$ FINAL MOMeNT$fOR pm '1'
-. 033 -. 050
M4A 0.17SCA 0. 7 x 4 3 6
+.004 +O? +.041 +.009
*.OZO 4-.014 z7&.7 K (. 1 ')
CA4: 026(.0'38
-. 003 -. 0/7 -. 0/1 -. 003
-. 005 -. 008 : 1o3 k-/N (8.61K')
S -. ootl .004 t007 t~OO?
z sC- RSs c .175e -. Z3 ca e
EA 43 o.I
A V. #Bs . 1r4 F
aDA CAIAATIO)
^xA COMPAIrIUTY
a zs , , , .- - U
f3&A4LE CT/ON OF~ 0.200
, _ .w . _q
U0R W'I'
,cOtt UW*ME
RI&/)D PARAM6 -S D$L--t/oN
,WN PI
0HN
6-.3qv' X02 rWWEN4 COMAtED WTH
0A
-/ . X 0.200 8.8 ' GRAVI7Y L04D5 THE
Mcbu .(Df IW oESoo : 18K JTALCJES ARI
t o.c00.
^6o x
/s4LNG
JWITRIN TREESTICLmTr; J/.
.. _CO P-A I MAL. .. OX.- I
Example A-7 9 of 9 ' Special Configuration
.
A-145
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
Construction Outline.
Roof: Exterior Walls:
Built-up, 5 ply. Bearing walls in concrete
Metal decking with insulation furred with GWB finish.
board.
Suspended ceiling. Partitions:
2nd & 3rd Floors: - Non-structural removable
Metal decking with concrete drywall.
fill.
Asphalt tile.
Suspended ceiling.
1st Floor:
Concrete slab-on-grade.
Loads.
Roof: 2nd & 3rd Floors:
5-ply roofing - 6.0 p.s.f. Finish - 1.0 p.s.f.
1" insulation - 1.5 Steel deck - 3.1
Steel decks - 2.3 Concrete fill - 32.0
Steel purlins - 3.7 Steel beams - 5.9
Steel girders Steel girders
and columns - 1.2 and columns - 1.5
Ceiling - 10.0 Partitions - 20.0
Miscellaneous - 1.0 Ceiling - 10.0
Dead Load - 25.7 p.s.f. Miscellaneous _ 1.0
Add for seismic: Dead Load M 74.5 p.s.f.
Partitions 10.0
Total for Live Load - 50.0 p.s.f.
seismic - 35.7 p.s.f.
Example A-8 1 o8 L-Shaped Building
A-146
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
.,
. IA
=I,1b--w
I,_, |_______
|_______
|_______ |-|
II = == _ = == _= _ u_
Al O O / Ri A/ ScSL: I"'$o
NOTE:
4
WA L (w) A A JPPORiT
FOR TG r/APHRA M
eAST OF L 4 OR -W
FO1CES. 7Wg IfrA7 ON
LIN C S bEJ&N61E: oR
AOR C4S COLLEC7e IN
7HE I APIR8A&M. THe
Sr/tL~r A°Rce I rcs
TRANJfERRe 70oCf* 444
SY A SU ZA L C CONVNC /ON
AT7HUe LoCA 47N bDICA rF1).
W,4 Zz (n
Example A-8 2 of 8 L-Shaped Building
A-147
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
w _ .. .. ..
A-148
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-3S5
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
_
1-0 ldo,
-0 -%
.
I
-
_
__
iC5
*
i
- -ID_--_
_~E_,_____
ME .li
__
__i
a~~
I
--
.
__K
I
- ~I
o
________I_____________
_
AY'(
.
Fz
___
__
_E
apap
4 _
r
a
I]
WALL
T
in % 0a
eNi /E'. .
toIn
~~~~~~~~~~I T_ _--
__~~
- ~ __ I _ .
l .91I
l~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
*.rq
WALL(P4
WALL®
WA LL®A
Example A-8 4 of 8 l L-Shaped Building
'7'
A-149
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
S
LOAPS To ooFPI4PHRACvM 00% g .9
La;.
ft
1-71. X O 2 0
a 06., v 9G : 9,s 11 I~~
IG4.CD X 14: 25,70 r tj
-
.
0
TOTAL Wel Hr 645" 0 it
I v
Xq 53'35G _ 27
Y 45 zX{A
8-Zu71* CNTeIy
I
Y/AfUIAAR COMfPC1ATIONS OMASl\
CN en
II
,(SD
I~
taI
II 12
1%
4
11- £
4
a
L
I (8~
1
I-
6.4 ^o
_-
I XRm 82.7'
ro Ig ~~ -I a
J
/-.
,LdU ' - -
, w
'
.
JL 13L WII B.1
3
IV QOOF: 3,7 #/D'
t1,
L - (U _ _ __ _ _ I-
U-
.1;t.
** .: 17/.2'v 134.4 3.4 3 08.1?"v le,4. e.
3.7kT 1 1M.411 ---
/37. . 09.9v
- -
/09we - I
2.ao / _I-
rwBl~ 3.1" L P a-
2! I 1
Vasrs k. i
2t- I_L qdse0a 1-
4at 1
4C :~- LV
--
I
I
i R ,0
i,
Sout.) %TorAL Ner
WrTNJ JoCrM NORTH
___
A-15O
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
r
I
IEI
II
A-151
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
LA7REAL 40A4JS
V2 ZZKCJW
FOR OCA7VON IN ?ON9 Z 0.75
131.0, K'/.33
0AIN
TO6 C, C4CJLA7V r 0 AND C a I
FOR N.3 31RECTION
7' 0.1ras 0.1Gia
T~ '4-^?i :0.at68; /5J016 0.113 .iT NC6D NOT
FOR e-w OlReCrION _ XceeD 0.1t
T7a 4* 3 3 '0.108 C 0. 0
.. . 0... . ..
FA- Ve
Lx Ah wx Ihx
whP vv h S2LMS M
ROOF 33 IJ C45
4 ZIs.347 141 149 lG39
5SIPR. ?t It /'?/4 96708 .435 167
?'ZPP1. Iit ____ ____
1 14 138 ____
.2t854
/6
____
4 43$
- 430 4730
A-152
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
ROOF DIAPHRAGM
JrORY FoRce 14q.5" w -- 6 z
IDIAPH. ORCE PR 6QN. -
O 1 MA.
M4X/t 4F 8y/26
F.4 1 31.4 10.4 1 8K
LOA . 4
1,4~ ~ , 4
jJjqJfl~1 f 7 V --
A1- /
A-153
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
APPENDIX B
DIAPHRAGMS
B-1. Purpose and scope. The details and examples given In this appendix are to illustrate principles, fac-
tors, and concepts involved in seismic design of horizontal diaphragms of buildings. These are not mandatory,
and other equivalent methods, materials, or details complying with this manual and applicable agency guide
specifications may be used.
8-2. Design examples.
Design
Example Description
B-1 Concrete Diaphragm:floor diaphragm supported by steel deck; diaphragm stresses and stress
transfer to concrete walls. See appendix A, design example A-1.
B-2 Steel Deck Diaphragm:stresses and connections in roof deck with concrete walls. See ap-
pendix A, design example A-1.
B-8 Steel Deck Properties:sample calculations for working shear, qD, and flexibility factor, F. for
six steel deck systems. See chapter 5, paragraph 5-6.
B-4 Wood Diaphragm:stresses and connections for diaphragms In a two-story wood building. See
appendix A, design example A-6.
h.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
a2
S-1
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-45
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
APPENDIX C
SHEAR WALLS
C-1. Purpose and scope. The data, details, commentary, and examples given in this appendix are to Mus-
trate principles, factors, and concepts involved in seismic design of shear walls of buildings. These are not
mandatory, and other equivalent methods, materials, or details complying with this manual and applicable
agency guide specificatIons may be used.
C-2. Design examples.
Design
Example Description
C-I ConcreteShear Wals. A detailed analysis and design of concrete shear walls Is included in the
design of a twostory building in appendix A. design example A-i, Box System.
C-2 ConcreteShear Wall with ConcreteFrame. A special analysis for walls in buildings with K
0.80 is included in the design of a two-story building in appendix A, design example A-4.
C-8 Wood Stud Shear Wall. An analysis and design of plywood and diagonally sheathed shear
walls is included in the design of a two-story building in appendix A. design example A-6.
C-4 WaU Stiffnesses. Several methods of calculating wall rigidities are compared.
h.~~~~~.
P?
C-1
TM -809-10
NAVFAC P45
AFM 884, Chap. 13
DESIGN EXAMPLE: C-4
COMPUTATION OF WALL STIFFNESSES:
The examples on sheet 3 through sheet 10 illustrate various methods for
determining the rigidities of walls with openings parallel to plane of the
wall.
(1) Method A and the first example is taken from a textbook, "Stati-
cally Indeterminate Structures," by J. R. Benjamin (Copyright 1959 by McGraw-
Hill Book Company, Inc.), pages 221-223. It is a nearly precise method as it
includes the effect of rotation of piers and axial shortening of piers. How-
ever, it does not include the effects of spandrel and foundation flexibili-
ties. Computations made by this method are relatively accurate but can be
very cumbersome for ordinary use.
(2) Method B is a very commonly used method in which the total de-
flection of the wall is determined by adding the deflections of the piers at
various levels. The piers are assumed to be fixed-ended or guided cantile-
vers depending on available restraints at pier ends. Joint rotation and
axial shortening of piers is not considered.
(3) Method B2 is the same as Method B, except that all piers are
assumed to be fixed-ended.
(4) -Method C is considered more accurate than either Method B or
B2 . In this method the deflection of wall is obtained as though it were a
solid wall. From this is subtracted the deflection of that portion of the
solid wall having the height of the openings. Then the deflection of actual
piers at the openings is added, thus replacing the deflection of the ficti-
tious solid midstrip. In this method the piers are assumed to be fixed-ended
or cantilevers depending on available end restraints.
4
(6) A resume is given for the first example on sheet 7. This shows
that Methods A, B2, and C give comparable relative rigidities. If in the ex-
ample, Piers B, C, and D each were of different proportions, there would be a
slight difference in stiffnesses computed by Methods A and C. Method B2 can
produce inconsistent results. This is shown by the second example on sheets
8 and 9 in which Methods A, B2 , C, and D are compared. This shows consistent
results between Methods A and C but for Method B2 the wall with opening is
C-3
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
indicated as being stiffer than the solid wall. Method C is not generally as
well-known as Methods B and B but is considerably more accurate and is used
for the examples in Appendix A. The use of Method C to a more complex problem
Is shown on sheet 10.
C-4
-------
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3 Chap. 13
.dICN<OMCSS d
. 2,r0 ru -gCA' e4/1rl/rY
MfOOV~de/I
ci :4'4 4"4 4'
AfOeIZ41,t f OA qJGeDamv
G 04.E = q60*O>e1.j
jvt C' Ile 0
I "Aw AA A
AMALYS A cCOMr/IM& d' 4. 4* , W 4a
wX;
%:.. 'A CA NE IAI AX IA L
I
XCKStATJC4LLY .MOC-
W4LL ELCEVA7 /0
/75? pt, VeI 22/. 229 4
e IS 4tAANe4 ro UPo
PROaf TMA 0.' WALLi.TO tqa
100 60%( 4 /.et/ 2O*OK x t
=AA w / 2t8 b 9f.7OO-f'o~
AL
4$) % t4'QG^v ASye
U + I.2Ka KIDo atr
9a929/
C-6
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
RO rArJ0A1 OX jO/tq iA
tv n
iq t Z;
. e) 2x
coon4.o
4,U X/rAA
4 0I4MS
A&dX rO 0$' WALL SIZ90.2, X: 0.02S"
AXIAL DVR,4A 77 0N or "A B INz
AXIA4L F'OF c- ea V _73 75
AT MIOHOL1/6;H
0 PRS 16 h Z A -&V84/Z 20 -oaO/SX
K '
rOrAL 4 e r(3OP r WAIZ a 0.140OSOf ooo s./7f
Sxafi. 57
ME rHOD ,S -Rr-F/£e I=/&. G-II.
AbIALYSIS QY -SACKIN0. PIPRA A10 UJ/P.A nSgcla3
ASs
8UMING WAtL.- AS A WHOLE A5S A CA4rALPVdA4c
q3 '7
I 5 )( 240 ° K 3 OCOr a a' R) Cci~ve @9
.& Us O. O 7SX -30°0° X /*- -s . O a?.i*1
C-6
TM 5-809-10
NAVFACP-3S
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
P/es
R g
,C. ' X4Me Ms -*eseecv
4.,.~~
SOLAb
____ W Stt
__Ls 0. .0 0 ?eoyvp/a
lr t/ oArn) cazev 0
A C060
. a 0 i 4AJr o.oS a 9. se
C-?
TM S-910
NAVFAC P-355
AFM k3. Chap. 13
6UO.0lSZ4oQ S
... .. INDIV/DUAL, P/I dCoA
'aA (fo roo 0for)
h _ 2 ,_ C v4
V g
-d - . O14 I
AM4TLYJS AZSeD O , Co l.
4
O$ THE %O .10WALLAY
4.
STrIP. A 4~ ( 7//4p
57t164dS Of ! WLL '4.
wDPM Moz# MA 3 DL
4 yzei AM
0v.r -
go6
Wa'DV AIL -!9
A 0. 0 'Ags' ituS 7Wde8W dfh1
/xo4o04
4W*O. C3 //L Of
FIAI/A' MA.WMTI
A(roZQ) a axO.O5/ MUM E'41O C
*19,40 INAWA WA61
0.0945~~s WILiO/r Nf04%5 £
,KC7074S u' 0.544 esiff lVAreo.
C-s
TM 6-09-10
NAVFAC P35
AFM 8-3. Chap. 13
.4
C-,
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AfM 88-3. Chap. 13
--
7rNICKN69,S i - *'
MOt/a4Z/ o' 4ZAST/C-TY 4.
,6=2404<0m/-W
A?0OZA.tUS 0r R/C/0/7Y 0 of a 0
.5 = 0.4 40. /F le
__
_ _ __ _ _ _ _ _
Im7erl-o - I 9' 20 9'
i4-R A" C-w r at/d V FA A.
7 X
16A = NCIMdS ,
P/EIS G3g3 V=SQ04 xax
;Ti
.i::
XR.*ez~~IS/,
A ^- 32., c-o /Av.
4(7Of Ar ) @0. /a d"
*qO7rAA 14ORV wr V
OP ; ',A ,I,s
,* = .2r 4 1"RAOIAMS .- 7 -OP O-O VV4LI, ,.*2Z
AXIAL.
811h
d9/2X 2400
^ 7TOP° Ot~"3t-2K0/ t*01ad4 UO.OO92"
WA. /(Aa@ e7OP
tOTAL 'W or~ W4S~W0,SO?8,.025O..OO0>2./4?O
#
(9 W41_j
4 ra.O 000
W.ALL Xa ,12 7. 04
57-wNeSS Im CoMPAR I/SON 70 $o4OD WZ ,.22
,& 7. 70. -
Ra8 a 0 *4
u.0739 V&2/?.%2 /<D 2.04
4 UD'. 0 3 70 4 3 /6
.4
-4 A.0ZK36+'0970=./OOZ / 9
K 0 L D WA L 4('lXED) 9 2
sSrV.PP/343 IA COAIPAR4VOW
70¾50L/0 WALL
9.9d xioO s 04.ctya
Example C-4 8 of 10 Wall Stiffnesses
Pt
Cb10
TM6-M-10
NAVFAC P-45
AFM S, Chap. 13
Imagr/ioD cj-
SOIL I WALL(A,.a') A 'O/3OS
"sOsiMO 4.,e" CC4 .vr) A c0.0S2-
.e (,o ;9 (f'vtai)
e aao.07J9 &,o /,5Z 9Z0 4m .0870-
4s
$
A WAUo ./ ZSS -, OU2 . 0S70 J /427 7
flALL w02
5STMWA&M l// COMPAJIfOJJ 70 s5ou w4et. a ? ? 7 s%
l Jr_ _ _ _ _ __2
*<,4
9.96 £acJQZ11P.4 s0c'O "4 X a/0.64
C~eu ea) es-egg 48s)
~~epe
(* oO2
;C 6& *it121w
C-1l
TMS -910
NAVFAC P-355
AfM 88-3, Chap. 13
.. . :!;~
,. SOLID WALL:-+:/4,: o. GO (C4,.mLCV<Aa,)<
... .
w-s 07oX3^4t< Xr-O.01385 ot6d=72
4. 0. 37 A 37 X . I I q s"
,^ D PI C- 4- VQ. cmqvc @
-333t(ixeq)
4'2 0.0207PC z° 'X
p00 R *. .J 4 7 1
AC+D~ - -c#o
/.aC . -
^ ACO * 0>.Ji9ffa-0.OVo Ad./o0 :Oi#97"
re° 1 4,v el 5w$9
s, 0 X. aC IO
X zo.*137.
*( A A a v- r %2 . 0./57 4 .-
<WAL -'j 0.4 ieOC. AIT/Levte cU
2o o4r _ ___
KW^iL4'k0.204aOG: 4
Exaple C4 10 off1O Wall Stiffneasea
?it,
C-12
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
APPENDIX D
SPACE FRAMES
D-1. Purpose and scope. The data, details, and examples given In this appendix are to illustrate prnci-
ples, factors, and concepts involved in seismic design of moment resisting space frames of buildings. These are
not mandatory, and other equivalent methods, materials, or details complying with this manual and appli-
cable agency guide specifications may be used.
D-2. DeSIgn examples.
Design
Example Description
D-1 Concrete Ductile Moment Resisting Space Frames. Illustrates special analyses required to
design ductile moment resisting frames using reinforced concrete. See appendix A, design ex-
ample A-2.
D-2 Steel DuctileMoment ResistingSpace Frames. Illustrates special analyses required to design
ductile moment resisting frames using structural steel. See appendix A, design example A-S.
I;.
,.t
p2
D-1
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 883. Chap. 13
APPENDIX E
REINFORCED MASONRY
E-1. Purpose and scope. The data, details, and examples given In this appendix are to illustrate princi-
ples, factors, and concepts involved in seismic design of reinforced masonry buildings. These are not
mandatory, and other equivalent methods, materials, or details complying with this manual and applicable
agency guide specifications may be used.
E-2. General. Design methods are similar to those for concrete. For details of masonry construction, see
chapter 8.
E-3. Design examples.
Design
Example Description
E-1 WaUDesign-LateralLoad Normal to WaU
E-2 Wai Design-LateralLoad Paralelto WaUl(Shear Wail
E-3 Composite Wall
E-4 WaU Stiffnesses. For calculation of wall stiffnesses see appendix C, design example C-4.
E-5 Shear Wail Buildings. For design of a shear wall building see appendix C, dssign example C-I.
E-I
- - -
TM 5-09-10
NAYFAC P5
AFM 8-3 Chap. 13
V/AU. OdX~16N
4AT6RA 4OA/D NORMA 4 7T
rpivN: a"i: Wr. Cmu 0!/16e 2e4o.c.
WA4
-7
ROOFa "~ a 500W/FT /I
L' 3 I0OO/FT JR
RoOP occENTRclrTr: 5*
P n /BSOf'SI TA44 8
VAL4 W7.r58W/LC TA 8.0
ZONE 4 6RAD01
W1O c /S */jc MINH. mom&N
selSJMlc: SpwazCpw DIA GRA
JI O/a.OcO. 5x 5 /X aS.?T/JP "OeptiN.(
AEKNtN6 MO eNT &oL /5., 14X.CA7 o5r.
#(1opA6"r..T
fCCETrAlCM0MT eDN
e'ic6mr e w50 '6i.s
.. . -O.
A 0.31
AfPO. V Plw O------U--- aI9,OD;alo
h3-t5 i 3tthZSO.O7-b
2f;p-075
jsI . a8ico
'-3
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
-4
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
SHEAfR WA (F
LAERAC LO ARA4LLCL 0 MAI 4
GIVEN: L4IAW4 Lx/O p:,O', -
TME
O's Lae4 0C.
CALCULTAIO
Rt/Ii,/TY A
ACiA14006 Cr4.
JMAR
P0R PI
__GP
oR .
_
I
R0^
fi GeUN
% LA7MRAC POjRCE 70TP J: q%/ O/O:
AI O
,IOS5-4
Pa 7 '7 fIHCReA?E 60%*OR5fIM1I
d2v Aj- :Ofat Vs - 'i ,7.4 Pi <0Vxx
P.
JoLusI 6 7.ct24
6ROUT 7Od6 .003
AXA4 LOA 4
f4 ~A 71J e
B2.17e2 ACotAL J .teSJ
4[ISou ] oI (/*s) - ti
E-5
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
I
,p
I C
Ix o-a
FINA) 7.4. OP WA4.4
P4IGR A*eA X AX a /.; Act
I 2.C7 t 1.ai 3.S56 Y.ZS 2st
I 3.5st 7.C7 es.5t 2.?/ 28t
a 6. t 169.3 8.ot 4; 74" list
T,/z7t 149s0 a
26
Exmp2L E-co 000
PAWv 0Jodb 20 8.t
rov2 sr*2q Li alleMWl
Zo.s V
E-6
TM -809-10
NAVFAC P45
AFM 883, Chap. 13
COMPOJI7tI WALL
4/?J CJ/CM411
O COMPUTE TE CENTmrs op
kEJrAXNCE POA AXIAL LOA1. ARICK
* PAOM TA b 8*q
5-7
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
APPENDIX F
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ELEMENTS
F-1. Purpose and scope. The design examples in this appendix are to illustrate principles, factors and con-
cepts involved in seismic design. These are not mandatory; and other equivalent methods, materials or details
complying with this manual and applicable agency guide specifications may be used.
F-2. Design examples:
Design
Example Description
F-1 Pad-MountedTransformer Illustrates the seismic design of a typical, rigidly mounted item of
equipment on the ground.
F-2 PoleMountedTransformer: Illustrates the application of the provisions of paragraph 10-5 to
.. . . the seismic analysis of flexible equipment on the ground.
hi z .. "
F-8 Tower-Mounted Equipment. Tower-supported equipment is investigated for lateral seismic
loads. The tower period is computed.
F-4 Cooling Tower in Building: Presents analysis for a rigidly mounted cooling tower in a
multi-story building.
F-S UnitHeater-FlexibleBrace. Analysis of a unit heater not rigidly braced.
F-6 UnitHeater-RigidSupport: Demonstrates the reduction of the lateral seismic load by rigidly
bracing the unit heater of Design Example F-5.
F-7 WaterHeater:Indicates how a water heater In a barracks is investigated for seismic loads.
F-8 Tank on a Building: Demonstrates the seismic analysis of a storage tank on a building.
Emphasis Is placed on the period determination.
F-9 Water Riser: Illustrates an approximate scheme used to determine the seismic loading on pipe
connections. A riser in a multi-story building is treated.
F-
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-3S
AFM 8W, Chap. 13
-PAD 14OUNreD
TRANSPORMeR
W7 a /O.OhKPS
I ~,;
1 -' z - ,
NATIVE SO1- L ",-ccReTee PAD
(INOR6AWC 4PO)
G'VeN: W = /0.0 K/PS
A/GID C-QU/d'ENT ON 7W56 6ROtUD
ZONe 8 SeISMIC AR A I: 1.0
REQUIREl-: CheCK ANCHOR AOLT ACMIONS /WUE
7o SEISM/C LOAOS.
AOLUM/ON:
F-,z:
r -/I
(v's C.)* ,I
( ls)
9 ,
Z a 1 :Z-10-1 CP sO. SO W & /0. - 0 KI
Fp / 4 (o)(2/3) (O.60) (/O): /.5 K/Pj
A.4/'41e 4T Ca
F-3
tM 809-10 TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355 NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13 AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
RE.AINING bAR
Wr' 7WANSFORMERm B.0 I41P/1..
-3.0KIPS4E / W77 POLES d L /F7/POLE
E (POLE6) l.C 10rLbllm
1 1 ff
' 11I I I Ts CSITe r-salo*) 1.S UKNOWN
ASSUME EACH POLE ACT A A
a
.T,
I 9'-
20' LONS
SEISMIC
CAN7r1LVei
ONE 3 1Hi11 QISK
wssooo i3
3,30 jL/mOLe
CAL CULArOAJ 00 k
IO (ONE POL) -, 7 4 S/Z- .76$4()*= t3Oh J
O , - e m (/ C A IO G ( i00)
O= x )
= 3.54 t.1 SliJl,
A.b 7 = 0 350= 9= 5sac,
354
Gp-v = r c S 3J-1)
= a 3oNd
, =X/. (H/GH ASK).
u , 5 (/-IVAr&,O AA11NULhi), S /I
(rsdr ,<MOWN)
C = //is = O7 0G 7 OROMULA 3-2)
2,5 x 0G.7X 1.
A%/5 -
= .236 W
F-4
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
GIVEN:
MIl5SILE 7rACkING svIcE 6iTUArEO
ON TRiUJ6 rowcE: se/sm/c ZON# X,
ESSENyIAL PAC/L/ry
Zs (src ER1o13 W .0saC.
C.G.
8 k'
h9 s
) W
I .
ASSUME DIAGONA(6
rAkfE OLY TNJION
F-5
gK I
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
SOLUTiON:
1, A
MeM - L. A P L
&8E FCE (IN.) (0.p1) A
(JPS) _
Ab 1.00 46 O 0 C
AC 0 0
146 .4.6
A O 1GC 1.0 0
b C 41. t1
7 C J.Oo 734-.6
hDW3 .2-alO' 144 5 230.G 6g .F
O.G?
C-t:) ? 1.16 Vt.6
CS +#.O'Z 146 t.;. ZS%&
CP 0 1 7 t.O 0
D LS -1. IC I 1.0
Z 114 .t
OF -3.02 14e 2.6 eq'.0 G
EOF -0O. 0 CIG t6 I C.O -, ,,f,,,. -, ;/ 77, ..
P1s -3.G 1 46 '2.5 cf+. NOTE: PTH IS ASSUM&D TO
TAKE NO $A SE £WeA,2
ft - 5.C3 144 *2.6 ?G+.S- AS MEAERI EH CARR /ES
G ft t O.0 1IO 0 Ise 7t.2 NO LOAO.
N.
Jt A = y P L, z P L
= 401 //,/#,
14
IZE 7 a
JA1CHE /CI.¢0
1K - -
Ilp xI0O 0. 11
AE
k = /P6S/IN. P5R SJOE
F-6
TM -809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM68-3, Chap. 13
/cOlDLING TOWEj
'- . - GIVJEN:
Wr. COOLING OWR = go.9PS
'I _ _
ZONE 6 6EIGMIC AREA
- t -
CON605Q rOWER RIGIOLY
- I -
/dOUN4Tr 0
W: YP, FLOO a 400 IIPS
/00o MOM N r sEG/£srNG
IA
t. _ _
FI.AME . Z .O.
-U ., U. , ,, - REQUIREo:
~.p: FINO THE SEI8MIC E6IGN
FORCE TO bE 4PPLIEO Ar
C.G.OF COOLING TOWEQ,
owUrtoN : .
z (ZO a) r J.O
Cp 0.30 (,-AILCe 34.
FP /.,O
O 0.30, W
-4 = o.22e5W/o
= O.ae5 y Co = 4.6 kpoS
F-7
TM 5-809-1 0
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
COAICRO9 8#WAR
CONCRETE \ IGIOLY- ATACHE C TO
SHURC&LI~NGe
WALLSK '.80 -
ll I 3X ) I ^//t~~~~~~~~t/// A~
F-8.
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
%/,/, /,/
.
.
0
S.
1< /
La
* .A
i4I
I-
rO
a'Z m8O a.- = O.GO SEC, (iaO-i)
F-,
I
TM 5-S9-10
NAVFAC P-55
AFM 63, Chap. 13
I
a
'4 0
I -IZ-IXIXYV L's
A= e . 4-) =. 6 IN.2
C.G.s I - W 9&P/P~s
A a O ( 3) - G 1.t
O + * 46°
/~~~~~~~~~~~~~~, /
F10
E
TM 40910
NAVFAC P45
AFM W3. Chap. 13
A,,(Kw VC)
AO
.. _
LA'b
LC * 14-1 LA6
. .kb
s
,,,
:.I , ::
.F-11
-
TM 5-809-1O0
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 683. Chap. 13
7'RIPOr3 IbAEE
RequIQRerP INVEGTIGATE THE WATEQ
NiEA"TER FOZ EI9MIC LOA0O6.
SOLUTJON: PATEZ U4ATR
WILL bg
CIASIFIFD AS bING E4UkMCNtr ON T145
GlaOUNO ANO WILL bE CONSiD6I1&0 TO b6
A IG10 bODY. WINCE FCTION ANNor
bE uo m RCGIST LAT1RAL
'CE1GMIC FC5S 7-Ha WATER eS=AkTF.
MtU-T b RIcGIDLY A77ACHG Q To 1rS
FouNoAwTON OLT wArez HEAaTo.
LEG6 TO FL00. REFeR TOPAA. o-Sq
Pp Zz (2/3Cp)Wp (10-3)
Z: 1.0, 1.0P Cpa 0.30 (TASL6 3-4)
Pp ZZ1.0 x I.O0x Z/ 0.30 = 020pkV
F-12..
TM -SO-10
NAVFAC P45
AFM 84,Chap. 13
ALLOW&1A$S H44A. =
I 4
II
Ie8#
JPT O
F-13
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
.AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
I
W -~
_ liq n
I W - W
Q - I _ l_ NRIG/I
I
iE- -- WV#%,7.e
O
-6'
X
Oa
. 6(ASWUMD TO
*TAKE N(Y
_T GO',
,~ ¾,
,'
,0" ,, -M
j /%GT/4 OI TANK $UPtORT
GIVCtN: W7 OP TANK # WA r = /0. 0/ r/
7e/ss
ZONE 2 SE/SM/C ARaA ANJ) Z1.0 OCCUPANCY
ASSUME ALL JA#TS ARE P/N CQ)eCTI/0N5.
ASSUM COSS ldA4d6e25 AK rKE ysTON QV4x
,VEG4EC7 Vr OF SUPVOT r44SH44$.
R*e/qRd : f Nyo -rH E SIGN JEJSM/C FORCe.
SOLUION : HYOO-DMNAM/C EFFECTS AMe NEGLECUO
eV5N WHN rANKI/S PAIT/AC.Y PiLL. CACCULATON
P SrT/FFNESJ OF TAvV/ STRCtUZ: LSe $Nt6RGY
MUlWOo T-O M/t'O X,
C.6._
/K ,,: = O.G o.cM
,r
__: b ts I CO.5s"'
OSA
4$ T
A)el-
_
INRACIN6' ACs
/N TeN5I0N ONLY
,90
F-14
TM 6-809-10
NAVFAC P355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
COMAITATlON OF A : / I.<
as F L
MEMb&E LENGTH AA F _F__A
0
0
TcwCs-P = t 4 COR SEC,
F a 3/ 8 X /.0 X 2. I,
K 0.30 Wp c 0.26 p
r-p : 0.26C x J0:c 2.6C KIP-SI TAUJS
F-15
TM 8-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
(MOM65NT Q01677NG
ORAPSOF'QAM.
WrATEQ CAR2QYJNG
/iEeg LAref2ALLY
SUPPORT1 AT
HACH LOOA
4'RJ§E2 67ANDAIZO
WT- (4-a 8) 01PS -
A6SSUA46 RtSR
P/INNO Ar bAsE
. .,j.t
;i : i
; s .
'.
(PO/Nr )
5 0201 GO
I
Gl VEN : RISER AS OHO4IN IN MVLTI - GTO4
ILDING . SESM C tONe 4
!SSNT1A AA C/L r 8au Tr4eeije
1S NOT R6LA TSD TO F/IR idreOT0cr10o
REQUII . FINO SEIGMIC FORCE AT EACH
4ATERAL 1i1iiZ UPPO/Qr.
4
p-M'
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
co C FIXIE -Fl)(E 0 _ _ _ - 6_
J, 1 :
,0 , - "!- -
10iz
(i <
Cdz
2O
c
I
/0'I
o DI0'
APPROMMATS E~~~~~~~
4/
CONFGUPAATiaONS
PIPE SPANS AAJ JWOR7ER
rEAN MAX/MUM 916IA)
SPA t///T.' p. Z Cp. W* A PP/f S.
3' /.0g (T44E '-1) zx /.s (rAc A-Z); CA 030
Wp= (r. 0 fP/PE + co tEretf ' (/08
a Ja/Pr
i. eWr
AP a I. 0 Wp 0.4- Wp z 7. 3 5/'Z7
04. Purp* and top. no design examples In this appendix ar to lustrate principles, factors and
concepts Involved in seimic design. hese are not mandatory and other eqWvalent methods, materials or de-
tails compbring with this mnual and applicable agency guide peccations may be used
0-2. D"..g examples:
Desg
Example Description
J.,
._ft' .1
PI'V
I :;
TM -8O9-10
NAVFAC P-35
AFM 88-3 Chap. 13
DESIGN EXAMPLE: G-1
I :,.
,I
I
I
I
C4
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
7= 0. 3 WX 4
9
a=,0007 :300 224 iN
PrWPd O 01060".44S hV'
P44AIS Ofc S1.05 ijt PfORI 1 AI
40 ON TOWS,?
(O.5<-ACH /DE)
,M) 9Zrgr1o0v A 1
W.-v,1aRIt6 T/IApeAI 'I I2L& 7= 0.7
3 a20^0o.~022W
A 45 3V.O oO 4Wy .0
A D 57.6' 3.dPf74 4.30 = 1.45 SSC
A C 47.8' 24.0 2J3 5.7
Is 0 47.8' 24.0 78 5.40
C 0 Z8,4A 8.0 -.26 .3 *0.,1S APj4PIS.O To SACH
C P 45.3' 35 9S9 4.62
C 7.7' '4.0 787 .17 Slas O- roWeR .
D0 J& -37.7: £4.0 Z 2. 58 go
01 1,.OK 0 wed
g e. 2 .4' 8.0 -. 79 .3~ WHO4 rowalt:
ew 935.8' 4.0 .58 5.14
z is 29.7 24.0 #J5; .03 £a 27. IS
PM 29.7', 24.0 -787 .77
6H I7.68 Ioo A &LIZ 4
Z?7Yd
Design Example G-1 2 ,gf 3 Elevated Tank
04
TM 5809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFM 884, Chap. 13
V= 034 T IOFI)
W (EfE
= a 345 920 = /23.3 A/cPS.
45TeeSS Au A1AAWeef A e2 -o-o Ag pfg p.&4z-fL
_ sfowe ox/s. ysffj.3 l} ' ipleeDm iafz MM0L &MJr
AS 7f I %.WS ______
srSsse S
5
r'
SMAteS. o4
£
.05r 3../t3.3
rep5% ee
OF 4 £s
a Z
rweCc/rv
-w a.% 8oa O Ur
I '- IQ
'
/ -
A
ArTws /11 COSUAIc o CI 4s53 V
Ch1ECR COIUMN O0RCCS AD &pt/,cr
FOR LoAO APPLIE4O AT 45 rO
MAJOR AXIS O TOWtR 'WI
23.3x^32O Xl.Z07=± 2 i3 APS
G-5
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
Required. The period of the sloshing water, the maximu vertical dis-
placeeent of the water (dma.), and the design, seismic forces. Refer to
Chapter 11, paragraph 11-4.
0-6
TM -809-10
NAVFAC P455
AFMS-3, Chap. 13
7777 7777 77
GENCAA(L-4041
Z r 1.0, joliMIC ONS 4 (r4L6 5.)
z 1.0 (TA J2)
K t.o (AALe S- AN PA. -4)
C '//.fT 'a-
.J : MAXIMUM VAWrE (r NoT KNOWN)
c : s/,/ :f10.0//o.0 * 1.0
W (ATR)t v (o)(oJ)(c0.0424) *
wV, (Roop) : 0 (No ooU)
WW(rANIX#ALSL) 2O
01-7
/
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
. , f,:,
, ': :> q;z, - V 4a : 0.28 Co* to+/O): 35.3A
a . s:h
3 0.3 sxlO z.SPT.
: o.78h CrAftf /1 - 2)
* 0.78 xAO: 7.8PT.
M 48(TAw iHiec.) z(ECrEw,)h, * ww9 h:] / -)
: 0.26 to *20 ++loco (J.&)]
Gey
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-M
AFM 8W3, Chap. 13
Vj t 0. t Sx 4,$ a 0.4
hca 0.I0Ah a0.GOXIO G.OFT. (TAffie 11.)
he v 0.7h t 0.7qx°Ia 7 FT.
-Mtj (TANK 04'L. ) * ZZKCs WCh C (tHes)
AtPs 94.
r 6.0
It 2. 2 K-pr
c9
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3, Chap. 13
dX
d _ r0.76 (ZIXCS1 A
l/-A 'ZJKCS J (i1 G)
4
.. ......
,I '8 tti* $i: .
T07A4 DL6IGN OICUS [PAtA.t
/.44(5)]
V77OA : q02
al #t (1,- 4)
(-10
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-45
AFM 684, Chap. S
DESIGN EXALE: G-3
V a ZIKCSW
where Z - 3/8, I 1.0, K 2.0, Ts * 2.5, assume T0.3 sec.
CS - 0.133 (Section 4-3, Table 4-3)
W = Weight of tank plus contents.
;I ,:.. I .. V = 3/8 (1.0) (2.0) (0.133)
.'..1t.., * 0.10
" -;5 a/
4~~~~~~~~~~a
C11
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-35S
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
j1 -A0fIL -
Is .4Ls _ * JqO
;Lsi~t7, ., Al 5r =-2Z
i5A36- 4W'3l
'L
rOTA4 a .A4 -20,000 x83ar1O000'0
SA36i LS2'424 -0 A-12.a3*2- -. 3 0012a
;u 7aun .. uoMUe.s s 2*4 OR V= C
6'A. SAsDDLa s56BO x gr , 7erO*
ThASC WW'166/I -y223 300 s r7o.00
*200,000
61 m
27s°240#rorAL we,
ro_____ 770 908 A" 000 27,
A £,2c 000
16 -96
LLIt t tI t TT tf 1 930.87
I____IIIJ4.27t.O-
-37807 120.7 '
(D!,87# ROSULrA~r /5 IN
Design Example G-3 f 3 Horizontal Tank on around
pit
G-12
v
TM 5-809-10
NAVFAC P-355
AFM 88-3. Chap. 13
,8414 D05/GAt
P~f/6M iAC//JP ' P00A,4'a M/ A COAD4VC& wrA Jr4A4b
PAoccof./4 o oqewsr f'Qvo4&.A4# 2-7, 500
T4 . *4t Z?o oo (d. s 70 o §o
&SCC
t1OV A14DOI-1 S 2*CO 4 /0
-4- Z izaa~~~~~~~~~'
?S0.&7
_{42.0 4
70
IT
~T
~~-"
iiT II 1
93o. 8'
788.87 1072.87 9/0
G-13
INDEX
Poragraph
Allowable stresses . 3-3(A)5
lterations l-b. S-IJ)2
Alternatives ................ 2-10,S-3),10-2 10-7c(4)
, j Amplification factor (A,) ................. 10-4
An-chorage .................................................................................... 3- ) 4-9,-4b 10-1
Anchor bolts ................ 4-6d 8-224 10-Sc
Appendages :. S-8table J-4).9-4d, 10-4d
Approved building ystems ... 8-table -7)
Architectural elements 4-. 4-9 Chap 9
Base S - 9... -3(B), -(J
Bolts In concrete or masonry .ee Anchor bolts
Bond beams .- 12
Braced frames . 8. (18J-6, 5-3d, 6-1,6-2.6-2. 6-8,6-7
Bridge cranes .10-9
Bridges between buildings .4-c
Buried structures .11-7. Chap 12
C-factor .2-Gb. 8-3(D)4, -8(D)6, 4-8, 4-Sg
C. coefficient .- 3(0). Table 8-4
Caissons.3-8(J)S, 4-8
Cavity wal ............. ; 8-18
Ceilings . -(table 8-4),9-4c
Combined stresses ................. -8(J)2.4-5,4-64 8-64 10-2.
Commentary .8-8
Concrete .- (J)2b
Concrete braced frames ............... -'.6-. 6-a
Concrete diapragm. .6-4
Concrete fill .6-d
Concrete frames .S8(J)1, -Ga 7-8.7-4
Concrete shearwalls .6-
Concrete walls .8-8()3
Connections .2-9g, 3-(J)3. 4,4d, 4-6,5-Sc, 5-8, 6-4c, 6-7b, 8-22.9-46
Cost estimates . ......... 1d
Damage control .......... 2-9k, 9-4
, Definitions .8-(B). 8-8, 9-2
Deflection .2-9, 8-8(H), 4-&, 4-11. 5-2e, 6-Sb. 6-k 9-Sb. 10-1,10-7c
Deflection chart . 6-b(fig6-11)
Deformation compatibility .3-(J)1. 4-4f. 4-6c
Demands of earthquake motion. 2-a
Designanalysis . l-Sa
Design criteria ............ 1-IC, 2-6.-2,S-3.6-8. 7-SU 7-5a, 8-5.9-3
Design provisions ............ 2-6a8-3.4-5
Diaphragms ............ 2-9., 8-3(J)2. Chap 5
Direction offorce .............- (O..8-D, ).4-4c, 11-3
Distribution of force .............- 8 (E). 4-3, 4-4.5-24 6-2b
Drawings ............ 1-Sb. 8-26,12-7
Drift . 2-9k, S-S(H). 4-6c, 9-Sb
Dual systems.table S-).S-G table 3-7), 4-8k 6-2d
Ductile moment resisting apace frames72 7 7-8,7-5
Ductility .62- 2-9h, 3-3(J)1. 7-2a
Dynamc analysi ............ I-lb, 2-104-4g, 10-2d
Earthquake motion ............ 2-6a
Electrical elements ............ 4-94 Chap 10
Elevators ............ 10-10
Equipment ............ 4-9c, Chap 10
Essential faclities ............. -6a
Exterior elements ............ . 3-3(J)3
Fp.-3. 4-9
Ft ............ .8-8(E), 4-4a
'I
Index-i
Fined masonry ........... 8-20c
Fire protection stes .............. 10-7.
FireWalls .............. 8-23
Flexibility factor ............... 6-2 6-4.4 6-6 6 5 - 6d
Flexibility limitations ............. 5-2f
Flexible equipment ............. 10-1 10-2b. 10-4.10-6b
Forces ............. 2-24 3- ) 3-8(E), 3-3(0). 4-3.4-4.4-9.6-24 10-lb. 10-34b 10-4e
Foundations ............. 2-%K 4-4d 4-8
Frames ............... .... S-JlJ-6 4-Chap7
Future expansion ............. ; 2-11
Groundmotion .............. 2-3
Groutedn asonry .......... 8-20a
Guyed stacks ................ 10-
Gypsum ......................................... 6-6ig6-13)
6-5.
Height limitations .......... -G)l,table J-7. 4-Sk 8-8.8-1S4 8-14a
Hgh4ift grouting .......... 8-20a
Highrisk facilities ................. *-
Ind.x-2
Paragraph
Reseponse ............................ 2- 2-Sc 10-2c, 10-4a
R etin............................. in gsalls 11-6
Rigid elements ............................ 3-8Jl
Rigid equipment ............................ 10-2 10-. 10-Sa
Rigidity .............................. 4-4.. 6-2d
Sfactor ........................... . 2-6b, 3-3(D)4,8-3(D8. 4-3f 4 -3g
SEAOC ............................ 2-6ao 3-3,6-9a, 7-Sa, 7-Ia, 10-la
Seismi Joints ............................ 4-7b
Seismic pace frames ........................... 7-2a.7-6b
Seismic zones .......................... . 2-7a, 3-3(table S-iL 3-4, 3-4(table 3-7), 4-Sc
8eparations .......................... . 3-3(H)2. 4-7, 10-7c(9)
Stbccks ........................... 3-3(E)2. 4-4a
Shear wlls ........................... 2-9f, 3-9(J)1. Chap 6
Site p e ri
T.......... .. 3-3(D)8. 4-Sf
Site planning ........ . 2-7.4-2a
Space frmes ....... a. Chap 7
Specifications ........ 1-Sc, 4-lld
Stacked bond ........ 8-17
Stacks . 10-8
Stais .. 2-9k. 4-7d 9-4f
Steel deck . 6-6
Steel frames . 3-S6, 7-5.7-6
Storage racks . 3-(GXtable 3-4) 9-4g
Storagetanks . 10-4k, 11-2,11-3,11-4.11-5
Stresses .......... -3(A)5. 8-6
Structural design ............ 2-2b, 4-5
Structural response .2-4.2-6b
Structural system .2-8,2-9.3-3J). 3-6.4-2c
Structures other than buildings .4-10.10-54 Chap 11
Stud walls.-6(table 3-7), 6-5, 6-6
Surface bonding 8-25
Symbols ............ ; -(C), 5-2b, 6-6b. S-5c, 8-Sf
Symmetry ................ ; 2-9b
T (period) .- S(D)7,.4-84 6-2d, 10-4c
~ T. (equipment period) .10-4b
^To (site period). .3-3(8.4-Sf
Tall buildings S - S.-(
Tanks .... See Storage tanks
Se...........
Tieown ........... See Hold-down
Torsion ...... .. . ........... -. 4. 6-2d
4-4,
Tsunami ........... 2-7d
U-factor ............ 6-SaUXA). 7-Sa1XA)
Utility system ............ Chap 12
Veneered walls ..... 8-19
Vertical acceleration . ... 3-S(A)4
Vertical boundary elements ............ 6-3a(l)D)
Vertical forces .................... -S(J)2. 4-4c
Vertica load-carrying system .. , 4.-.S.c.....
4-9c, 8-9
.....................
Wallopenings ...................... 6-24 8-16
Wallpiers .................................................................................................... 8-15
Walls S-S...-()3.8-b. Chap 6.8-13
Weatherproofing .. 8-24
Weight limitations ................................. 10-2c
Weight. W ...................... 2-Gb 3-(D)5.4-3 4-lla
Windows ...................... 9-4a
Wooddiaphragms .. 3-3(J)3.5-7
Wood frames ...................... 6-7.7-7
Wood walls ....................... 8-SItable 3-5). 3-4itable 3-7).6-S
Z-factor ................................. 2-Gb 3-3(D)1(table S-11.4-Sa
Zones ...........
....................... S
SeSblzdczones
Indx-3